Dozens rallied against a proposal to build Kenya’s first nuclear power plant in one of the country’s top coastal tourist hubs which also houses a forest on the tentative list of the UNESCO World Heritage site. Kilifi County is renowned for its pristine sandy beaches where hotels and beach bars line the 165-mile-long coast and visitors boat and snorkel around coral reefs or bird watch in Arabuko Sokoke forest, a significant natural habitat for the conservation of rare and endangered species, according to the U.N. organization.
Demonstrators hold banners reading in Swahili “Sitaki nuclear” during an anti-nuclear protest in Kilifi, Kenya.(AP)
The project, proposed last year, is set to be built in the town of Kilifi — about 522 kilometers (324 miles) southeast of the capital, Nairobi. Many residents have openly opposed the proposal, worried about what they say are the negative effects of the project on people and the environment, leading to a string of protesters which at times turned violent. Muslim for Human Rights (MUHURI) led the march Friday in Kilifi to the county governor’s office where they handed him a petition opposing the construction of the plant.
Protests Erupt Against Kenya’s First Nuclear Power Plant
Some chanted anti-nuclear slogans while others carried placards with “Sitaki nuclear”, Swahili for “I don’t want nuclear.” The construction of the 1,000MW nuclear plant is set to begin in 2027 and be operational by 2034, with a cost of 500 billion Kenyan shillings ($3.8 billion). Francis Auma, a MUHURI activist, told the Associated Press that the negative effects of the nuclear plant outweigh its benefits.
“We say that this project has a lot of negative effects; there will be malformed children born out of this place, fish will die, and our forest Arabuko Sokoke, known to harbor the birds from abroad, will be lost,” Auma said during Friday’s protests. Juma Sulubu, a resident who was beaten by the police during a previous demonstration, attended Friday’s march and said: “Even if you kill us, just kill us, but we do not want a nuclear power plant in our Uyombo community.”
Timothy Nyawa, a fisherman, participated in the rally out of fear that a nuclear power plant would kill fish and in turn his source of income. “If they set up a nuclear plant here, the fish breeding sites will all be destroyed.” Phyllis Omido, the executive director at the Centre for Justice Governance and Environmental Action, who also attended the march, said Kenya’s eastern coastal towns depended on eco-tourism as the main source of income and a nuclear plant would threaten their livelihoods. “We host the only East African coastal forest, we host the Watamu marine park, we host the largest mangrove plantation in Kenya. We do not want nuclear (energy) to mess up our ecosystem,” she said.
Her center filed a petition in Nov. 2023 in parliament calling for an inquiry and claiming that locals had limited information on the proposed plant and the criteria for selecting preferred sites. It also raised concerns over the risks to health, the environment and tourism in the event of a nuclear spill, saying the country was undertaking a “high-risk venture” without proper legal and disaster response measures in place. The petition also expressed unease over security and the handling of radioactive waste in a country prone to floods and drought.
The Senate suspended the inquiry until a lawsuit two layers filed in July seeking to stop the plant’s construction, claiming public participation meetings were rushed and urging the Nuclear Power and Energy Agency (Nupea) not to start the project, was heard. Nupea said construction would not begin for years and environmental laws were under consideration, adding that adequate public participation was carried out.
The nuclear agency also published an impact assessment report last year that recommended policies be put in place to ensure environmental protections, including detailed plans for the handling of radioactive waste, measures to mitigate environmental harm, such as setting up a nuclear unit in the national environment management authority, and emergency response teams.
UPDATE 2: Fortnite update 31.40 is available to download on PlayStation, Xbox, PC, Nintendo Switch and mobile. The latest Fortnite update introduces the Fortnitemares Halloween event, which includes new cosmetics and rewards, as well as map changes and the introduction of new weapons. Fans can unlock the rewards by completing challenges for the duration of the Fortnitemares event. According to insiders like Hypex, you’ll receive The Fangler Bass for completing one quest, the Horde’s War Wheel Back Bling for three quest, the Jack-o’-Drifter Contrail for seven quests and The Great Scarecrow Glider for 11 quests. There are also a series of Jigsaw challenges based on the Saw movies. If you see a monitor with Billy the Puppet, you can approach it to start the challenge. Two players will be forced wear explosive Billy-inspired bear masks, which will explode when time runs out. You need to eliminate your target before this happens. You’ll receive special loot for successfully completing the challenge. You can see some of the free rewards below.
UPDATE: Fortnitemares update 31.40 has been given a new release date by Epic Games. Following a last-minute delay, Epic has confirmed that the game will now be taken offline for update 31.40 on Saturday, October 12 at 7am BST UK time.
The news was announced by Epic Games on X: “While we continue final preparations for v31.40, we are delaying the start of downtime by a few hours. We’ll provide another update when we plan to take Fortnite servers offline.
“In order to ensure a properly frightful Fortnitemares, v31.40 will go into downtime on Saturday at 2 AM ET.
“We apologise for the confusion and delay, and will let you know once the update is live.”
ORIGINAL: Fortnite fans are counting down to the release of the Fortnitemares Halloween event, which launches as part of update 31.40. Fortnite update 31.40 has an October 11 release date on PS5, PlayStation 4, Xbox Series X|S, Xbox One, PC, Nintendo Switch and Android. The update launches alongside a period of server downtime, which begins at 9am BST UK time. According to Epic Games, matchmaking will be disabled at around 8.30am, so make sure you’re in a game beforehand if you want to play right up until maintenance begins. The news was announced by Epic Games on X, alongside confirmation that Fortnitemares will launch as part of the update.
“Prepare for a frightening time!” reads an Epic tweet. “Downtime for v31.40 begins at 4 AM ET with matchmaking ending shortly beforehand.”
Epic has warned players that this week’s Reload Platform Cups and Trios Cash Cups will be delayed to make room for the update.
“As part of this release, we will be shifting this week’s Reload Platform Cups and Trios Cash Cups to run on Saturday. Players can check the Compete tab for final timings in their region.”
In terms of what fans can expect, the Fortnitemares event will introduce countless new skins and collaborations, including Leatherface from Texas Chainsaw Massacre, Sally and Pumpkin King from Nightmare Before Christmas, and Mephisto from the MCU.
It’s likely Epic will release an event pass to celebrate Fortnitemares, as well as a host of challenges and rewards.
The map will also be updated with a selection of new landmarks and points of interest, including changes to Grand Glacier, Brawler’s Battleground and Restored Reels
According to Fortnite insiders such as Hypex, new items will include a SAW Mythic, the returning Witch Broom, Pumpkin Launcher, Wood Stake Shotgun, Candy and more.
LEGO Fortnite, on the other hand, will receive a split-screen mode, as well as the Brick or Treat LEGO Pass, complete with fresh rewards.
Epic will also make a host of bug fixes and gameplay tweaks. You can see the early 31.40 patch notes below.
Fortnite 31.40 update patch notes…
GENERAL
• Built-In Emotes do not play in Creative / UEFN Experiences
– We’re investigating an issue where built-in emotes, emotes attached to certain Outfits only, do not play when in a Creative or UEFN experience.
BATTLE ROYALE
• The setting ‘Lock Input Method as Mouse’ is not working correctly
– The Lock Mouse Input setting may not function as intended
• Back Bling Beacon Glass displaying incorrectly in the Locker
– When players are choosing the Back Bling Beacon Glass from their Locker, the shards of the Back Bling are falling off.
LEGO FORTNITE
• Player 2 cannot upgrade the LEGO Fortnite Pass reward track in split-screen mode.
– When trying to upgrade the LEGO Fortnite Pass reward track in split-screen mode, the “UPGRADE” button may not function as intended for Player 2.
• Bottom of HUD can disappear after using macrobinoculars
– After using macrobinoculars, the bottom portion of HUD may sometimes disappear.
ROCKET RACING
• BALL-R wheel is displaying incorrect edit styles
– BALL-R wheel is displaying incorrect edit styles
• Error when equipping the Beast Mode Boost.
– A “Profile does not own variant” error may appear when players try to equip the Beast Mode Boost.
FORTNITE FESTIVAL
• Band members may be lacking animations.
– At times, character or band member models might have stilted and inert animations on Main Stage.
• Degraded audio quality when using Jam Tracks as Lobby Tracks.
– We’re investigating reports of noticeably lower audio quality when using certain Jam Tracks as Lobby Tracks and will provide an update as soon as we have a confirmed fix.
FORTNITE MOBILE
• Players may be unable to move after exiting Changing Booth
– Upon exiting a Changing Booth Device in Creative, players’ character may not move.
If you’re reading this thinking the days of cheap and cheerful motoring are over, think again!
Although you’ll struggle to find a sub-$20,000 drive-away deal in 2024, there are still plenty of affordable new cars that offer practicality, the latest technology, and a long warranty – what’s not to love?
With that said, some models are cheap for a reason, and nobody wants to be disappointed after ripping the covers off on their brand new car.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Suzuki Swift Hybrid
Chery Tiggo 4 Pro
Kia Picanto
Hyundai Venue
Whether you’re after a first car, last car, or something in between, the CarExpert team has been busy comparing the value options in today’s market.
Read on to find out what new cars we would buy with a strict budget of $30,000.
Here are some of the contenders:
Kia Picanto
Suzuki Ignis
Hyundai Venue
Chery Tiggo 4 Pro
Mitsubishi ASX
Suzuki Swift hybrid
Mazda 2
MG 5
Kia Stonic
MG ZST
Mazda CX-3
GWM Haval Jolion
Chery Omoda 5
Toyota Yaris
Kia Cerato
Hyundai i30
Skoda Kamiq Run-Out
Marton Pettendy: Kia Cerato
The increasing lack of sub-$20K and now even sub-$25K new cars available in Australia today has been well documented, but thankfully there at least a dozen solid choices priced under $30,000 drive-away.
Cerato S Sedan
Of course, which one you choose will depend on your circumstances. Small families and empty nesters will love the Kia Stonic and Mazda CX-3, just as much as youngsters will rightly prefer the Suzuki Swift and Mazda 2.
With the old MG 3 now finally shuffling off (hurrah!), the Kia Picanto remains the only sub-$20K option available and the Mazda 2 the sub-$25K choice in both manual and auto form.
But if it was my money, I’d buy the bigger, better entry-level Kia Cerato S auto hatch in any colour you like – with a seven-year-warranty – for just under $30K D/A.
Interested in buying a Kia Cerato? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Kia Cerato
Josh Nevett: Skoda Kamiq Run-Out
Talk about timing!
Just this week, Skoda Australia announced it will offer remaining MY24 Kamiq Run-Out stock for $29,990 drive-away, a $3000 discount that sees this small European SUV sneak in under the $30k barrier – and what a car it is for $30,000.
Under the bonnet you get a little 1.0-litre three-cylinder turbo that’s both characterful and efficient, paired with a DSG that’s slick-shifting if you can forgive its hesitance in heavy traffic.
Inside the Kamiq is spacious and practical, with a decent boot and room for the whole family. It’s also well-equipped, with an 8.0-inch infotainment touchscreen, tactile touch points, four USB outlets, and a few Skoda ‘simply clever’ touches.
What’s more, it’s not even that expensive to service despite the European badging. So what’s the catch? There’s only 250 left, so get in quick before they’re all gone.
Interested in buying a Skoda Kamiq? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Skoda Kamiq
James Wong: Suzuki Swift Hybrid
Where other brands have moved away from affordable segments and cheaper entry-level trim variants, Suzuki has bucked the trend.
Yes it’s not as cheap as it once was, but the Suzuki Swift Hybrid (mild-hybrid really) starts from a sharp $24,490 drive-away making it Australia’s cheapest new hybrid vehicle.
While the 24V MHEV system isn’t quite as sophisticated as electrified systems offered by rivals, the Swift will quite easily match its circa-4.0L/100km fuel claim and offers plenty of features and safety tech from even the base grade.
It also comes in a bunch of fun colours, and is perfectly sized for city life. What’s not to love?
Interested in buying a Suzuki Swift Hybrid? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Suzuki Swift Hybrid
Paul Maric: Kia Stonic
We just helped my mother-in-law buy a new car in this price point and landed on the Kia Stonic.
For somebody stepping up from a Mazda 2 the Stonic isn’t a huge leap forward in terms of size, and it has all the bells and whistles she needs to step into the modern age.
The warranty and non-outrageous service pricing was also a bonus.
Interested in buying a Kia Stonic? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Kia Stonic
Jordan Mulach: Kia Picanto
The Kia Picanto is in rare air, being one of the few manuals available at such a comparatively cheap price point.
A few bucks about $23,000 will get you a manual GT-Line in Sporty Blue, drive-away. There’s not many vehicles out there that can offer so much tech and safety gear for that much.
You can criticise the GT-Line for existing in a segment dedicated to cheap and cheerful offerings, but if you can, why not get something packed with features?
Plus, having $7k left over from $30,000 gives a lot of options for buying a second car…
Interested in buying a Kia Picanto? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Kia Picanto
William Stopford: Mazda 2 and Hyundai i30 Sedan
There’s probably no objective reason to buy a Mazda 2 over the admittedly impressive new Suzuki Swift, but I’m still fond of the old girl.
It’s slightly more expensive than the Swift, slightly thirstier (if on cheaper 91 RON regular unleaded), has older infotainment tech, and comparing apples to apples it doesn’t really have much extra kit.
Nevertheless, I find the little tiddler quite charming even if the base model got some bad Botox with its most recent facelift.
I’m loathe to pick the same car two weeks in a row, but I also have to point out the base Hyundai i30 Sedan is currently being offered for $29,990 drive-away, offering virtually mid-sized interior space for mid-range Mazda 2 money.
That’s a combination too tempting to ignore, and the Hyundai’s mid-life facelift brought a major update to its powertrain that makes it much more pleasant to drive.
Interested in buying a Mazda 2? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here Interested in buying a Hyundai i30? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
While it may be on the older side and nowhere near as affordable as it once was, I’d argue one of the best small cars under $30,000 you can buy is still a Mazda 2 Hatch.
If you’re looking for a brand-new first, or perhaps last car, you can’t go wrong.
This car feels at home in the hustle and bustle of the city, but also isn’t completely out of its element on the highway. It really does bring a big-car feel in a small package.
Out of all the Mazda 2 variants currently on sale I’d likely opt for the base Pure automatic ($24,870 before on-roads) due to it bringing the biggest bang for your buck and for ease of use.
Sure there’s the Pure manual that’s $2000 cheaper and would likely be more engaging to drive, but not everyone has the patience to deal with a manual anymore.
Interested in buying a Mazda 2? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Mazda 2
Max Davies: Suzuki Swift Hybrid
I enjoy a lot of the cars that could fit here, but there are a couple of things I’d be looking for if I was in the market.
The first is a hatchback body. While seating capacity doesn’t change between these small sedans, SUVs, and hatches, I think a hatch will give you the best of both worlds in terms of comfort, size, and practicality.
The other is the option of a manual transmission. Cars under $30,000 are often fitted with tiny engines mated to dreadful continuously variable transmissions, so if I’m going to be going for a car that isn’t powerful I’d want to at least be able to row through the gears myself.
That leaves few to choose from, but the Suzuki Swift Hybrid is my pick. At $24,490 drive-away in base spec, it’s great value and still maintains an impressive economy rating even with a manual transmission.
I know manuals aren’t the favoured option anymore, but why not have some fun if you can? You may miss out on things like heated seats and alloy wheels, but it still has wireless Apple CarPlay as standard.
If you must have an automatic, there are still a bunch of Swifts to choose from that add all of that back.
Interested in buying a Suzuki Swift Hybrid? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
As the festive season graces India, the real estate market is poised for its traditional surge, fuelled by developer incentives and strong economic indicators. This year, a confluence of factors, including evolving buyer preferences and robust infrastructure development, is driving growth, particularly in emerging luxury hotspots like Gurugram.
CBRE’s Festive Season Residential Outlook 2024 predicts continued growth, building on the strong sales performance witnessed throughout 2023 and the first nine months of 2024. Developers are preparing a range of attractive offers for homebuyers, including EMI waivers, GST exemptions, and complimentary add-ons like modular kitchens and furnished apartments. Some developers are even partnering with banks to offer fixed interest rates for specified periods, further sweetening the deal.
“Building on the strong sales performance throughout 2023 and the Jan-Sep 2024 period, the housing market remains well-positioned for continued growth as we approach the festive season,” says Anshuman Magazine, Chairman & CEO (India, South-East Asia, Middle East & Africa) of CBRE. “Traditionally, this time of the year is considered auspicious for home purchases, hence the sector will witness a surge in demand, particularly from previously hesitant first-time homebuyers.”
Gurugram, in particular, is attracting significant attention, emerging as a focal point for luxury real estate investments. Major infrastructure developments, coupled with a growing affluent population, are driving this trend. Knight Frank’s India Real Estate Report reveals a 12% year-on-year increase in property sales across the Delhi-NCR region in the first half of 2024, with Gurugram playing a significant role. Areas like Golf Course Road, Golf Course Extension Road, and Southern Peripheral Road (SPR) are highly sought after due to their excellent connectivity, commercial expansion, and luxury residential projects.
Aakash Ohri, Joint Managing Director and Chief Business Officer of DLF Homes, notes, “The Indian festive season has evolved into the annual high point for residential real estate. This auspicious time is seen as an ideal opportunity to invest in wealth-creating assets. The growing significance of homeownership, bolstered by consumer confidence in recent years, has notably stimulated housing demand.” He adds, “This year, the sector is poised to experience a substantial upsurge, particularly in the luxury segment, attracting HNIs and UHNIs, as well as significant investments from the NRI community.”
This demand for luxury is reflected in a report by Liases Foras, which shows that luxury property prices in Gurugram increased by an average of 8% in the first half of 2024. Prime areas like Golf Course Extension Road and Dwarka Expressway are outpacing the national average in price appreciation, solidifying their status as prime investment hotspots.
Vineet Dawar, Senior Vice President of Sales & Strategy at Elan Group, echoes this sentiment, stating, “With market sentiment already strong, we anticipate that the festive season will further accelerate the real estate sector’s growth. Both the residential and commercial segments are seeing promising buyer interest, particularly in key areas of the Delhi-NCR such as Dwarka Expressway and SPR road.”
Gurugram’s success is intrinsically linked to its continuous infrastructure improvements. The expansion of the Rapid Metro and the upgrade of SPR have significantly enhanced connectivity, attracting both residential and commercial interest. Savills India reports that commercial leasing in Gurugram grew by 18% in the first half of 2024, with SPR and Dwarka Expressway emerging as key growth corridors for IT parks, retail outlets, and office spaces.
Rahul Singla, Director of Mapsko Group, highlights a shift in buyer preferences, stating, “After the pandemic, there’s been a marked rise in demand for homes that offer more space and lifestyle features like work-from-home setups. We’re expecting strong interest in the mid-to-luxury market segments, as more buyers now prefer comfort, convenience, and enhanced living experiences.”
Mohit Malhotra, Founder and CEO of NEOLIV, adds, “As the festive season approaches, expectations for sales in Gurgaon’s real estate market are high. This period typically ignites increased buyer interest, driven by optimism and the desire to invest in new homes. Developers are expected to roll out attractive offers and along with the ongoing infrastructure improvements we can expect a good festive period.”
Beyond Gurugram, emerging markets like Sonipat and Panchkula are also witnessing increased real estate activity. Sonipat, benefiting from its proximity to Delhi and ongoing infrastructure projects like the KMP Expressway, is attracting both residential and industrial investment. Panchkula, close to Chandigarh, is seeing growing interest due to its strategic location and burgeoning IT and business hubs.
Impact of Loan Rates
Despite higher loan rates, homeownership remains a priority for many. RBI data shows a substantial 40% increase in home loan deployment, reflecting the resilience and confidence in the housing market. However, credit providers need to remain cautious to manage NPAs effectively.
In conclusion, the festive season is set to illuminate India’s real estate market, driven by a potent mix of developer incentives, evolving buyer preferences, and strong economic fundamentals. While Gurugram shines as a luxury hotspot, emerging markets are also presenting compelling investment opportunities. As the year progresses, the sector appears poised for sustained growth, fuelled by the enduring aspiration for homeownership and the allure of a prosperous future.
Are you ready to discover the next big thing in crypto? While Dogecoin (DOGE) and Avalanche (AVAX) have been popular, experts are now talking about DTX Exchange. This new altcoin could grow 10 times bigger, making it one of the best picks for 2024.
With its strong technology and more people paying attention to it, many believe that DTX could become even more successful than DOGE and AVAX. In this article, we’ll explain why DTX Exchange might be your best investment this year!
Dogecoin price update: Could a surge be coming?
Dogecoin (DOGE) is a popular meme coin. Its price has gone up and down this past week, even though it tried to rise before.
Some experts think Dogecoin’s price might increase soon. Right now, Dogecoin’s value is around $15.78 billion. Its price is up by 1.3% at the time of writing, making it worth $ 0.108 at the moment.
Dogecoin’s price isn’t affected much by Bitcoin’s recent drop. In the past 24 hours, Dogecoin’s trading volume went up by 11.11%. This means more people are buying and selling Dogecoin. This potentially shows that traders are feeling more positive.
If we look at Dogecoin’s price chart, it has been going down since March. Other cryptocurrencies have followed a similar pattern. But lately, the price has shown some upward movement. There is a pattern on the chart where the price goes up and down between support and resistance levels.
Avalanche (AVAX) sees growth after launching Retro9000 program
Avalanche (AVAX) has done well in the market over the last two months. On September 26, 2024, the Avalanche (AVAX) Foundation started a new program called Retro9000.
This program helps developers create important tools for the Avalanche (AVAX) network. It goes along with a big upgrade called Avalanche9000, which is the biggest since the platform started in 2020.
Retro9000 helps developers by giving them money to work on new ideas without worrying about costs. After this program was announced, Avalanche AVAX’s price went up.
In the past week, AVAX’s price increased by 3.62%, by 1.79% over the month, and by 20.23% in the last three months.
DTX Exchange emerges as a top performer, Raising over $4 Million in record time
DTX Exchange (DTX) is getting a lot of attention this week after raising more than $4.1 million in early funding. What’s even more exciting is that this happened fast, beating most other new ICOs and making DTX the best presale of the quarter.
The reason for DTX’s success is its smart idea and big potential. This has caught the interest of big investors, including those connected to Avalanche (AVAX) and Dogecoin. DTX is special because it combines features from both decentralized exchanges (DEX) and centralized exchanges (CEX), giving users the best of both worlds. Some of its cool features include wallet-based trading and non-custodial storage, meaning users can trade and store assets safely without someone else holding onto them.
DTX also wants to connect traditional finance (TradFi) with decentralized finance (DeFi). It allows access to many types of assets, like stocks, bonds, forex, and cryptocurrencies, all in one place.
Right now, the presale is still going on, and it’s a great chance for investors to get in early. Many smart investors are buying in because each token is only $0.08 in the fourth round of the presale.
Experts are predicting that DTX could see a massive 4,500% increase in value once it gets listed on Tier-1 exchanges, which could even make it perform better than Dogecoin!
Like most people, I hate spending money on some things but love spending on others.
For example, I’ve been known to overpay for hotels, restaurants, good wine, and good food because I enjoy them. But I’m a Scrooge when it comes to things like cars or handyman tools (screwdrivers, hammers, pliers, etc.).
In marketing, I find that most organizations are the same way. They’ll readily and eagerly purchase (and even pay above-market prices for) some things. But they’ll tell everyone to get other things as inexpensively as possible.
Technology is one of those things companies want to buy inexpensively.
Technology as the gatekeeper
Technology investment is one of the biggest barriers to innovative marketing changes. Inevitably, when teams get excited to try a new approach in their marketing strategy, everybody gets excited until this realization hits: They’ll have to invest in new tools to get the project done.
That’s when analysis paralysis sets in. Teams often feel they can’t move forward with the new approach until they decide on the technology purchase. But they can’t decide on the specific technology until they’ve designed the new approach.
“The technology will help enforce the standards and how we’ll work,” they think. “But don’t we need to create the new ways we’ll work before we can create the standards?”
It can be messy.
Now that it’s the fourth quarter (for many), planning is underway. Budgets are due. New strategies are being formed for 2025. Leftover money must be spent before the year’s end.
Naturally, thoughts turn to technology needs. You may be mulling over questions such as:
What technology should we budget for (and why is it AI)?
Which new tools will help us achieve our plan (and why aren’t they AI)?
What cool new capability might we buy with that leftover money (is it AI)?
This year’s tech questions seem particularly complex.
I hear many marketers asking if a customer data platform will become the next new thing. Others don’t even know what a customer data platform is.
Some talk about finally upgrading to a digital asset management system (DAM). Others wonder if the four DAMs their company already has are enough to accomplish the new thing they want.
How about a new analytics solution? Some people hate Google Analytics 4. But what would be better?
Then there’s AI. Is it time to finally invest in an enterprise AI solution? Or should you stick with the ones embedded in your productivity suites?
And didn’t product X get four new updates last week? Wait. Did we forget about intent data? Add that to our tech dream board, too!
Before you buy any or all of that, pause. Take a deep breath. Realize that all those dreams could quickly become nightmare scenarios if they require skill levels your company can’t accommodate.
That’s one reason marketing technology decisions can be incredibly frustrating. Everyone wants the technology to be easy.
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
Caveat emptor: Think before you buy
Have you heard this aphorism? “A boat is a hole in the water that you throw money into.”
It means that when you decide to invest in a boat, you’re not just buying the boat — you’re also committing to everything that goes along with owning a boat. That includes renting a dock, acquiring a trailer, keeping up with the significant maintenance required, and paying for the fuel and other costs of operating it.
It’s not a stretch to adapt that saying to our industry: “Marketing tech is a hole the business throws money and time into.”
That doesn’t mean you shouldn’t invest in it (or buy that boat if you need it or love to go out on the water). Marketing technology can return extraordinary value. But, yeah, no one’s excited about writing the check to pay for it.
The key is to be conscious of what you’re buying. Any marketing technology worth purchasing involves all these elements:
Implementation
Training
User learning curve time
Ongoing administration
I’ve seen some real challenges on this front.
One B2B company I work with has been stuck in some form of software selection or technology implementation cycle since the beginning of the year. It’s limited in the number of creative campaigns it can craft because it has been so busy figuring out the technology to help craft more creative campaigns.
Ironic.
But if tech purchases won’t make your 2025 content dreams come true, what should you focus on to set your program up for success?
I have a few ideas.
Focus on change first, then technology
I’ve been advising clients and colleagues to worry less about which new technology will be a must-have for 2025. Instead, I recommend developing the muscle to evolve content activities into repeatable processes. Then, you can apply technology to support or enforce those processes.
How do you do this?
I find that it’s critical to hold frequent discussions with stakeholders about the audience and customer journey. It’s the one thing that is genuinely cross-functional, involving not only marketing but also sales, customer service, finance, product, brand, and even the C-suite.
In other words, your team probably isn’t the only one creating bold new content plans for the coming year.
Expect to participate in many meetings to understand what the sales team wants, what the brand team thinks, what the public relations crew has on their mind, and what senior leadership thinks.
But success isn’t built from a mutual understanding of separate agendas. The teams must come together to develop one collaborative content strategy for customer and audience engagement.
To achieve it, focus on these three fundamentals:
1. Orchestrate connected experiences, not siloed hand-offs
Think about 2025 planning in a way that lets you decouple customer and audience data management from the content experience. Explore how you can create a unified view of your subscribers and customers so that things like “audience,” “lead,” “opportunity,” and “customer” are attributes in a single database instead of siloed buckets.
That probably means technology will eventually play a role. But first, create awareness of what content is planned, by whom, and where it will be distributed.
Almost every business would benefit from communicating about the portfolio of content that will be created rather than meeting about what was created.
2. Shift to meaning-driven (not data-driven) content operations
What meaning do the email address, first name, and last name of someone who registered for a white paper contain? If it’s early in the customer’s journey, chances are little to none.
You can, perhaps, draw some inferences about buying intent based on the topic of the digital asset. But, the intent with which that data was provided may completely circumvent that inference. (How many [email protected] or similar email addresses do you get?)
That kind of marketing data has no inherent meaning. It’s just a collection of facts, figures, and attributes. You need more interactions with that person to develop a relationship.
Focus on developing new strategies to find the emotional value in information that’s given rather than gathered.
Consider an email address gathered from a gated white paper versus one given to subscribe to a weekly newsletter after reading that white paper. How much more valuable is the email address when you know it’s given willingly, trustingly, and with the expectation of receiving valuable communication from your brand?
3. Organize for agility, not speed
You’ve probably read many essays about how marketing teams need to operate with more agility. Just remember, agility isn’t about moving faster. It’s about focusing on high-value, high-priority activities.
The constant pressure of more and more content arises from a fear of moving too slowly. Replace that fear with joy by planning to spend more time developing powerful thought leadership stories and less time creating endless assets.
Think about how to shift your processes to spend more time planning powerful, meaningful, differentiated content. Once you create those stories, you can decide how to transform them into digital assets.
Can you separate the process of content creation and digital asset production and end up more agile? I think you can.
Content marketing field of dreams
An “if we buy it, they will come” approach to technology (to paraphrase a famous movie line) rarely leads to success.
Yet, it’s one of the primary drivers of technology selections. Too many businesses allow their technology purchases to drive their future marketing approach.
You can’t measure success by how much technology you deploy. That’s like thinking you can get to work faster by purchasing more cars. You’ll just accrue more debt and spend too much time managing and maintaining those cars.
What will 2025 bring? More AI? A social media collapse? Google search collapse? Paid media explosion? The growth of influencers? The return of the metaverse? NFTs? A B2B version of TikTok? We. Don’t. Know.
But, as you’re looking at your budget, plan, or year-end spending, take a beat. Before you commit to a tool purchase, think about what you hope you and your team will be spending time and money on this time next year.
Write it out. What does your day look like?
That’ll help you dream about how to accomplish it. You may still hate spending on technology, but the ability to apply it to a better purpose should diminish the sting.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Robert Rose consults and hosts workshops on helping marketing teams align their marketing processes to all kinds of technologies – including generative AI. Contact him to learn about those programs.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The iPhone maker’s stock hit $133.82 in early trading Monday, putting Apple less than $1 away from its intraday trading high of $134.54, reached in April 2015. Apple’s stock ended the day at $133.29, beating its previous record closing price of $133, set in February 2015.
The stock surge, pushing Apple(AAPL) to a $700 billion market cap, comes amid renewed optimism for the iPhone.
Goldman Sachs raised its price target for the stock on Monday, citing the likelihood of “major new features” like “3D sensing” being added to the next iPhone model, according to an investor note provided to CNNMoney.
Apple’s previous high was set six months after it released the redesigned iPhone 6 and 6 Plus, kicking off what CEO Tim Cook described as the “mother of all upgrades.”
Since then, however, Apple has bucked its tradition of overhauling the iPhone every other year. The newest models on the market today look nearly identical to the iPhones available in late 2014.
The long wait, combined with this year marking the iPhone’s tenth anniversary, has only raised expectations that Apple is about to significantly overhaul its smartphone and reignite demand.
Related: Tim Cook: ‘Apple would not exist without immigration’
Apple’s annual sales fell in the 2016 fiscal year for the first time since 2001 as iPhone sales, still the majority of its business, declined in three consecutive quarters.
Apple even cut its CEO’s pay by 15% due to the company’s failure to meet its performance goals for both sales and profits.
But that losing streak just ended.
Apple sales started growing again in the December quarter, driven by stronger demand for the iPhone — particularly for the larger and more expensive iPhone 7 Plus.
The company sold 78.3 million iPhones for the quarter, setting a new record. At least some of that may be due to the Samsung’s smartphone recall woes.
Mark Moskowitz, an analyst with William Blair, wrote in an investor note this month, “Samsung’s Note 7 struggles likely helped.”
The iPhone isn’t the only reason Wall Street is excited about Apple. There’s also President Trump.
Despite Trump clashing with Apple during the campaign, investors are now optimistic Apple will benefit from at least one Trump proposal: cutting taxes on cash that U.S. businesses bring back from their overseas accounts.
Apple currently has $230 billion in cash held in foreign accounts. If Trump and Congress make it cheaper for Apple to bring that money back, it could be used for acquisitions and buybacks.
CNNMoney (New York) First published February 13, 2017: 12:24 PM ET
If you’ve been considering investing in a smart ring to track your wellness, you may also consider using the FSA and HSA dollars you have stashed away to purchase one. Popular rings including the Galaxy Ring, Oura Ring, Ultrahuman Ring Air and Circular Ring are now FSA and HSA eligible.
While there are differences between the two accounts, flexible spending accounts and health savings accounts are tax deductible and allow people a small break while paying for health care services, products and medications, which are notorious for being expensive in the US. Smart rings like the Oura Ring and Galaxy Ring are health trackers first and foremost, which is why they’re considered eligible for FSA or HSA reimbursement.
How to buy a smart ring with your FSA or HSA dollars
To buy a Galaxy Ring using FSA or HSA funds, Samsung says to go through its website, purchase as you would normally with a debit or credit card and then send in your proof of purchase to your FSA or HSA plan so you can be reimbursed. Samsung said you can also purchase from a third-party retailer like Best Buy and still be reimbursed.
Before you buy either smart ring with plans to have the cost reimbursed, though, it’s a good idea to check ahead of time with your FSA or HSA plan to make sure you’ll be covered. As Oura outlines, plans can set their own eligibility rules and may require extra documents for reimbursement.
A Galaxy Ring costs $400, while the Oura Ring starts at $300 and goes up based on your color and design preference. Notably, Oura has a $6 monthly subscription fee to access its health features, while the Galaxy Ring doesn’t. (Oura says the membership fee is also HSA and FSA eligible.) Read more about how the two smart rings compare and what to know about the brand-new Oura Ring 4.
Watch this: Samsung Galaxy Ring Review: Health and Fitness Tracking on Your Finger
What other health ‘extras’ can you use your FSA and HSA dollars on?
You’d be surprised at the long list of items that are open for purchase or reimbursement with FSA or HSA cards. Everything from vision care and glasses, common medications, tampons, doctor appointment costs and even more “natural” therapies, such as massages. In other words, if it’s used to keep you healthy and costs you money, it’s worth checking to see if you can use your FSA or HSA dollars on it.
If you’ve got some health care money burning a hole in your pocket (especially those FSA dollars, which don’t roll over to the new year), take inventory of your current health needs, what you tend to spend money on and what you could put toward FSA and ultimately save you some money. You can also search popular department stores specifically for FSA or HSA items and peruse CNET’s list of FSA-eligible items.
Read more: Samsung Galaxy Ring Review: My Favorite Smart Ring, Hands Down
Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Parents aim to teach their children good manners by saying “please” and “thank you” from an early age – but these polite words, plus other actions, may mean much more than people realize.
Particularly when parents hear “thank you” from their children, they may experience improved mental well-being and less stress, according to a recent study published in The Journal of Positive Psychology.
The study involved 593 parents of children ranging in age from 4 to 17 years old.
10 TIPS TO LIVE TO BE 100: ‘FAR MORE THAN WISHFUL THINKING,’ SAY LONGEVITY EXPERTS
The parents — who were either married or in romantic relationships — completed a survey regarding the impact of gratitude within their family unit.
Data was assessed regarding two groups of children — 4 to 12 years and 13 to 17 years — to determine if a child’s age impacted the parents’ feelings of gratitude.
Gratitude from both older and younger children is linked to lower parental stress, a new study found. In addition, gratitude appears to have a greater impact on mothers than fathers.(iStock)
Gratitude from both older and younger children is linked to lower parental stress, the study results revealed.
In addition, gratitude appears to have a greater impact on mothers than fathers.
Gratitude can reduce stress for parents by providing a sense of affirmation, said Rajasekhar Kannali, M.D., a child and adolescent psychiatrist with Novant Health in Charlotte, North Carolina, who was not involved in the study.
“Appreciation can also strengthen the parent-child bond, creating a more harmonious family dynamic.”
“Knowing that their efforts are appreciated can alleviate feelings of overwhelm and exhaustion, fostering a more positive outlook on parenting,” Kannali told Fox News Digital.
“This appreciation can also strengthen the parent-child bond, creating a more harmonious family dynamic.”
THE TOP 5 WORRIES — AND 5 WORST SLEEP HABITS — THAT ARE KEEPING AMERICANS UP AT NIGHT
Parents often appreciate hearing “thank you” from their children because it reinforces their efforts and sacrifices, the doctor said.
“When children express gratitude, it helps parents feel seen and valued, reminding them that their love and dedication have a positive impact,” Kannali said.
“Gratitude creates a positive feedback loop, benefiting both children and parents by fostering a culture of appreciation and emotional connection.”(iStock)
Additionally, when parents feel acknowledged, they’re often more motivated and engaged in their role, which can lead to happier interactions and a more fulfilling family environment.
“Ultimately, gratitude creates a positive feedback loop, benefiting both children and parents by fostering a culture of appreciation and emotional connection,” Kannali said.
Here’s more insight.
How does gratitude springboard better parental mindsets?
Gratitude from children helps parents feel less stressed, more appreciated and happier overall, simply because it shows that the child cares, according to Mia Rosenberg, LCSW, a psychotherapist with Upsider Therapy in New York.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“With a small act of acknowledgment of what the parent just provided to [the kids], parents often can feel a sense of reward — which can then act as a catalyst for them to do it again,” she said.
“The goal is to show satisfaction with what we have and lean into feeling gratitude for those ideas or items,” said one expert. (iStock, courtesy of user Jacob Wackerhausen)
How can parents instill gratitude in kids?
Children look to their parents for cues on how to react and respond to situations, Rosenberg said.
“Doing things like modeling appreciation to children can help show them the value of appreciating any gift or act of kindness,” she noted.
For more Health articles, visit foxnews.com/health
When parents model language like “I feel so lucky that it’s a beautiful day” or “I am so grateful that we have what we need every day,” these are useful ways to show appreciation to a child.
“The goal is to show satisfaction with what we have and lean into feeling gratitude for those ideas or items,” Rosenberg said.
Instilling gratitude as a core life trait in children can be very impactful, experts told Fox News Digital. (iStock)
Child psychiatrist Kannali with Novant Health agreed that instilling gratitude as a core life trait in children can be very impactful.
“Parents who use strategies such as discussing feelings, encouraging empathy, celebrating efforts without just measuring outcomes, creating gratitude rituals, modeling gratitude while teaching reflection, and avoiding overindulgence can help children cultivate a genuine sense of gratitude that extends beyond polite expressions,” he said.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
In effect, the expert added, these actions are “nurturing a lifelong appreciation for people and experiences.”
Content creator Daniel LaBelle often takes us on a laughter-filled ride with his physical comedy skits. His food-related videos are a visual treat that we can watch on repeat. His ability to blend culinary and humorous elements is simply on-point. Recently, he posted a video in which he is seen sprinting through the streets wearing an apron while holding a glass of Coke. To add an element of difficulty, he continues adding more glasses of Coke to his running feat, resulting in a challenging yet comical series of events. The video begins with him running at great speed with one Coke in hand, followed by him darting at the same speed, but with two beverages. When the number of Cokes increases to five, the content creator uses a tray to hold the glasses. Slowly, the number of glasses rises to 10, then 20, and finally 30. Unbelievable, right? What’s even more impressive is that he barely spills a drop. Things take a turn when Daniel attempts to run with two trays holding 60 glasses of Coke. After taking a few steps, he falters, and the trays fall from his hands, spilling onto the road. “Sprinting with more and more drinks,” read his caption. Also Read: Guinness World Records: Canadian YouTuber Eats More Than 1 Kg Sriracha Hot Sauce In Just 3 Minutes
Watch the full video below:
In the comments section, Daniel LaBelle revealed, “So I spilled 60 cups RIGHT in front of my neighbour’s driveway, and he was outside watching me. I didn’t know it until after I spilled.” Social media users loved the video. One person expressed a desire to become Daniel’s “neighbour,” presumably to see him execute the extraordinary feat with their own eyes. Almost everyone was impressed by his accomplishment, and one person wrote, “60 was wildly impressive.” Also Read: Pizza At A Langar?! Viral Video Shows Volunteers Serving It But Internet Is Not Happy Guess who else commented on the post? Coca-Cola itself. “And not a single drop on the apron,” read the comment. “That arm strength is impressive to do that while running,” noted one user. “Can someone please get footage of the neighbour’s reactions?” asked a curious individual. “Raising the bar, one profession at a time,” read another remark. “Don’t waste food,” wrote a critic.
What are your thoughts on this video? Share them with us in the comments section below!
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-10-11/Xi-Jinping-meets-senior-Vietnamese-official-1xCckv0625i/img/6b07a1cf2efa41f68667313d1ecc75dd/6b07a1cf2efa41f68667313d1ecc75dd.png' alt='The Great Hall of the People in Beijing, China. /CFP'
Xi Jinping, general secretary of the Communist Party of China Central Committee and Chinese president, met with Luong Cuong, member of the Political Bureau of the Communist Party of Vietnam (CPV) Central Committee and permanent member of the CPV Central Committee Secretariat, in Beijing on Friday.
Xi pointed out that adhering to the leadership of the communist party and the socialist system constitutes the most essential feature of China and Vietnam and serves as the most solid political foundation for developing bilateral relations.
Noting that China takes Vietnam as a priority in its neighborhood diplomacy, Xi said China is ready to work with Vietnam to take the lead in deepening high-level mutually beneficial cooperation, safeguarding international fairness and justice, promoting the cause of human progress and jointly fostering a China-Vietnam community with a shared future that carries strategic significance.
Approval was based on results from the Phase III INAVO120 trial, which found that Itovebi in combination with palbociclib and fulvestrant significantly improved progression-free survival in patients with endocrine-resistant, PIK3CA-mutated, hormone receptor-positive, HER2-negative locally advanced or metastatic breast cancer.
The information is current and up-to-date in accordance with the latest veterinarian research.
Learn more »
Some cats are strictly indoor pets and prefer lounging on a bed, tower, or sofa. However, others split their time between being inside and outside. So, when it comes to finding a safe place to sleep outdoors, where do our furry felines like to curl up?
Outdoor cats sleep anywhere that is safe and relatively quiet. Preferably, food and water are close by. There are a few places that are relatively common for outdoor cats to sleep in though. Let’s go over them just below.
The 7 Likely Places Outdoor Cats Sleep
1. Open Garage
An open garage is, well, an open invitation for a place to sleep, particularly if the caregiver uses the space. The owner’s scent can calm the cat and give them a sense of security they couldn’t find elsewhere. Felines are olfactorily aware of their environment. They use several forms of nonverbal communication, including scent. Somewhere that smells like home is a haven for an outdoor animal. Plus, you can’t beat a sturdy shelter that protects you from the harsh outdoor elements. Garages also have plenty of nooks and crannies to hide and hunker down.=
Image Credit: DavidTB, Shutterstock
2. Abandoned Buildings
Feral or community cats will quickly learn the activity patterns in an area. That leaves them open to choosing abandoned buildings as places to sleep. They can explore these structures at their own pace to determine if they are safe. Once familiar with a building, it’ll likely become part of the feline’s rotation of suitable shelters.
3. Underneath Buildings or Porches
Small spaces underneath buildings or porches provide an ideal hidden spot to sleep and let down their guard. These areas often aren’t used much by people. Wildlife may avoid ones in inhabited places, leaving it free for an outdoor cat to use. The advantage of these types of hideouts is the shelter they provide, with walls all around and limited access in and out of the space.
Image Credit: Cheryl Ann Studio, Shutterstock
4. Sheltered Place in the Woods
Our feline companions are in touch with the wild side when it comes to instinctive behavior. That includes finding a place to hide wherever they are. Plenty of places exist in the woods where an outdoor cat can curl up for a nap. They can use an abandoned den, go underneath a fallen tree, or crawl inside a hollowed-out log.
5. Barns
Barns are a natural choice to sleep for outdoor cats. Agriculture helped bring humans and felines together, so it’s only fitting to return to these domestication roots for shelter. The same thing that attracted cats to them in the first place is likely still present in barns, namely, rodents. That means a readily available food source in addition to a comfy place to sleep.
Image Credit: mognev, Shutterstock
6. Box-Like Enclosure
The ideal place is anywhere a cat can feel secure. That’s one reason these animals like boxes so much. Surprisingly, it’s just the feeling of being enclosed that does the trick. Felines will even sit in an outline of a box, presumably with the same feelings of security. Anything an outdoor cat finds that seems reasonably safe and box-like in its shape will fit the bill.
7. Under Cars
Vets and animal welfare groups will tell you to watch out for cats sleeping under the hood or wheels of your car, especially in colder weather. The warmth of the car engine is attractive, but cats can be hurt when a car is started. That’s why you should scan the car and make some noise to alert any snoozing cats to move on before starting the engine.
Image Credit: Alan Marcel Braga Feitosa, Shutterstock
The Risks for Outdoor Cats
We’d be remiss if we didn’t mention the risks for outdoor cats, both to the pets and wildlife. While some may think outdoor access is vital for their pets, it also increases their risk of disease, predation, and road traffic accidents. Disease is particularly worrisome because some conditions, like rabies and internal parasites, are transmissible to people.
While many associate rabies with dogs, cat cases outnumbered canine ones sixfold at 216 in 2021. An infected feline may not show signs for up to a year, making it even more dangerous. It is 100% fatal once the infection is evident. Any mammal, including people, can get the disease, with an equally grim prognosis if left untreated.
The issue with cats involves predation on species that haven’t had time to adapt. It’s literally a case of shooting fish in a barrel. And these animals aren’t even the most successful predators, with a kill rate of only 32%. Imagine what the estimated 2.4 billion birds killed by felines would be if that percentage was higher.
Image Credit: Gunnar Rathbun, Shutterstock
Conclusion
Outdoor cats are opportunistic regarding finding a place to sleep. They aren’t picky. However, it must be safe and give the animal a sense of security. Covered spaces with an opening to keep track of the goings-on outside are ideal for them.
Above, we identified several common spots where you might find a snoozing feline taking a much-needed cat nap, although we’re sure there are plenty of others that our outdoor felines are keeping private!
Realty firm Godrej Properties acquired six new land parcels in the July-September quarter to develop housing projects worth ₹9,650 crore as part of its expansion plan amid strong demand.
Godrej Properties is one of the leading real estate developers in the country. It has a significant presence in Delhi-NCR, Mumbai Metropolitan Region (MMR), Pune and Bengaluru.
To expand the housing business, Godrej Properties acquires land through outright purchases as well as forming partnerships with landowners for joint development.
In its latest operational updates for the July-September quarter, Godrej Properties said it has added 8 new land parcels in the first six months of this fiscal with a total estimated saleable area of about 11 million square feet and total estimated booking value potential of around ₹12,650 crore.
This included the addition of 6 new land parcels in the second quarter of this fiscal with an expected booking value of ₹9,650 crore.
Also read: Godrej Properties achieves record bookings of ₹5,200 crore in Q2 FY25
Godrej Properties said it has already achieved 63 per cent of its annual guidance for new business development (land acquisition).
Gaurav Pandey, MD & CEO, Godrej Properties, said, “Our business development additions of ₹12,650 crore in April-September will ensure that we continue to have a strong launch pipeline not just for the current year but for years to come”.
This includes several projects at the prestigious Golf Course Road in Gurugram, he said, adding that the company has entered the market of Indore recently.
“We have built a deep understanding across the key real estate markets in India and are greatly excited by the potential the next several years offer for us to deliver sustained high-quality performance across all key operating metrics,” Pandey said.
Godrej Properties’ sales bookings rose 3 per cent to nearly ₹5,200 crore in the second quarter of this fiscal on better housing demand.
This is the highest ever Q2 (July-September) booking value achieved by Godrej Properties.
During the April-September period of this fiscal, Godrej Properties’ sales booking value grew 89 per cent annually to over ₹13,800 crore.
This is the highest-ever booking value achieved by Godrej Properties during the first half of a fiscal year.
Also read: KBC Global launches new real estate project in Nashik
Godrej Properties became the largest listed real estate firm last fiscal in terms of sales bookings.
During the last fiscal, Godrej Properties sales bookings jumped 84 per cent to a record ₹22,527 crore from ₹12,232 crore in the preceding year.
The company has given a target of achieving ₹27,500 crore worth of sales bookings in the current 2024-25 financial year.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PRESTRAVLJENA studentica dobila je puno više nego što je očekivala kada je u svojoj pošiljci iz Sheina pronašla škorpiona. Sofia Alonso-Mossinger otvarala je paket s parom čizama kada se pojavio taj otrovni uljez.
Mislila je da se radi o igrački
Sofia je prvo pomislila da se radi o igrački, ali kada se škorpion pomaknuo, shvatila je da je situacija ozbiljna. Uz pomoć svojih cimera sa Sveučilišta u Bristolu premjestila je škorpiona u kadu, dok su čekali da ga preuzme stručnjak.
Shein, tvrtka koja je poslala paket, brzo je reagirao i objavio da su proveli internu istragu, potvrdivši da su svi standardni operativni procesi bili poštivani.
Sofia je bila u šoku, a njezine cimerice su odmah dojurile nakon što su čule vrištanje. Prvo su pomislili da trebaju ubiti škorpiona, ali su se na kraju odlučili za humaniji pristup i stavili ga u Tupperware posudu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Oliver, jedan od cimera koji studira zoologiju, preuzeo je škorpiona s kuhinjskim hvataljkama i stavio ga u plastičnu posudu. Svi su bili malo nervozni jer nisu znali koliko je škorpion otrovan.
Shein je potvrdio da istražuje ovaj incident
Kontaktirali su Nacionalni centar za dobrobit gmazova (NCRW), koji je brzo poslao stručnjaka da preuzme škorpiona.
Chris Newman iz NCRW-a rekao je za BBC da su ovakvi slučajevi iznenađujuće česti. Identificirali su škorpiona kao kineskog škorpiona, čiji ubod može biti opasan, ali prosječna osoba ne bi trebala imati ozbiljnih problema.
Shein je potvrdio da istražuje ovaj incident, a Newman je dodao da je ovo već drugi takav slučaj u manje od mjesec dana.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
The shortest player on the field at Dodger Stadium looked as if he was the tallest.
Yoshinobu Yamamoto was a giant on Friday night.
And to think the 5-foot-10 right-hander from Japan started for the Dodgers in Game 5 of their National League Division Series only because they figured their relievers couldn’t pitch the entire game.
Yamamoto turned the anticipated bullpen game for the Dodgers into something more conventional. The three innings they were counting on him to pitch became four, and eventually five. He never conceded a run.
When the game was over, the Dodgers were spraying sparkling wine and pouring beer on each other in their locker room, celebrating their passage to the NL Championship Series. In the middle of the celebration was Yamamoto, the unlikely pitcher of record in the 2-0 victory over the San Diego Padres.
Yamamoto was inconsistent for the majority his first season with the Dodgers, his adjustment to the major leagues delayed by a shoulder injury that sidelined him for three months. Not what the Dodgers were expecting from a player they signed in the winter to a 12-year, $325-million contract.
However, as Dodgers controlling owner Mark Walter pointed out, “He showed up tonight.”
Bottle in hand and smile on his face, Walter continued, “Shut them out for five innings. Takes guts to do that when you struggle a little.”
A little?
Six days earlier, Yamamoto was absolutely destroyed, by the same opponent, in the same stadium. He lasted only three innings in a Game 1 defeat and was charged with five runs.
“Of course, I wasn’t able to get away with it right away,” Yamamoto said in Japanese.
Yamamoto explained that he received words of encouragement from teammates. When the Dodgers were in San Diego for Games 3 and 4, Yamamoto was invited out by Kiké Hernández.
“We talked for about two hours,” Yamamoto said.
Yamamoto added, “I think I owe my performance today to my teammates.”
Hernández said there was a reason the Dodgers invested as much in Yamamoto as they did. He said it wasn’t because he projected to be great one day in the future.
“He is great,” Hernández said.
The Dodgers could have started Jack Flaherty. However, Yamamoto was on the same six-day cycle on which he was kept in the regular season. Plus, the Dodgers thought they could rely on a pitcher who was known in his home country for his resiliency.
Around this time last year, president of baseball operations Andrew Friedman watched the Japan Series between the Orix Buffaloes and Hanshin Tigers. He saw Yamamoto give up a career-worst seven runs in a Game 1 defeat, but he also saw how Yamamoto responded to the setback. In Game 6, Yamamoto threw a 138-pitch complete game and struck out 14 batters to set a Japan Series record.
Talking to Yamamoto after his Game 1 debacle in this division series, Friedman said, “You could get the sense that he wanted the ball.”
Manager Dave Roberts called attention to Yamamoto’s international experience.
“When you pitch for the WBC, for the country of Japan, those are the highest stakes you can have,” Roberts said.
Dodgers pitcher Yoshinobu Yamamoto delivers during the first inning against the Padres on Friday.
(Robert Gauthier / Los Angeles Times)
Roberts figured national pride would again be a motivating factor for Yamamoto. Pitching opposite him in Game 5 was Yu Darvish, making this postseason game the first to feature two Japanese starters. The contest was broadcast live in Japan on network television.
Yamamoto returned to the Dodger Stadium mound as a new pitcher.
Between starts, the Dodgers had worked with Yamamoto on the positioning of his glove, which they believed revealed to the Padres in Game 1 which pitches he was about to throw. He started Game 5 by retiring the side in order. Yamamoto gave up successive singles to Kyle Higashioka and Luis Arráez in the third inning, but forced Fernando Tatis Jr. to ground into a double play.
Yamamoto retired the next six batters to protect the 1-0 advantage gifted to him on a home run by his muse, Hernández. Before reaching the steps descending into the dugout in the middle of the fifth inning, Yamamoto was tightly embraced by Roberts. Yamamoto had thrown only 63 pitches, but Roberts was mindful that he hadn’t pitched into the sixth inning since he blanked the New York Yankees over seven innings on June 7. His night was over, at least on the mound.
Later in the clubhouse, Yamamoto was reliving his night when Shohei Ohtani approached him with a bottle of sparkling wine pointed in his direction. Ohtani emptied the bottle’s contents on Yamamoto.
“He was overwhelming,” Ohtani said in Japanese. “It was the kind of pitching that overwhelmed and didn’t let the opponent get close.”
An extremely light drinker, Yamamoto said that even the magnitude of this victory couldn’t drive him to imbibe any of the adult beverages provided to the players.
However, he joked, “The alcohol got in me through my skin.”
At that moment, the ups and downs of the previous six months were forgotten. If a disastrous performance in October can diminish a player’s regular-season achievements, the opposite also has to be true: A memorable game in the playoffs can minimize a player’s regular-season failures.
U&i has launched four new products ahead of the festive season. The new lineup includes the Dominator Series Neckband UINB-2304, Beats Series TWS 7650, Modern Series Powerbank UIPB-2151 and Innovative Series Portable Speaker UiBS-801.
“At U&i, our focus has always been on merging innovation with user-centric design. With the launch of our new Dominator, Beats, Modern, and Innovative series during festive time, we are offering high-performance products that cater to the lifestyle demands of today’s tech enthusiasts at an affordable price range,” said Paresh Vij, Founder and Director, U&i.
Specifications and Features
Dominator Series Neckband UINB-2304 – The Dominator Series Neckband UINB-2304 features Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) of up to 35dB and the company claims that it has 100 hours of music time and 600 hours of standby time. The IPX4 water resistance makes it perfect for workouts or outdoor activities.
Beats Series TWS 7650 – The Beats Series TWS 7650 earbuds offer 120 hours of backup. With 60ms ultra-low latency, these earbuds can be perfect for gaming or streaming. The Quad Mic Environmental Noise Cancellation (ENC) can offer clear, distortion-free calls, while Bluetooth 5.3 guarantees stable connectivity.
Modern Series Powerbank UIPB-2151 – The Modern Series Powerbank UIPB-2151 is built for users who need fast, reliable charging on the go. It features PD + QC 22.5W output, allowing for the charging of multiple devices. The 15W Magsafe wireless charging feature is ideal for wireless-compatible devices, adding another layer of convenience.
Innovative Series Portable Speaker UiBS-801 – The Innovative Series Portable Speaker UiBS-801 offers 30W output. It provides 20 hours of backup and comes with Bluetooth 5.3 connectivity.
Price and Availability:
– Dominator Series Neckband UINB-2304: 1,099
– Beats Series TWS 7650: 799
– Modern Series Powerbank UIPB-2151: 1,699
– Innovative Series Portable Speaker UiBS-801: Rs 3,100
John Wayne was famous for his tough guy image on and off screen, mostly being known for playing cowboys and military men.
By the early 1960s, Duke was in his fifties, struggling with health problems yet continuing to insist on not only doing his own stunts but also playing characters – including historical figures – he was now much older than.
This was especially the case when he was cast in the 1962 D-Day epic The Longest Day, which featured an incredible all-star cast including Henry Fonda, Robert Mitchum, Sean Connery and Richard Burton. Yet Wayne’s inclusion proved divisive.
Incredibly, former President Dwight D Eisenhower almost played himself, but makeup artists couldn’t make him look as young as he did in 1944. Nevertheless, a set decorator with no acting experience with the spitting image of the Supreme Allied Commander was cast. Awkwardly, the real Ike ended up walking out of The Longest Day after just a few minutes, frustrated with all the inaccuracies. Although Eisenhower was considered too old to play his younger self, that didn’t stop Wayne from being cast as 27-year-old Lt Col Benjamin Vandervoort, who was very disappointed to find out the overweight 54-year-old Duke was portraying him.
Originally Charlton Heston, who was only a decade older than the real-life paratrooper, had actively sought the part. However, Wayne’s last-minute decision to take on the role blocked him and it came at a huge price to the film’s producer. The Longest Day producer Darryl F Zanuck had managed to negotiate $25,000 fees from his ensemble cast for what was mostly cameos. However, Wayne demanded $250,000 or he’d refused to appear in the movie – a request that was granted.
The reason Duke “punished” the producer with this action was because he’d been quoting in an interview calling the Western legend “poor John Wayne” over 1960’s The Alamo.
That blockbuster was produced, directed and largely funded by the star himself. And Zanuck had said he didn’t think much of actors forming their own production companies, citing Wayne’s as an example. Not only was Wayne’s non-negotiable fee request on The Longest Day an act of revenge, but also was a way of him getting a quick payday after all the money he spent on The Alamo.
Aside from being three decades too old for his role in the World War 2 blockbuster, Duke’s contract also included a clause that made his casting even more controversial.
Alongside his whopping $250,000 fee, Wayne insisted on getting separate billing on The Longest Day from the other actors. However, to his dismay, this was got around by having the other stars billed first followed by “and John Wayne”, meaning that Duke’s name appeared last on the credits.
Even so, it was highly controversial even then as the Hollywood star did not serve in World War II, something he tried to redeem across his career by acting in very patriotic movies.
More people are buying electric vehicles (EVs) in Australia, but if you’re making the jump from a petrol or diesel car you may be hung up on servicing requirements.
You’d be familiar with the typical service intervals on internal combustion cars to change their engine oil or service transmissions, but EVs don’t have any of that. There are fewer moving parts, which means maintenance information is different.
You’ll still need to have wear and tear items checked like your brakes, tyres, and joints, but each brand goes about servicing their EVs differently.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Tesla Model Y
Tesla, Australia’s current best-selling EV manufacturer, doesn’t outline complete service intervals or pricing at all, while BMW only details pre-paid service packages for its EVs.
To help clear it up, we’ve compiled the top six best-selling EVs in Australia so far this year and broken down their respective servicing and warranty information.
We’ve chosen to look at six because the top two are both Teslas, which don’t have representative service information.
Range figures quoted have been taken from the European WLTP testing cycle.
BYD Atto 3
Click on a car’s name above to jump to its specific section, or continue scrolling for the full article
Tesla Model Y and Model 3
As mentioned, Tesla does things differently in the servicing department.
The electric vehicle manufacturer does not publish service intervals for the Model Y or Model 3.
It recommends a brake fluid check and cabin air filter replacement every two years, HEPA filter replacement at three years, and an air-conditioning service every four years – in addition to standard wheel balancing and tyre rotation.
For the Model 3, Tesla recommends having the air-conditioning filters changed every two years, and checking the tyre tread, balance, and rotation every 20,000km.
It also recommends brake fluid is checked every two years, and the pads and discs lubricated every 12 months in colder climates.
Ownership program
Tesla Model Y/Model 3
Warranty
4 years or 80,000 kilometres
Battery warranty
8 years or 160,000km (RWD models) 8 years or 192,000km (AWD models)
Unlike its Tesla rival, BYD outlines an average annual service price of $380.81 for 11 years of servicing, adding up to a total of $4189.
That figure is only for the Dynamic and Premium variants of the Seal, though the entire range is covered by a six-year, 150,000km warranty and an eight-year, 160,000km battery pack warranty.
12 months of roadside assistance is included with each new BYD vehicle, which can be extended at the time of purchase or at each scheduled service – both for an added cost.
BYD outlines service intervals of 12 months or 20,000km for the Seal range.
The range-opening Dynamic and middling Premium are both rear-wheel drive, with 64.1kWh and 82.5kWh batteries respectively. BYD claims a range of 460km for the Dynamic, while the Premium is capable of 570km.
Ownership program
BYD Seal (excl. Performance)
Warranty
6 years or 150,000km
Battery warranty
8 years or 160,000km
Roadside assistance
12 months (extension purchasable)
Service intervals
12 months or 20,000km
Capped-price servicing
11 years
Average annual service cost
$380.81
Total capped-price servicing cost
$4189
The hotted-up Seal Performance requires servicing as often as its less powerful counterparts, but it costs an average of $422.64 annually over 11 years. That totals $4649 over the same period.
BYD packs an 82.5kWh Blade battery in the Performance, and it features a dual-motor all-wheel drive setup with a claimed range of 520km.
Ownership program
BYD Seal Performance
Service intervals
12 months or 20,000km
Capped-price servicing
11 years
Average annual service cost
$422.64
Total capped-price servicing cost
$4649
Interested in buying a BYD Seal? CarExpert’s specialists can help you find a deal.
Unlike the Seal, all variants of BYD’s Atto 3 share the same service requirements. The annual service cost over 11 years is $341.27.
The Atto 3 is covered by a six-year, 150,000km warranty and an eight-year, 160,000km battery warranty.
12 months of roadside assistance is included with the purchase of new Atto 3 models, which can be extended at the time of purchase or at each service for an added cost.
Servicing is required every 12 months or 20,000km, whichever comes first. The total service cost over 11 years is currently $3754.
The base Standard Range variant is fed by a 49.92kWh battery for a range of 345km, while the Extended Range has a 60.48kWh battery and a claimed range of 420km.
BYD outlines additional warranties for the Atto 3, which are as follows:
Electric motor, high-voltage assembly, motor controller: 8 years or 150,000km
Lights, tyre pressure monitoring module, suspension, ball joints: 8 years or 100,000km
12V battery: 12 months or 12,000km
Air conditioner filters, button battery, brake pads, clutch discs, tyres, wiper blade assemble, bulbs and fuses: 6 months or 10,000km
Ownership program
BYD Atto 3
Warranty
6 years or 150,000km
Battery warranty
8 years or 160,000km
Roadside assistance
12 months (extension purchasable)
Service intervals
12 months or 20,000km
Capped-price servicing
11 years
Average annual service cost
$341.27
Total capped-price servicing cost
$3754
Interested in buying a BYD Atto 3? CarExpert’s specialists can help you find a deal.
All MG 4 variants except the XPower are covered by seven years of capped-price servicing, adding up to an average annual price of $557.86.
All MG 4 variants are covered by a 10-year, 250,000km warranty and a seven-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty. 10 years of roadside assistance are also offered, maintained so long as you service your MG 4 within the MG dealer network.
Services are required every 24 months or 40,000km, whichever comes first. For the MG 4 Excite 51, Excite 64, Essence 64, and Long Range 77, seven years of capped-price servicing adds up to $3905.
Those four models all differ in range and battery capacity, so efficiency information has been broken down below:
Model
Battery capacity
WLTP range
Excite 51
51kWh
350km
Excite 64
64kWh
450km
Essence 64
64kWh
435km
Long Range 77
77kWh
530km
All the above variants offer a rear-wheel drive, single-motor setup.
Ownership program
MG 4 (excl. XPower)
Warranty
10 years or 250,000 kilometres
Battery warranty
7 years, unlimited kilometres
Roadside assistance
10 years (service-activated)
Service intervals
24 months or 40,000km
Capped-price servicing
7 years
Average annual service cost
$557.86
Total capped-price servicing cost
$3905
Like the Seal Performance, the XPower is slightly more expensive to service. Warranties and service intervals remain the same, but seven years of capped-price servicing increases to an average of $581.43 per year.
That equates to a total of $4070, which means there’s a smaller gap between the XPower and non-performance MG 4s than there is between the equivalent BYD Seals.
The XPower offers a dual-motor all-wheel drive setup and is fed by a 64kWh battery, with a claimed range of 400km.
Ownership program
MG 4 XPower
Service intervals
24 months or 40,000km
Capped-price servicing
7 years
Average annual service cost
$581.43
Total capped-price servicing cost
$4070
Interested in buying an MG 4? CarExpert’s specialists can help you find a deal.
BMW does things differently again, as it only offers pre-paid service packages for its EVs, including the iX1. The iX1’s cheapest pack is the four-year plan, which costs $1537.
All new BMW purchases are backed by a five-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty, while the brand’s EV battery packs are covered by an eight-year, 160,000km warranty.
Three years of complimentary roadside assistance is included as standard, and the longer six-year BMW Service Inclusive pack costs $2200 for the iX1. Both packs are covered for unlimited kilometres.
All three iX1 variants are fed by a 67kWh battery pack. The base eDrive20 xLine offers a single-motor, front-wheel drive setup and a claimed range of 475km, while the xDrive30 M Sport and xDrive30 xLine are dual-motor all-wheel drive with claimed range figures of 440km.
Ownership program
BMW iX1
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres
Battery warranty
8 years or 160,000km
Roadside assistance
3 years
Service intervals
Pre-paid packages
4-year BMW Service Inclusive (unlimited kilometres)
$1537
6-year BMW Service Inclusive (unlimited kilometres)
$2200
Interested in buying a BMW iX1? CarExpert’s specialists can help you find a deal.
In today’s fast-evolving financial landscape, the accuracy and reliability of credit models have become more crucial than ever. The Reserve Bank of India (RBI), in its circular issued on August 5, 2024, titled ‘Regulatory Principles for Management of Model Risks in Credit’, introduced a comprehensive regulatory framework that sets clear guidelines for model risk management in the financial sector. This new framework provides financial institutions with a structured roadmap to strengthen their model governance and oversight, which is expected to enhance the stability of lenders.
While this development will indirectly benefit borrowers by improving lending processes, its primary focus remains on improving asset quality. Ultimately, the framework aims to create a more resilient financial ecosystem for both lenders and borrowers.
The Importance of Model Risk Management
The RBI’s circular introduces a much-needed standardisation in the management of credit models, which had previously been inconsistent across the industry. In today’s lending environment, effective model risk management is vital for financial institutions. By providing regulatory guidelines, the circular ensures that models are well-governed, maintained, and regularly validated — both at the time of deployment and on an ongoing basis.
This continuous validation is essential in keeping models updated and reflective of the dynamic financial environment. The introduction of consistent measures ensures that lenders can rely on robust and compliant models, significantly reducing the risk of model failures. With better-managed models, financial institutions can minimise the risk of defaults, thereby maintaining a higher quality of assets and promoting greater financial stability.
Focus on Asset Quality
While improvements in model governance can lead to more efficient lending terms for borrowers, the primary objective of the RBI’s framework is to safeguard asset quality. The focus is on strengthening credit risk assessment processes through stringent model validation and oversight. By doing so, lenders can ensure that their credit portfolios are of higher quality, thereby improving their overall risk profile and stability. This emphasis on asset quality marks a significant shift in the industry, underscoring the importance of reliable credit models in maintaining the long-term health of financial institutions. The framework requires ongoing model validation to ensure that credit models continue to function effectively in a fast-changing financial landscape.
Strengthening the Economy
One of the major advantages of RBI’s circular is its potential to minimise model failures, a key risk for financial institutions. By using validated models, lenders can make more accurate decisions, leading to improved asset quality and portfolio health. This not only protects individual institutions but also contributes to the overall stability of the Indian financial system, positively impacting the economy. Credit risk models, while data-driven, depend significantly on expert judgment and assumptions. These assumptions must be reviewed regularly to account for the dynamic macroeconomic environment.
By preventing outdated assumptions from distorting results, institutions can mitigate model risk more effectively. The circular outlines regulatory principles across three main areas: governance and oversight, model development and deployment, and model validation. Each of these plays a crucial role in ensuring that models are both reliable and effective.
Governance and Oversight
Governance is central to model risk management. RBI mandates that all models be governed by a board-approved policy that includes the selection, documentation, validation, and monitoring processes. Regular updates and approvals from the institution’s Risk Management Committee reinforce accountability and ensure that models are rigorously assessed. Models must deliver consistent, unbiased, and explainable outcomes. Documentation of assumptions, objectives, and approaches is crucial. Moreover, models should be scalable, flexible, and seamlessly integrated into the institution’s core systems, such as asset-liability management (ALM), to enable holistic risk management.
Model Validation
Independent validation is key to ensuring models function as intended. RBI requires that models undergo validation before deployment and be reviewed annually or whenever significant changes are made. This process involves testing underlying assumptions and back-testing results, ensuring that models meet their objectives. External expert validation is also encouraged, adding an additional layer of scrutiny.
RBI’s new framework marks a significant step forward in enhancing the governance and reliability of credit models. By fostering a culture of rigorous oversight and regular validation, the circular paves way for a more stable financial ecosystem. While the framework may not directly lower credit costs, it will ensure that pricing is fairer and more aligned with actual risk, benefiting both lenders and borrowers. In the long term, the adoption of this framework will help safeguard the Indian economy by reducing model failures, encouraging cautious lending practices, and promoting financial resilience.
(Durgesh Jaiswal is vice-president of risk management services at ICRA Analytics; and Niharika Gupta is manager of risk management services at ICRA Analytics)
Bitcoin has recently recovered to $63,000 after dipping to $59,000, but a surprising trend has emerged. Google searches for “Bitcoin” have dropped to a yearly low, even as its price rises. This lack of retail interest contrasts with the frenzy seen in 2017, when Bitcoin’s price surge drove public curiosity. The muted search volume suggests that while institutional interest may remain strong, retail investors are showing less enthusiasm this time around, leaving questions about the sustainability of this rally.
Tell me something, marketers. Are you satisfied with the state of B2B content marketing?
According to 980 of you, the answer is likely “no,” given how much more you say you want in the Content Marketing Institute’s annual B2B Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends: Outlook for 2025, conducted with MarketingProfs and sponsored by The MX Group.
More what? Well, resources, sure. That’s a given.
Also, more people. Clarity of purpose. Goals. Technology. And maybe more inspiration.
Without these, many of you feel just meh about your work:
A whopping chunk (58%) of B2B marketers rate their content strategy as merely “moderately effective.”
Nearly half of those say their strategy struggles because they lack clear goals.
Only one in three say they have a scalable model for content creation.
The biggest challenge? A lack of resources.
So what else is new? In the 15 years CMI and MarketingProfs have conducted this survey, these same limitations surface again and again.
As Robert Rose, CMI chief strategy advisor, said after looking through these findings, “One of the most remarkable things about this year’s research is how unremarkable it is. Frustration and simple maintenance have become the status quo in B2B marketing.”
But, while many find themselves simply treading water, a group of top performers has found a way to surge ahead. They’ve figured out how to understand their audience’s needs, produce high-quality content, and use AI to create more efficient workflows.
Let’s dive into the results — including what separates meh from marvelous. (Use the Table of Contents to navigate to the sections that interest you most. You’ll find Robert’s suggestions on what to do about all of this in Action steps.)
Team structure
Are organizations dedicating enough people to their content initiatives? When we asked B2B marketers how content marketing work gets done within their organizations, most (76%) have a dedicated content marketing team or person on staff. And the larger the organization, the more likely it was to have dedicated resources.
But most (54%) who have a dedicated content marketing team or staff say the team is small, consisting of two to five people.
What if there’s no dedicated team or person?
Believe it or not, 24% of B2B respondents say they don’t have dedicated content marketing teams or staff. When we asked that group how the work gets done, 50% say they rely on multiple content teams (e.g., department, brand, or product), 7% say they use an outside content marketing agency/vendor, and 43% list “other.”
Those who chose “other” offered explanations that ranged from two people with multiple responsibilities, including content, to whoever was available.
And therein lies a problem: While staff may handle content-related tasks, no one is responsible for leading content marketing as a strategic approach. Reactive, scattershot content tactics aren’t likely to generate any meaningful (or consistent) results.
Content strategy effectiveness
Next, we asked the 95% of B2B marketers who have a content strategy to rate its effectiveness. Less than a third (29%) call it extremely or very effective. Well over half (58%) say it is moderately effective, while 12% say it is not very effective, and 1% say it is not at all effective.
Among those who rate their strategy as moderately effective or worse, 42% cite a lack of clear goals as the reason why they didn’t rate it higher.
Other reasons include:
Not tied to customer journey (39%)
Not data-driven (35%)
Ineffective audience research (29%)
Other (26%)
Unrealistic expectations (23%)
Emphasizes content quantity over quality (20%)
Failure to iterate/adapt (18%)
Inconsistent brand voice (17%)
Poor content quality (10%)
Those who selected “other” cite the following problems:
Lack of resources (time, budget, and people)
Lack of leadership (no clear direction)
Internal silos (inefficiencies and conflicting priorities)
Their comments include:
“Constantly shifting messaging in response to shifting leadership priorities”
“Lack of budget to develop content and too many cooks in the kitchen”
“Lack of resources with strategic content planning and development skills”
“Limited time and resources to focus on prioritizing content”
“Too many diverse business units”
“Too many brands and products without clear priority”
“Lack of time to focus on long-term strategy due to short-term demands by the organization. Long-term strategic content marketing projects are not prioritized, even though they would move the needle for the overall brand; not enough people/resources and high volume of work.”
Content marketing challenges
When we asked about challenges not related to content creation, the most often cited was lack of resources (54%). Last year, about the same amount (58%) said the same. It’s a problem that just doesn’t go away.
Measuring the results of content efforts (a new option in this year’s survey) came in second, cited by 47%. Aligning content with the buyers’ journey remains a challenge, as 45% indicate it’s a problem this year vs. 48% the previous year.
Another challenge that’s not going anywhere — aligning content across sales and marketing (43% cite it as a challenge this year compared with 45% the previous year).
Also new to the list this year was communicating across organizational silos, with 40% indicating that it’s challenging.
B2B marketers appear to have gained some ground with:
Managing workflow issues/content approvals process: 33% mention it this year, down from 41% the previous year
Keeping up with new technologies: 27% cite it this year, down from 34% the previous year
Accessing subject matter experts: 33% indicate it’s challenging vs. 39% the previous year
Creating content that prompts a desired action isn’t easy
Content creation challenges look different for B2B marketers than the previous year. Based on our conversations with marketers, we added a new option to the list of challenges: Creating content that prompts a desired action.
Turns out, our observation was right. More B2B marketers (55%) cite it as a challenge than any other option.
We asked Ann Handley, chief content officer at MarketingProfs, why B2B content teams struggle with this. Here’s what she says:
Ann Handley Chief Content Officer MarketingProfs
My question is … how are you measuring this? Or, rather, how do you know it’s not creating the action you want to inspire?
B2B content is part of a complex matrix of various touchpoints, seen and unseen, including word of mouth, dark social, that one guy who mentioned your brand on LinkedIn. We want to believe the purchase journey is a straight, orderly line of attribution: Read blog post. > Hit demo. > Buy.
But B2B — or any marketing — doesn’t work that way. It’s less straight line, more squiggly scribble that overlaps in oddball ways. Less straightforward path; more conspiratorial crime scene investigation board.
What marketers can do about it is to rethink the messy muddle of attribution to think about more meaningful ways to know what’s ‘working.’
Not how many people downloaded a white paper … but how many then signed up for your email newsletter? And then, how many of them wrote back to you when you told a story in the last issue about a specific problem they have? What did existing customers tell you worked the last time you spoke with them? Rethink off-the-shelf metrics (because there is no shelf).
Other content creation challenges
Last year, most B2B marketers (57%) cited creating the right content for the audience as a challenge. This year, only 40% did. That may indicate that B2B marketers have improved or focused more on crafting better-targeted content in the last 12 months.
Fewer marketers mention differentiating content and creating it consistently as top challenges this year compared to last (43% and 42%, respectively, this year, down from 54% for both last year).
Creating enough content is still a challenge for 39% this year. Last year, we distinguished between creating enough content to keep up with internal demand (34%) and external demand (30%). Content repurposing is a challenge for 37%. As it was a new option this year, a comparison is not available.
And here’s a somewhat surprising change given recent SEO developments: Only 35% of marketers cite optimizing for SEO as a top challenge this year, down from 45% last year. Perhaps even more surprising? Only 27% said creating quality content is a challenge, down from 44% last year.
B2B marketers’ tech stacks lack these essentials
When we asked B2B marketers which capabilities, if any, are missing from their marketing tech stack, nearly half (47%) say they lack efficient lead generation and nurturing processes. The same number say they do not have streamlined marketing data management and reporting.
Almost as many (45%) said they lack the tech to support data-driven decision-making. Forty-four percent say the ability to automate repetitive tasks and workflows is missing, and the same number say advanced personalization options aren’t available. Forty-one percent lack easy access to enterprise analytics, and 39% say strong alignment between sales and marketing systems isn’t possible. Only 8% say no capabilities are missing from their tech stack.
Too few have the right technology — or use it to its potential
It’s no wonder B2B marketers struggle with essential tech capabilities: Only 26% of those surveyed think their organization has the right technology to manage content across the organization. That’s worse than last year, when 31% said the same thing.
Also challenging is the percentage of marketers who say they have the technology but aren’t using its potential, which increased to 38% this year from 30% last year.
Nearly half of B2B marketers lack a scalable model for content creation
Here’s another way B2B marketers struggle: Nearly half (45%) lack a scalable model for content creation. Just slightly more than a third (35%) say they do have a scalable content creation model, and 20% said they’re not sure whether they have one or not.
Andi Robinson, content strategist at Hijinx Marketing, explains why this failure to have and integrate tech capabilities holds B2B marketers back:
Andi Robinson Content Strategist Hijinx Marketing
Companies that have not taken the time to develop a robust and scalable content creation framework risk bottlenecks in their process, content that is not aligned to organizational and marketing strategy, and audience-facing brand inconsistencies.
Having a structured, scalable content creation process leads to greater content consistency and quality, more efficient use of resources, and better audience engagement.
On the brighter side, we followed up with those who have scalable models to ask if those models create the desired outcomes. Forty-one percent say they do. Slightly more than half (53%) say no, but we’re getting there, and just 6% say no, we have a long way to go.
B2B marketers struggle to measure content’s impact
Year after year, we hear marketers say how hard it is to prove the impact of their work. Let’s dig in to where they struggle.
We asked the B2B marketers (96%) who say they measure their content performance to indicate their agreement with the following: “Our organization measures content performance effectively.”
About half (51%) say they strongly or somewhat agree. Fifteen percent neither agree nor disagree. Twenty-three percent somewhat disagree, and 11% strongly disagree. So, the struggle is real for at least a third to half of marketers.
We asked B2B marketers what challenges their team faces while measuring content performance. Fifty-six percent say difficulty attributing ROI to content efforts. The same number cite difficulty tracking customer journeys.
Other challenges include:
Inability to tie performance to business goals (44%)
Insufficient resources or budget (41%)
Lack of clear marketing goals/KPIs (39%)
Data silos within the organization (37%)
Limited access to advanced analytics tools (33%)
Complex or inadequate reporting systems (29%)
Inability to extract valuable information from data/analytics (29%)
Lack of data skills/talent (25%)
Amy Higgins, director of content strategy at Cloudflare, offered her take on why it’s so hard:
Amy Higgins Director of Content Strategy Cloudflare
Many marketers have a hard time calculating the ROI of their content initiatives because they don’t count both the creation and the distribution of their content. Most look only at the distribution costs alone.
It takes time to create content — whether the hours you pay an agency or your in-house team, their time costs money. Many people forget that and will only look at an agency invoice or the distribution spend. That means they are only calculating a portion of their content investment.
AI use trends
When it comes to AI use in B2B content marketing, we found many marketers experimenting, but few incorporate it into daily operations. That’s one area where top performers have pulled ahead of their peers. I’ll get into that shortly. For now, let’s look at a few findings.
Eighty-one percent of B2B marketers tell us their teams are using generative AI tools — that’s a jump up from 72% the previous year.
Marketers who don’t use AI cite accuracy concerns
We asked the few marketers who don’t use generative AI tools why. They cite these reasons:
Accuracy concerns (35%)
Corporate mandates not to use (28%)
Copyright concerns (26%)
Lack of training (22%)
Lack of understanding (19%)
No need/no use for gen AI (17%)
Other (14%)
Unsure (13%)
Many teams experiment, few integrate it
Most teams (54%) take an ad hoc approach to AI (i.e., they’re experimenting but not necessarily applying it widely). Another 27% report their teams don’t formally use AI, but individual staff members may choose to use it. Only 19% of B2B marketers say AI is integrated into their daily processes/workflows.
How can B2B marketers move the needle on AI integration? Pam Didner, author of The Modern AI Marketer, suggests these elements:
Pam Didner Author The Modern AI Marketer
Train with show and tell. Show what AI can do in real time. Give examples of how different job functions can use AI.
Incorporate AI into your processes or workflows. Identify specific, repeatable tasks where AI can seamlessly fit, reducing the need for experimentation. If necessary, building custom AI tools or integrating existing platforms can help more consistent use.
Advocate for it: C-suite executives and department heads must actively champion AI adoption. Their support is vital to fostering a culture of innovation, encouraging teams to move beyond occasional experimentation.
More B2B marketers have AI guidelines than last year
The number of B2B marketers whose organizations lack AI usage guidelines dropped to 45%, down from 61% last year.
Well over a third (38%) say their organization has AI guidelines, while nearly a quarter (23%) say their marketing team has guidelines. (Respondents could select both options.) Three percent are unsure if guidelines exist.
What AI guidelines cover
The respondents’ generative AI guidelines address a range of topics. Acceptable uses in content marketing topped the list, cited by 78%. Other areas include:
Security measures specific to using generative AI (66%)
Unacceptable uses of generative AI in content marketing (66%)
Data-handling guidelines for generative AI platforms/output (64%)
Purpose/objectives for using generative AI in marketing (58%)
Transparency (i.e., disclosing when content is generated by AI) (48%)
Legal/copyright recommendations (47%)
Mitigating bias in generative AI output (29%)
Real-world applications for generative AI (27%)
Most still use free AI tools
As in the previous year, most B2B marketers working with generative AI use free tools (88% vs. 91% the previous year). Forty-nine percent (up from 39% the previous year) use AI tools in their content creation/management systems, and 32% (up from 27% the previous year) pay for tools.
Do B2B marketers trust generative AI’s outputs?
We wondered how much trust B2B marketers place in generative AI’s outputs. It turns out that only 4% report a high level of trust. Most (67%) have a medium level of trust, and 28% say they have a low level of trust. Just 1% don’t trust AI output.
AI content quality is doubted
What about the quality of content generated by AI? That gets mixed reviews. Only 17% rate it as excellent or very good. But 44% say the output is good, and 35% say it’s fair. Only 4% rate it as poor.
Erika Heald, fractional head of content and founder at Erika Heald Marketing Consulting, explains why generative AI content underwhelms:
Very few companies have comprehensive content governance programs in place, starting with defining their unique brand voice and how that affects the content they create and how they communicate with the communities they serve.
When combined with a detailed content style guide, content templates that make it clear what good content looks like, and agreed-upon workflows, content governance is what gives AI tools the context they need (just like humans) to create truly exceptional content.
Almost half of B2B marketers who use gen AI have more efficient workflows
Half of B2B marketers (51%) who use generative AI are noticing fewer tedious tasks as a result. Forty-five percent see more efficient workflows, 42% experience improved content optimization, and 38% see improved creativity. Far fewer see the following effects of generative AI use:
Job anxiety (18%)
Changing job requirements (16%)
More personalized content (14%)
Lower-quality content (13%)
Employee layoffs (2%)
Employee hires (2%)
Other (5%)
Only 8% say AI has no impact.
More than half prioritize AI-powered automation in 2025
When we asked B2B marketers how their organizations will prioritize AI-powered automation in 2025, 56% indicate it would be a high or medium priority. Twenty-one percent say it’s a low priority, and 11% don’t rate it as a priority, with 12% unsure of what will happen in 2025.
Again, MarketingProfs’ Ann Handley has some thoughts:
Ann Handley Chief Content Officer MarketingProfs
Let’s go back to that earlier stat that showed how 43% of B2B marketers struggle with differentiating their content from their competitors. We struggle standing out in the sea of same. Yet, at the same time, 56% of B2B marketers are looking to prioritize AI-powered automation in 2025.
The question is: What are we automating? Let’s be smart about it.
Actually, here’s a plea from me: Use AI to automate the boring stuff that gets in the way of creativity. Use it to free up time to be more strategic and creative. Don’t offload your creativity to AI because next year … that 43% is going to increase in the 2026 version of this report. (FOREBODING SWELL OF MUSIC.)
Content and marketing goals
As we’ve seen in past years, content marketing helps most B2B marketers at the top of the funnel, with 87% reporting that it helped them create brand awareness in the last 12 months. Seventy-four percent say it helped generate demand/leads; 62% say it nurtured subscribers/audience/leads; 52% say it grew loyalty with existing clients/customers; and 49% say it helped generate sales/revenue. Thirty-seven percent say content marketing helped grow a subscribed audience, and 9% say it reduced customer support costs.
Success factors
On to what you can learn from the most successful marketers.
Each year, we ask, “How would you characterize the success of your organization’s content marketing approach in the last 12 months?” (Success is defined as achieving your organization’s desired/targeted results.)
This year, 22% of B2B marketers characterize the success of their content marketing as extremely or very successful. Fifty-four percent report moderate success and 21% feel minimally or not at all successful. Three percent are unsure.
We segmented the responses from marketers who rate their organizations as extremely or very successful and dubbed them as the top performers. We looked at what they do differently from their peers and explored the factors they attribute to their success.
What the most successful do
How do the most successful content marketers differ from their less successful peers? Top performers are more likely to:
Think the size of their content marketing team will grow in 2025.
Rate their content strategy as extremely or very effective.
Have the right technology to manage content across the organization.
Have a scalable model for content creation.
Say their scalable model is creating the desired outcomes.
Do a better job measuring content performance effectively.
Use content marketing successfully to generate demand/leads, nurture subscribers/audiences/leads, grow loyalty with existing clients/customers, and generate sales/revenue.
Regarding AI, little difference existed last year between top performers and their peers. That changed this year, as top performers pulled ahead of their peers in some areas, including:
Existence of organizational guidelines for generative AI use
Integration of AI into their daily processes/workflows
Realization of more efficient workflows from AI
Improved content optimization from AI
Reasons for top performers’ success
Like the previous year, the top performers attribute their success mostly to understanding their audience (82%).
Other factors mentioned include:
Produce high-quality content (77%)
Possess industry expertise (70%)
Have high-performing team members (69%)
Set goals that align with their organization’s objectives (62%)
Measure and demonstrate content performance effectively (53%)
Have a documented strategy (47%)
We asked B2B marketers with moderate or lower levels of success, “What would it take to improve your content marketing success?” These comments illustrate some common themes in their responses:
“More human resources and fewer rush requests from other teams.”
“Better strategy, more focused goals. Prioritizing the various internal clients’ needs vs. ROI.”
“A larger team, more/clearer direction from leadership about the role of marketing within the organization, more resources.”
“Fewer silos and more coordination between teams.”
“More dedicated content repurposing process, buyer journey insights — creating more targeted content that aligns to each stage of the journey.”
“Align the content marketing team’s strategy and goals with other teams that create content.”
“Resources to generate more content and repurpose it effectively.”
B2B content tactics
Now that we’ve explored how B2B content marketers work, where they struggle, and how top performers differ, let’s turn to the kinds of content produced and where marketers get the best results.
Short articles are the most-used content type
We asked B2B marketers about the types of content, distribution channels, paid channels, and social media channels used over the last 12 months. The data didn’t show any notable differences between the top performers and the rest of the marketers.
The list of content types and usage looks almost identical to last year’s. Ninety-two percent used short articles/posts, 76% used videos, 75% used case studies/customer stories, 69% used long articles/posts, 57% used data visualizations/visual content, and 51% used e-books/white papers. Less than half of B2B marketers used product technical/data sheets (41%), research reports (36%), and interactive content (27%).
Videos are rated most effective
Last year, B2B marketers said case studies/customer stories were the most effective types of content. This year, they say videos (58%), which came in second last year, are the most effective, followed by case studies/customer stories (53%), e-books/white papers (45%), research reports (45%), and short articles/posts (43%).
Almost all distribute content via social media and corporate blogs
As we saw with the content types, the distribution channel list looks almost identical to what we reported last year.
More than half used organic social media platforms (89%), blogs on corporate websites (84%), email newsletters (71%), email (63%), in-person events (55%), and webinars (55%). Fewer than half used digital events (40%), podcasts (27%), and microsites (26%).
Other channels included digital magazines (22%), direct mail (16%), hybrid events (16%), print magazines (15%), branded online communities (14%), online learning platforms (13%), mobile apps (8%), and separate content brands (5%).
Podcast use saw a slight decrease from the previous year (27% vs. 30%). Why aren’t more B2B marketers using this format?
A. Lee Judge, co-founder and chief marketing officer of Content Monsta, offers his take:
A. Lee Judge Co-founder and CMO Content Monsta
Most businesses view podcasts only as a channel, missing the chance to use them as a content source. Podcasts produce media-rich and engaging content that performs well across multiple channels, including social media, blogs, and newsletters.
Like other content marketing, tracking direct attribution from podcast engagement to closed deals is hard. The way podcasts are consumed makes measurement that much more difficult.
Under pressure to show ROI, valuable marketing programs like podcasts get cut due to imprecise measurement. And marketers often focus on the wrong KPIs for podcasts.
Podcasting for business should be viewed as a content engine and a relationship builder. Traditional metrics miss both. Businesses don’t need a large podcast audience — they need the right audience. So, instead of tracking downloads and subscribers, they should measure content engagement, brand mentions, lead generation, and business relationships.
In-person events and webinars most popular and effective distribution channels
Like the previous year, B2B marketers say in-person events (52%) and webinars (51%) are the most effective distribution channels, followed by email (42%), organic social media platforms (42%), blogs on corporate websites (41%), and email newsletters (37%).
84% use paid channels; social media advertising tops the list
Eighty-four percent of B2B marketers say they use paid channels. Of those, 73% use social media advertising/promoted posts. More than half also use search engine marketing/pay-per-click (64%), digital display advertising (62%), and sponsorships (62%). Fewer than half use native advertising/sponsored content (34%), partner emails (30%), print display advertising (21%), influencer marketing (16%), and other (5%).
Search engine marketing produces best results among paid channels
As they did the previous year, B2B marketers said SEM/PPC was the paid channel that produced the best results for their content marketing (61%), followed by social media advertising/promoted posts (49%), sponsorships (48%), and digital display advertising (35%).
B2B marketers consistently cite LinkedIn as the social media platform that delivers the best value for their organization, and this year is no different. Eighty-five percent say LinkedIn delivers the best value, followed by 28% who say Facebook, 22% who cite YouTube, and 21% who say Instagram. Only 7% mention Twitter and 3% say TikTok, with responses nearly identical to the previous year.
Heike Young, head of content and integrated marketing at Microsoft, says LinkedIn remains a gold mine for B2B marketers:
Heike Young Head of Content and Integrated Marketing Microsoft
Think you need to be overly formal, corporate, and professional on LinkedIn? Nope. Nowadays, creator-led campaigns and vertical videos bring a funnier and less stodgy flavor to the LinkedIn feed.LinkedIn is ubiquitous with B2B audiences. Literally everyone is there. Now’s the time to stand out and reach your audience where they are with content that’s refreshingly human and real.
The brands that do LinkedIn right today will wield huge influence over the next year.
Where did social media use increase?
With LinkedIn delivering the best value, it’s unsurprising that 68% of marketers increased their use of it in the last 12 months. What else is up?
31% increased their use of YouTube
27% increased their use of Instagram
20% increased their use of Facebook
9% increased their use of TikTok
6% increased their use of Reddit
6% increased their use of X
X’s overall use declines
B2B marketers’ use of organic social media platforms looks much like it did the previous year. The only sizeable decrease came from X: 39% say they don’t use X. Last year, only 27% said they didn’t use it.
Only 15% say they use Reddit. Considering its recent debut in Google’s search results, it will be interesting to see what happens over the next year on that platform.
Budgets and spending trends
Sixty-three percent of B2B marketers say they have knowledge of their organization’s budget/budgeting process for content marketing. Among those marketers, 46% think their content marketing budget will increase in 2025 when compared with 2024 (last year, 45% thought their budget would increase). Forty-one percent think their budget will stay the same, 8% expect it to decrease, and 5% are unsure.
AI investments join the list of spending areas for 2025
As we saw in the last two years, the majority of B2B marketers (61%) think their organization will increase investment in videos in 2025. Budgets for AI for content optimization/performance (40%) and AI for content creation (39%) were new areas of investment on the list this year.
The other investment areas were cited in numbers similar to last year except for in-person events, which decreased to 35% this year vs. 47% last year.
To summarize, 61% think their organization will increase investment in videos in 2025, followed by thought leadership content (52%), AI for content optimization/performance (40%), paid advertising (40%), AI for content creation (39%), in-person events (35%), webinars (32%), building an online community (27%), digital events (21%), and audio content (20%).
1 in 4 think their team will grow in 2025
In a new question, we asked B2B marketers to predict whether their teams would grow, stay the same, or decrease in the coming year. Almost two-thirds (64%) expect the size of their content marketing team will stay the same in 2025; however, 27% think their team will grow. Only 6% think the team will decrease, and 3% are unsure. Among the top performers, 38% think their teams will grow.
When we asked why they think their teams will increase in 2025, several themes emerged:
Content importance: When the organization sees value in content, more resources are needed to manage and produce high-quality content.
Integration and collaboration: Many marketers expect to integrate content marketing more fully within their organizations to break down silos and create more cohesive teams.
Gaps and demands: Marketers reported plans to fill the content gaps for various audience segments.
Market demand: More content staff can capitalize on market opportunities and meet customer needs.
Organizational growth: Some organizations are expanding operations and entering new markets.
Here are some of the B2B marketers’ comments:
“Demand is high, and we have a unique proposition in the market.”
“Increasing understanding of the power of content.”
“Content has become more relevant to the business in the last few years.”
“Our business is growing, and our need for content has increased. Content has been a significant part of our organic growth.”
“Good content is more important than ever, so our needs will continue to grow.”
“Higher demand for increasingly diverse content.”
While such growth will be exciting, it will be important to ensure that these teams have the leadership, goals, strategies, resources, budgets, scalable content models, and technologies they need for success.
Action steps
So, how can B2B content and marketing teams act on these benchmarks and trends? I asked CMI’s Robert Rose to provide some advice. Here’s what he said:
“Do. Or do not. There is no try.” — Yoda
Robert Rose Chief Strategy Advisor Content Marketing Institute
One of the more common situations I see B2B marketing teams facing today is the perennial state of “fixing things.” The CMS never got fully implemented. The “phase X” of marketing automation doesn’t work the way it should. Customer data is inaccessible. So are the analytics. The new CMO is reorganizing and auditing the teams. Everyone’s struggling to keep up with content demand, so we’re trying to fix our production tools. And we’re all busy experimenting with AI.
On many teams, 100% of time and resources go to fixing or maintaining things. When new ideas come along, the team either can’t do them or sighs wearily and says, “OK, we’ll try.”
But the most successful teams don’t try. They do these things:
Create a content orchestration approach. Fixing the communication, collaboration, and alignment among the teams handling content creation, consumption, publishing, and measurement isn’t glamorous. Still, here’s a truth about one company that now seems to effortlessly produce compelling content that wins all the awards. It once spent years tackling the non-glamorous work of creating cross-team governance, workflows, and standards. It was tough and messy, and it required a shift in working habits. Today, it’s operating on an entirely different level.
Take a structured approach to content and marketing innovations. Letting every team member experiment with AI and other innovations is like setting dogs or cats loose in a pet food store to find a workable approach to better animal nutrition. You won’t get efficiency by adding “experiment” to everyone’s workload or by filling every spare moment with a “making marketing better” meeting. Instead, come together (see previous point) to collaborate on and commit to a few strategic bets. They might still fail, but you’ll learn why they failed rather than just saying, “We didn’t give it enough resources.”
Stop doing some things. Many marketing challenges are caused by institutional momentum. One company I worked with created 250 PDFs for thought leadership in a year — only 63 of them earned more than 20 downloads. Teams increasingly focus on task-based outputs rather than meaningful outcomes. Stop producing what doesn’t work, end activities that don’t contribute to targeted outcomes, and quit measuring what doesn’t align with overall objectives.
Marketing teams must let go of the mindset that being 100% busy is a good thing. It isn’t. There will always be things to fix and maintain. But the only way out of meh content and marketing results isn’t to seek new resources to supplement the repair and maintenance work.
To be remarkable, you must create space for the possibility of creating something remarkable.
As I’ve said to many clients in the last six months, the decisions you make are not nearly as important as making them.
Stop trying things. Do things.
Methodology
The 15th annual content marketing survey was conducted by Content Marketing Institute and MarketingProfs. The survey was fielded between June 25 and Aug. 16, 2024, and was sponsored by The MX Group. The survey drew 1,186 global responses. This article reports on the 980 B2B respondents, mostly from North America.
The industries represented include:
Technology (27%)
Agency (15%)
Manufacturing (11%)
Professional services (10%)
Banking/finance/insurance (9%)
Consulting (7%)
Health care/med/pharma/life sciences (7%)
Other (14%)
The B2B marketers surveyed work in these organizational sizes:
One to nine employees (16%)
10 to 99 employees (28%)
100 to 999 employees (29%)
1,000-plus employees (27%)
Thanks to the survey participants who made this research possible and everyone who helps disseminate these findings throughout the marketing industry.
Get the latest Content Marketing Institute research reports while they’re hot – subscribe to the daily or weekly newsletter.
About Content Marketing Institute
Content Marketing Institute (CMI) exists to do one thing: Advance the practice of content marketing through online education and in-person and digital events. We create and curate content experiences that teach marketers and creators from enterprise brands, small businesses, and agencies how to attract and retain customers through compelling, multichannel storytelling. Global brands turn to CMI for strategic consultation, training, and research. Organizations from around the world send teams to Content Marketing World, the largest content marketing-focused event, the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, and CMI virtual events, including ContentTECH Summit. Our community of 215,000-plus content marketers shares camaraderie and conversation. CMI is organized by Informa Connect. To learn more, visit www.contentmarketinginstitute.com.
About MarketingProfs
More than 600,000 marketing professionals worldwide rely on MarketingProfs for B2B Marketing training and education backed by data science, psychology, and real-world experience. Access free B2B marketing publications, virtual conferences, podcasts, daily newsletters (and more) and check out the MarketingProfs B2B Forum — the flagship in-person event for B2B Marketing training and education at MarketingProfs.com.
About The MX Group
The MX Group is the second-largest independent B2B marketing agency in the U.S., with a mission to impact the marketplace for companies that impact the world. For over 35 years, we’ve created meaningful Market Experiences for national and global B2B brands. Our clients are leaders and innovators in the automotive, energy and utilities, financial services, food, oil and gas, industrial, manufacturing, packaging, technology and SaaS sectors as well as trade associations. Whether a client is an established brand or a startup, we have the people and perspectives to be a strong partner that makes a difference. For more, visit themxgroup.com.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Allen Career Institute, a test preparation company, has expanded to the Hyderabad market, opening five campuses in the city.
“After opening several centres in the South, Hyderabad is the next step forward for us. In the first phase we are opening five new campuses in key locations across the city. These centres are expected to cover over 20,000 students in the next three years,” Nitin Kukreja, CEO of Allen Career Institute, said.
The Hyderabad campuses will have senior faculty members from across the country, including those trained in the Kota (Rajasthan) classroom ecosystem,” he said.
The centres will also offer one-on-one sessions with faculty and psychological counsellors for all students.
The company claims that in the last 15 years, it has produced 25 All-India first ranks in examinations like IIT-JEE and NEET.
Set up in 1988, the institute is present in 65 cities in 25 States and four Union Territories.
The Dow, S&P 500, Nasdaq and Russell 2000 each hit new all-time highs Monday.
Investors are giddy with excitement and they clearly believe that both big blue chip multinationals and smaller companies that do most of their business in the U.S. will continue to thrive.
So is this the Donald Trump rally? Or the Janet Yellen rally?
Some strategists believe Trump’s stimulus plans and talk of killing many burdensome regulations are the reasons stocks are soaring.
Or perhaps this is better characterized as a continuation of the Barack Obama rally instead?
You could argue that POTUS 44 has dealt POTUS 45 a pretty good hand.
The solid job market and overall economy that Trump inherited may be the reason consumers and businesses are so confident.
But investors (and financial journalists) are often quick to give the president more credit — and blame — than they probably deserve for the performance of the stock market.
RBC strategist Jonathan Golub pointed this out in a report on Monday, one that was aptly titled “Message to Market: It’s Not All About Donald.”
Related: Trump isn’t killing the bull market
Golub noted that the S&P 500 rose nearly 7% from late June through Election Day — a time when most polls were predicting that Hillary Clinton would be the next president.
But stocks have continued to rally since then, rising another 8% since Trump pulled off the upset (at least to the mainstream media and Wall Street) victory.
You can’t have it both ways. It makes no logical sense to suggest that stocks rallied because investors believed Trump would lose and that they continued to rally because Trump didn’t lose.
Bond yields have also been rising since Trump won, a phenomenon that many investors have attributed to the likelihood of stimulus from the president and Republican Congress.
Yet Golub points out that the yield on the 10-year U.S. Treasury was going up during the late summer as well.
Of course, many investors were expecting stimulus from Clinton too.
Yet once again, many investors are claiming that Trump is the catalyst for something that not only was going on before he was elected, but was happening because many thought he would lose.
Related: Stocks have avoided a 1% dive for an unusually long period of time
So it’s odd that Trump is being cited as the main reason for a market rally that began months before anyone felt he could win.
What’s really going on? The one constant during the past few months is the Federal Reserve.
Yes. the markets are reacting to Washington. But they are paying closer attention to Janet Yellen, not the White House.
The Fed made it crystal clear before the election that it would probably raise interest rates in December and do so a few more times in 2017 regardless of who won the race for president.
The good news for investors is that the U.S. economy seems to be growing steadily, but does not appear to be at risk of overheating.
Related: Here’s why the world’s largest money manager is worried
The most recent jobs report showed that wages grew at a decent rate of 2.5% annually. But that’s not nearly high enough to spark fears of runaway inflation and lead the Fed to aggressively raise rates.
Even if Yellen and the Fed hike rates three times this year, they are likely to do so by just a quarter point every time. That would push the Fed’s key short-term rate to a range of 1.25% to 1.5%.
That’s still extremely low. At those levels, stocks would still be more attractive than bonds. Corporate earnings should be able to keep rising at a healthy clip. And consumers would probably keep spending.
So investors would be wise to keep a close eye on Yellen and not just have a myopic focus on the president,
With that in mind, Yellen is set to testify in front of Congress on Tuesday and Wednesday. And what she says about the timing and magnitude of future rate hikes could wind up keeping the rally going full steam ahead — or stopping it dead in its tracks.
CNNMoney (New York) First published February 13, 2017: 12:30 PM ET
If you didn’t get a chance to shop during Amazon Prime Day, you’re in luck. There are still plenty of splurge-worthy deals on essentials and tech — even home security cameras, which can make great utilitarian gifts if you have someone on your list who can be hard to shop for. If you or someone you know would like to keep a better eye on the home or small business, now’s a great time to snag our top choice for the best home security camera, the Arlo Pro 5S, for only $100 at Amazon. That saves you 60% on the overall asking price of $250.
The Arlo 5S Spotlight security camera features 2K HDR capture for great visuals all 24 hours of the day. It has color night vision, which allows you to see anything that happens outside at night, and it also turns on a spotlight should anything or anyone suspicious arrive within your home’s purview. The included camera has 12x zoom and a 160-degree field of vision for a comprehensive look at your front yard or backyard. You can install it either indoors or outdoors depending on your security needs.
This story is part of Amazon Prime Day, CNET’s guide to everything you need to know and how to find the best deals.
Hey, did you know? CNET Deals texts are free, easy and save you money.
The Arlo 5S includes a mount you can use to easily install your camera, and video object detection — perfect for monitoring any package deliveries. This security camera supports dual-band Wi-Fi connectivity and detects 2.4GHz and 5GHz networks. Once you sync this camera to your Wi-Fi network, it’ll connect to whichever band is stronger. Need an even more budget-friendly option? The Arlo Essential security camera 2K is just $60 right now, saving you a total of $40.
If you missed Prime Day and are looking for essentials, tech and other upgrades but want to stick to your budget, check out our list of remaining deals under $25.
CNET is always covering a wide array of deals on tech products and much more. Start with the hottest sales and discounts on the CNET Deals page, and sign up for the CNET Deals Text to get daily deals sent straight to your phone. Add the free CNET Shopping extension to your browser for real-time price comparisons and cash-back offers. And peruse our gift guide, which includes a full range of ideas for birthdays, anniversaries and more.
Many favorable Halloween activities, such as strolling through a haunted house or watching a horror movie, are filled with elements designed to elicit fear, yet they are still enjoyable pastimes for many.
When it comes to horror movies specifically, several polls have pointed to a fairly even overall split between those who enjoy them and those who would rather do without.
For example, a 2022 survey conducted by Statista found that 64% of adults ages 30 to 44 either liked or loved watching horror movies.
THRIVING WITH ANXIETY: EXPERT TIPS ON EMBRACING THE MENTAL HEALTH CONDITION
So why do some people enjoy participating in scary activities while others do not find the same amusement?
When watching a horror movie, viewers know that what they see while watching can’t actually hurt them — yet the viewing experience can still be a terrifying one.
Many people find amusement in scary activities, such as watching a horror movie or going to a haunted house. (iStock)
“When we think about triggers, we all come to our lives with a different story of experiences, and that’s a piece of it, but when we kind of pull the lens out a little bit more and take a look at all of our fears, they kind of fall into one of two buckets when we’re talking about an internal fear,” Dr. Mary Poffenroth, a scientist and fear expert based in Los Angeles and author of “Brave New You,” told Fox News Digital in a phone interview.
“Either fear of not enough or fear of losing control,” she added.
An example of the fear of losing control could be a person experiencing a jump scare, according to Poffenroth, which can be viewed as something that can’t be controlled.
Self-confidence could be another factor that comes into play.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR LIFESTYLE NEWSLETTER
“If you’re somebody that maybe is struggling with self-confidence … and [you’re] putting yourself into scary situations or scary movies or haunted houses like that, you may feel like that fear [of] not enough, of not being courageous enough or brave enough or tough enough,” Poffenroth said.
Such feelings that develop inside when a scary element is present start in the brain — which can signal to the body that it’s in danger, even though it may not actually be, according to experts.
Even though a horror movie can’t actually hurt you, it could cause a reaction like a jump scare — which can trigger a feeling of not being in control.(iStock)
“In our brain, we have two almond-shaped structures, one on the left, one on the right, that we’re going to refer to as the amygdala,” said Poffenroth.
“Even though the entire process is a little bit more complicated, in easier terms, it’s the amygdala that is going to be the driver of our fear response, and the amygdala works in an on-off switch, even though there’s a spectrum of intensity.”
“When we overcome any obstacle, we not only feel better about ourselves, but we get those dopamine hits.”
The amygdala can either signal a person is in danger or alert the body that everything is safe.
HALLOWEEN-THEMED BOOKS THAT WILL GIVE YOU A FRIGHT THIS SPOOKY SEASON
“That amygdala can get turned on so easily in our modern world, and it’s super overprotective,” Poffenroth added. “It’s trying to get us to stay in the blanket cave as much as possible and not go out in the world, because the world is big and scary — but that’s not truly living the life that we say that we want.”
For more Lifestyle articles, visit www.foxnews.com/lifestyle
Some find an enjoyable adrenaline rush when it comes to activities that scare them. They can feel a strong sense of pride after overcoming an obstacle that stood in their way.
“When we start to do scary stuff, and we overcome that kind of level or barrier, and then we level up, if you will — then we become more confident that we can handle bigger and bolder types of opportunities,” Poffenroth said.
Those who enjoy scary activities often find excitement in overcoming something outside their comfort zone.(Creative Touch Imaging Ltd./NurPhoto via Getty Images)
For those who find enjoyment in accomplishing scary feats, it could also simply be their personality that makes them this way, causing them to always want to step out of their comfort zone and push their limits.
“Sometimes that’s just a personality trait,” Poffenroth said. “For me, I really enjoy pushing the boundaries of what I think I can do, what society says I’m allowed to do, and that’s just something I enjoy.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“When we overcome any obstacle, we not only feel better about ourselves, but we get those dopamine hits, and that reward center gets fired up,” Poffenroth continued.
“If we found it a positive experience, then we’ll want to do it more.”
Navratri is coming to an end soon. People across the country are celebrating with great enthusiasm and delicious food, of course. Several Bollywood celebrities have also shared glimpses of their outings for Navratri and Durga Puja. From enjoying homemade treats to indulging in community “bhog” meals at pandals, our favourite celebs are choosing to mark the occasion in different ways. Shilpa Shetty took to Instagram to wish her followers for Ashtami and Navami 2024 and also share how she celebrated the festival.
Also Read: Farah Khan Is Not Happy With Shilpa Shetty As Her Flight Companion – Here’s Why
In the reel, we can see Shilpa performing Kanjak Poojan or Kanya Puja. This ritual typically involves worshipping young girls as forms of the goddess Durga. In the video, we see numerous little ones being served by Shilpa Shetty in honour of this tradition. She is seen distributing crispy puris to the seated girls. Their plates are also filled with other festive treats: sukha kala chana, halwa, laddoo and a banana. In one shot, Shilpa can be seen kneeling down in front of a kid and feeding her a morsel of the dish. The little guests are also observed receiving gift packages, which is common practice during Kanya Puja. Take a look below:
Vicky Kaushal also shared an Instagram update on Ashtami 2024. He enjoyed a traditional trio of treats, similar to those relished by the young girls for Kanya Puja. Click here to read the full story.
Are you craving the spicy yumminess of kala chana now? The Ashtami-special version is a must-try. It can be easily prepared at home. Click here for a quick recipe.
Also Read:Shilpa Shetty Enjoys A Traditional South Indian Veg Thali. Here’s What Was On Menu
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-10-11/Global-Development-Initiative-dialogue-held-at-AU-headquarters-1xCiABbDvJ6/img/d4e05c2603e2479e98a7f87ee344f5d5/d4e05c2603e2479e98a7f87ee344f5d5.png' alt='People walk towards the entrance of the AU headquarters, Addis Ababa, Ethiopia, February 18, 2024. /CFP'
A dialogue on the China-proposed Global Development Initiative (GDI) was held on Thursday at the headquarters of the African Union (AU) in Addis Ababa.
In his opening speech, AU Commissioner for Education, Science, and Innovation, Mohammed Belhocine said the relationship between Africa and China has a long history and has developed into an outstanding partnership based on mutual benefit and win-win cooperation.
Africa-China cooperation is a shining example of South-South cooperation, he said, adding that GDI aligns well with Africa’s Agenda 2063 development blueprint and will undoubtedly benefit future generations.
Zhao Fengtao, deputy head of the China International Development Cooperation Agency, said the GDI serves as a catalyst and accelerator for the implementation of the United Nations’ 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development.
The initiative’s eight key cooperation areas are fully aligned with the 17 Sustainable Development Goals, and it has garnered active support and participation from more than 100 countries and over 20 international organizations, effectively building consensus on international development cooperation, said Zhao.
Since the GDI was proposed in 2021, China-Africa cooperation across various fields has yielded fruitful results, according to Zhao.
Nearly 200 “small and beautiful” livelihood-improving projects have been launched in Africa, more than 30 African countries have joined the Group of Friends of the Global Development Initiative and the Global Development Promotion Center and 14 African countries have signed bilateral documents with China to implement the initiative, he said.
Hu Changchun, head of the Chinese Mission to the African Union, said the recently concluded Summit of the Forum on China-Africa Cooperation injected strong new momentum into deepening mutually beneficial cooperation between China and Africa for the next three years.
The event was attended by about 200 representatives from organizations such as the African Union, the United Nations Economic Commission for Africa, the United Nations Industrial Development Organization, the United Nations Development Program, and the Africa Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.
The information is current and up-to-date in accordance with the latest veterinarian research.
Learn more »
Hi, I’m Dr. Karyn! Read my introduction to learn more about me and meet my five hilarious cats: Clutch, Cyril, Alex, Zelda, and Zazzles.
When looking at my ginger cat, Alex, it’s hard not to notice that he has remarkably long whiskers, particularly for a short-haired cat, and it made me wonder about some of the so-called ‘rules’ about whiskers. These are some of the claims made about whiskers, or as they are technically called, vibrissae:
Cats use whiskers to gauge the width of a gap to see if they can fit through it
Fatter cats have longer whiskers
A cat’s whiskers are proportionate to the width of their body
But when I look at the various sizes of my cats compared with their whisker length, these theories don’t quite seem to add up.
Whiskers As A Measuring Tool
Have you ever watched a cat squeeze, jump, or run through a narrow gap? How often do they stop to test the width with their whiskers? And, judging by the contortions they’re capable of to navigate such narrow openings, how much attention are they paying to this ‘whisker feedback’ anyway?
The whiskers might say no, but Clutch says yes.
Fatter Cats Have Longer Whiskers
One look at Cyril will tell you that this is simply not the case. As my squishy, huggable, resident fatty, Cyril is almost twice the size of our smallest feline, Zazzles. Even at a lean body weight, he is a large cat, but his whiskers are of quite a modest length.
Although whiskers fall out and are replaced like normal hair, they don’t grow longer if a cat puts on weight, so perhaps it’s a good thing that they’re not relying on them to suss out the accessibility of small spaces, or we’d be seeing a lot more tubby tabbies trapped in tiny openings!
Cyril – he doesn’t want to talk about his figure.
Whiskers Are Proportionate to Body Width
I took it upon myself to measure the width of each of my cats at the shoulders, which, with the exception of Cyril (who is going on a diet), is the widest part of a cat’s body. I then measured the overall width of their whiskers at the longest whisker to see how they compared.
To look at, Clutch’s whiskers appeared to be most proportionate to his body, while Zazzles’ seemed quite short, even when accounting for her petite frame. When I looked at the ratios of whisker length to body width, I noticed something particularly interesting – the ratio of Clutch’s whiskers to body is 1.6 : 1.
And that, my friends, is known as The Golden Ratio.
Whisker width
23
19
18
16
22
Shoulder width
14
11.5
16
12
15
Ratio
1.7 : 1
1.6 : 1
1.1 : 1
1.3 : 1
1.4 : 1
The Golden Ratio
Also known as ‘Phi’ and ‘The Divine Proportion’, this is a ratio that is seen in nature time and time again. Although physics scholars are quick to dismiss the significance of this ratio when seen in biological organisms, the idea that features displaying these proportions are considered to be examples of ‘perfect beauty’ is one that visionaries like Leonardo DaVinci subscribed to, as shown in his famous Vitruvian Man. Although it can easily be dismissed as coincidence or chance, there are many instances in nature and architecture where this divine ratio can be observed, from the spirals of a nautilus shell, the design of the pyramids, to the proportions of the human face. And now, in Clutch’s whiskers.
As I mentioned, when looking at the various features of my five cats, it was Clutch’s whiskers that seemed to be most in proportion with his face and body, so it’s interesting that his whisker-to-body width ratio is arguably divine!
The long-whiskered Alex’s ratio is an impressive 1.7 to 1, while Cyril’s is a somewhat embarrassing 1.1 to 1.
What Is The Purpose of Whiskers?
Many people will still claim that because they are far-sighted, cats use their whiskers to help navigate their surroundings. However, this seems neither logical nor practical. Waiting for those delicate hairs to come into contact with something before making their move does not exactly fit with smooth and stealthy feline motion.
Given the level of sensitivity of feline vibrissae, it is far more likely that they have evolved to detect changes in airflow created by the slightest movements of animals, allowing them to locate prey in the low light conditions of dusk and dawn, the most popular time for feline hunting. It would also explain why our cats tend to get quite agitated when windy weather wreaks havoc with their navigational instruments!
Does Whisker Length Matter?
Clutch – perfectly proportioned?
Is Clutch better equipped for hunting because his whiskers follow the golden ratio? Or does Alex’s far-reaching vibrissae give him a strategic advantage?
Being that my cats live indoors and are not required to catch their dinner, I can’t really judge them on their relative hunting skills, but my instincts tell me ‘no’. I think Cyril’s preference for lazing on his back over elevating his heart rate would impact his prey count far more than his short whiskers.
Has domestication and selective breeding altered the divine whisker proportions beyond what is ‘optimal’? Judging by the stubbly vibrissae of the Sphynx, or the Rapunzelesque whiskers of some long-haired breeds, I would have to say: yes. Extremely long whiskers are going to be more hindrance than help, while non-existent whiskers will be no help at all!
Alex and his long and winding whiskers.
The attractive length of Alex’s whiskers may give him a slight edge over the likes of Zazzles or Cyril, but once that ratio gets much higher than 1.7, you’re dealing with hairs that are more likely to get tangled than offer tactical advantage.
It would certainly be interesting, albeit challenging, to study the whisker:body width figures of feral cats and their larger relatives to find out if the golden ratio does dominate in nature – I’m looking at you, prospective PhD candidates!
This article is a part of Dr. Karyn’s series with her five hilarious cats.
KBC Global, a construction and real estate company, has launched a new residential project in Nashik with six commercial units and twenty-two residential units, this project reinforces KBC Global’s commitment to supporting the local community through thoughtfully planned infrastructure.
Since April, the company has handed over possession of over 135 residential and commercial units in Nashik. Simultaneously, KBC Global through its subsidiary KBC International has signed a MoU with the Liberia Special Economic Zone Authority.
The project marks an essential phase in KBC Global’s international ventures, promising residential complexes, low-cost housing and commercial spaces within Liberia’s SEZ. The venture is scheduled to start in Q2 of 2025, with the anticipated completion date within three years.
In June, the company bagged $20 million civil engineering contract with CRJE (East Africa), a part of the China Railway Construction Group.
In September, the company completed crucial payment obligation to Capri Global Capital and secured a waiver on non-financial penal interest, bringing the outstanding balance with Capri to ₹3.50 crore.
Also read: KBC Global bags ₹105 cr project in Liberia SEZ
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
BERSHKA je upravo u ponudu dobila kolekciju inspiriranu Twilight franšizom, a društvene mreže su pune reakcija.
Tiktokerica Aisha u svojem videu koji je pregledan više od 12 milijuna puta kratko je komentirala: “Bershka, koji kurac?” Ipak, u opisu videa otkrila je da je kupila jedan od komada iz ove kolekcije.
Drugi tiktokeri također su dijelili videozapise iz Bershke ili s njihove internetske trgovine, ističući Twilight kolekciju. Platforma je doslovno preplavljena reakcijama na ove nove komade.
“Twilight merch u 2024., plačem”
Komentari na ove videe su sve. “Bershka jednostavno razumije”, “Bershka zna da je stigla sezona ‘hoa hoa hoa'”, “Napokon nešto dobro u Bershki”, “OK, trčim u Bershku”, “Bershka, stižem”, “Bershka prolazi kroz fazu”, “Što ako sam tim Jacob?”, “Ubila bih za taj džemper”, “Twilight merch u 2024., plačem”, “Je li ovo snimljeno prije 12 godina?”, “Bershka je jedna od nas”, “Bershka je tim Edward”, “Želim sve”, “Spektakularno, daj mi 14 svega”, “Kasne par godina”, “Toliko je u stilu 2010. da je nevjerojatno – obožavam!”, “Edward džemper je sve.”
Ako se pitate je li ova kolekcija stigla i kod nas, odgovor je – da. Svi ovi komadi trenutačno su dostupni na Bershkinoj web-stranici. Izdvojili smo nekoliko primjeraka u nastavku, a ako ih želite, požurite – pojedini brojevi brzo nestaju sa zaliha.
Sve je krenulo serijom knjiga
Twilight franšiza temelji se na seriji knjiga autorice Stephenie Meyer, koja je počela s prvom knjigom Twilight 2005. godine. U središtu priče je ljubavni trokut između Belle Swan, tinejdžerice iz malog grada, i nadnaravnih likova Edwarda Cullena, vampira, i Jacoba Blacka, vukodlaka. Serija knjiga postala je hit među tinejdžerima i ubrzo je dobila filmske adaptacije.
Prvi film Twilight izašao je 2008. godine s Kristen Stewart kao Bellom Swan i Robertom Pattinsonom kao Edwardom Cullenom. Film je postigao veliki uspjeh, što je omogućilo snimanje preostalih dijelova: New Moon (2009.), Eclipse (2010.) i Breaking Dawn u dva dijela (2011. i 2012.).
Taylor Lautner glumio je Jacoba Blacka, što je dodatno ojačalo interes za ljubavni trokut i potaknulo debatu među obožavateljima oko timova Edward i Jacob. Filmovi su postali simbol tinejdžerske pop-kulture i donijeli svjetsku slavu glumačkoj ekipi, a istovremeno pokrenuli novi val interesa za vampire u popularnoj kulturi.
Twilight franšiza ostaje popularna i u 2024. godini, a zanimanje za nju raste među novom generacijom obožavatelja. Razlozi za ovu trajnu popularnost leže u snažnoj nostalgiji za serijalom, ponovnim emitiranjem filmova na platformama poput Netflixa te u planovima za nove adaptacije.
Studio Lionsgate, koji posjeduje prava na Twilight, radi na animiranoj seriji inspiriranoj knjigama Stephenie Meyer, što je izazvalo zanimanje obožavatelja diljem svijeta.
Osim toga, kako piše Independent, franšiza je postala simbol jesenske atmosfere i “hoa hoa hoa” nostalgije na društvenim mrežama, inspirirane pjesmom Eyes on Fire grupe Blue Foundation, čiji vokali evociraju hladno, maglovito raspoloženje koje je postalo sinonim za jesen.
Pjesma je korištena u prvom Twilight filmu iz 2008. godine, a njezini tmurni tonovi savršeno su se uklopili u atmosferu filma, smještenog u kišovitom, maglovitom Forksu. Na TikToku i drugim mrežama obožavatelji pjesmu često povezuju s dolaskom jeseni, prisjećajući se prepoznatljivog ambijenta serijala.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Narbonne and San Pedro’s girls’ flag football teams met at midfield after the officials called both teams to the 50-yard line to start the game.
“Let’s not get caught up in the other stuff,” one referee remarked, seemingly in reference to the boycott of Narbonne’s boys’ team by its Marine League rivals. San Pedro forfeited its Friday contest against Narbonne, a week after Banning did the same.
The girls of San Pedro (18-2) and Narbonne (9-8) ignored the noise, with the Pirates coming back from a 12-point deficit to claim a 13-12 victory. After rumblings that the flag football game also would be canceled, Narbonne coach Sherrelle Holmes and San Pedro coach Vic Tuberosi spoke this week to ensure it would not.
“Vic and I did a great job keeping the focus on the girls and highlighting the special things that flag football has brought,” Holmes said. “I’m glad we didn’t have another distraction because that was clearly a distraction that neither team had nothing to do with. Hopefully, they figure their stuff out, but it has nothing to do with us — what we’re trying to accomplish.”
Last week, four Marine League football coaches — Banning’s Raymond Grajeda, San Pedro’s Corey Walsh, Gardena’s Monty Gilbreath and Carson’s Mike Christensen — alleged in a letter that Narbonne violated league rules. The teams claim they will forfeit games against the Gauchos until City Section Commissioner Vicky Lagos or the L.A. Unified School District takes action against the program.
If Lagos does, it would not be the first time Narbonne faced punishment. In 2019, the City Section reprimanded the Gauchos for fielding an ineligible player after investigating the program.
Coach Malcolm Manuel, a former Banning junior-varsity coach hired by Narbonne in 2021, released a statement Wednesday denying the allegations.
“I want to clarify that we are not involved in any activities that would jeopardize our eligibility, integrity, opportunities for our players, or the values we uphold,” Manuel wrote. “Our athletes have submitted all necessary paperwork, which was thoroughly reviewed and cleared.”
San Pedro team captains, left, shake hands with Narbonne team captains before a girls’ flag football game on Oct. 11, 2024.
(Benjamin Royer / For The Times)
Tuberosi, who is in his second season coaching San Pedro flag football, said he does not want the boys’ and girls’ teams to be in the same drama, emphasizing the camaraderie in flag football so far.
“I don’t want the girls to know football like that,” he said. “At first, when I thought we would have to cancel, I was a little upset and disappointed. I think we should be differentiated from [the boys]. The girls’ game is completely different.”
San Pedro senior Giuliana Sutrin, who made a juggling pick-six to secure the one-point win, said playing Friday showed what San Pedro is about.
“It took the team coming together, realizing that we need to come together, hype each other up on the sideline, on the field,” Sutrin said. “Just be resilient.”
Vivo’s sub-company iQOO is all set to launch its next flagship smartphone, the iQOO 1 in a couple of weeks in China. The worldwide release of the device is expected to take place by the end of this year. The phone is anticipated to be supported by the Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 4 chipset and can come with an IP68-rated design. The much-anticipated phone has also been seen on numerous certification websites that have disclosed a few key details about the forthcoming iQOO smartphone. Now, some latest leaks have revealed potential features and specifications of the iQOO 13.
The smartphone is expected to include an IP68-rated build for dust and water resistance. The leaks suggest that the device might feature an ultrasonic fingerprint sensor. Nonetheless, the iQOO 13 might be reduced to 100W wired charging support unlike its predecessor the iQOO 12, which was released last November and equipped with 120W wired charging assistance.
Furthermore, the iQOO 13 will also feature Power Delivery (PD) charging support. The forthcoming smartphone is expected to come with USB-C to USB-C cable just like the Vivo X100 series. Additionally, the leaks reveal that the display screen is estimated to be an improved panel as compared to the BOE X2 Oriental screen. Consumers might also witness that the upcoming smartphone will feature an updated IP68 design packed with a USB 3.0 port for improved data transfer.
Furthermore, the iQOO 13 is expected to have a 6.7-inch AMOLED display screen with 2K resolution equipped with a refresh rate of 144Hz. Apart from these specifications, the device is supported by the forthcoming Snapdragon 8 Gen 4 SoC with up to 16GB RAM and 512GB memory. Reports suggest that the new device will be loaded with a powerful and massive 6,150mAh battery for improved endurance.
The Similipal Tiger Reserve (STR) in Odisha reopened for tourists on Thursday after four months, officials said.
Odisha: Similipal Tiger Reserve reopens for tourists after four months (Photo by Twitter/Similipal_South)
The tiger reserve was temporarily closed due to monsoon, they said.
The Deputy Director of STR, Samrat Gouda, said 151 tourists in 36 vehicles visited the tiger reserve on the first day.
The tiger reserve was closed for tourists from June 12 due to monsoon. For the first time wildlife safari facilities were provided by STR authorities for the tourists.
Interested tourists will have to pre-book the safari vehicles through the Odisha eco tourism web portal in advance, he said.
The wildlife safari vehicles will provide service for five hours in the morning from 5.30 am and four hours in the afternoon from 3 pm, Gouda said.
Tourists can visit the STR from the Kaliani entry point in Jashipur from 6 am to 12 pm and the Pithabata entry point in the Baripada division from 11 am to 1 pm.It has been made mandatory for every tourist vehicle to take one guide with them while entering the tiger reserve.
The tourists will have to exit from the park through the Kalikaprasad check gate by 6 pm, another official said.
If a tourist car develops any mechanical snag inside the park, the occupants of such vehicle will have to pay ₹4,000 and avail of vehicles provided by the STR.Spread over 2,750 square kilometres, the reserve has varieties of plant species and 96 types of orchids.
It is home to 42 species of mammals, 242 varieties of birds and 30 reptile categories.
Besides rare melanistic tigers, Royal Bengal Tigers, leopards, Asian elephants, sambar, barking deer, gaur, jungle cat, wild boar, four-horned antelope and giant squirrels are also found in it.
The biggest fan Daniel never met was the late Queen Mum. “The artist Derek Hill lived in Donegal and he used to get me to sign CDs to ‘Ma’am’. He used to paint with the King when he was Prince Charles, and Charles would deliver them to his grandmother.”
A Daniel O’Donnell DVD sat proudly on the Clarence House the coffee table.
“I would have loved to have met her, and Queen Elizabeth – a great woman really. I met Charles at the millennium in Cardiff; he gave me the MBE in 2002.”
The humble star made it to Strictly Come Dancing in 2015. “I was terrified,” he tells me. “I couldn’t remember the choreography but what an amazing show to be invited on – the glamour and panache…”
O’Donnell’s wholesome style and older, largely female audience inspired Marie Jones’s 90s comedy play, Women On The Verge Of HRT. And Father Ted parodied him as ‘Eoin McLove’, a singer and TV personality, adored by middle-aged women, whose niceness was all a front.
It isn’t. Daniel is still the same modest, polite, and genuine person I filmed with in 1996. He lives with Majella, his wife of 22 years, has two stepchildren, and is a step-grandfather.
He has no vices; he doesn’t drink or smoke. When I push him, he admits “I don’t know when to stop sometimes. In 1992 I burnt out, my voice gave up on me. I was overtired, so I took time off and adjusted.
“I don’t drive myself so hard now, I take things at my own pace and have a better life balance. I play a bit of golf, I play bridge. My wife says, I’m quite chilled; I don’t flap.”
When she was diagnosed with breast cancer in 2013, Daniel immediately offered to cancel his tour. “Majella said, ‘No. If we stop everything, cancer’s in charge. If we do everything, we are in charge’.”
Mercifully she won her health battle, and the O’Donnells are still in charge.
It wasn’t always that way. Daniel, the youngest of five, grew up poor after his father died of a heart attack when he was six. The family struggled until his eldest sister, Margo, found fame as a showband singer in the early 70s.
Daniel was taking a business studies course at Galway College in 1981, when Margo asked him to be her backing vocalist. In 1983, he released a self-financed single, My Donegal Shore, but success didn’t come overnight.
“It was hard,” he admits. “From 1984 to 86, it wasn’t working. I went to see the label boss and said I don’t think it’s going to work. He said they were getting good reach on the album and I should stick it out. He was right. 1986 was my pinch-me moment. It was like somebody switched on a light. Everywhere we went was packed. It was like a wildfire. I couldn’t believe it.”
Irish pirate radio fuelled his breakthrough. “They were playing all my stuff – maybe because I was young and they were young.”
His set juggled country, Irish songs, and pop standards; his laid-back friendly style recalled Andy Williams.
“I just wanted to sing the songs I loved,” he says. UK audiences loved them too. He graduated from Irish clubs to theatre shows and found new fans, breaking through here in 1988 with his fifth album, From The Heart – the first of twelve albums to go gold in the UK. Seven more went silver.
The Toyota RAV4 will go unchanged for the 2025 model year, with no price or spec adjustments expected.
Nine variants are available across five different trim levels, with a starting price of $42,260 before on-road costs for the front-wheel drive RAV4 Hybrid GX.
All models are powered by a 2.5-litre four-cylinder hybrid drivetrain, after the remaining petrol-only models were discontinued back in June.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
XSE
The Corolla, Corolla Cross, Camry, and Kluger are now also hybrid-only.
RAV4 wait times hovered at four months back in July, and a spike in sales saw 5182 examples delivered in September. To the end of September, the RAV4 has amassed 43,232 sales in 2024.
In terms of sales numbers, the RAV4 sits well clear of the chasing pack in the mid-sized SUV category. The Mitsubishi Outlander comes in second – 21,249 were sold over the first nine months of the year.
Pricing
Model
Price before on-road costs
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid GX FWD
$42,260
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid GX AWD
$45,260
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid GXL FWD
$45,810
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid GXL AWD
$48,810
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid XSE FWD
$48,910
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid Cruiser FWD
$51,410
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid XSE AWD
$51,910
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid Cruiser AWD
$54,410
2024 Toyota RAV4 Hybrid Edge AWD
$58,360
Drivetrains
A 2.5-litre four-cylinder hybrid powertrain is standard across the RAV4 range.
Specifications
Toyota RAV4 Hybrid
Powertrain
2.5-litre four-cylinder hybrid
Torque
221Nm (petrol engine only)
System power
160kW (FWD) 163kW (AWD)
System torque
N/A
Transmission
CVT
Efficiency
Specifications
Toyota RAV4 Hybrid
Fuel consumption (combined)
4.7L/100km (FWD) 4.8L/100km (AWD)
Fuel type
91 RON
Fuel tank capacity
55 litres
Dimensions
Dimensions
Toyota RAV4 Hybrid
Length
4600-4615mm
Width
1855-1865mm
Height
1685-1690mm
Wheelbase
2690mm
Unbraked towing capacity
480kg (FWD) 750kg (AWD)
Braked towing capacity
480kg (FWD) 1500kg (AWD)
Kerb weight
1650-1700kg (FWD) 1705-1760kg (AWD)
It has either 542L of boot space or 580L, depending on the position of the boot floor. Note this is with the space-saver spare equipped, with no figures available with the full-sized spare offered in the GX.
Servicing and Warranty
The RAV4 is backed by a five-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty.
Servicing is required every 12 months or 15,000km, whichever comes first. The first five services are capped at $260 each.
Safety
The RAV4 has a five-star safety rating from ANCAP, based on testing conducted by Euro NCAP in 2019.
It received scores of 93 per cent for adult occupant protection, 89 per cent for child occupant protection, 85 per cent for vulnerable road user protection and 83 per cent for safety assist.
Standard safety equipment includes:
Adaptive cruise control
Autonomous emergency braking
Pedestrian detection
Daytime cyclist detection
Intersection assist
Blind-spot monitoring
Lane-keep assist
Lane Trace Assist (lane centring)
Rear cross-traffic alert
Emergency Steering Assist
Speed sign recognition
Front, front-side and curtain airbags
Driver’s knee airbag
Reversing camera
Front and rear parking sensors
Cruiser and above receive a surround-view camera.
Standard Equipment
The RAV4 is offered in five different trim levels.
RAV4 GX highlights:
17-inch alloy wheels (light grey)
Space-saver spare
Automatic projector LED headlights
Automatic high-beam
LED front fog lights
Rain-sensing wipers
Rear mud flaps
‘Premium’ steering wheel
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel adjustment
7.0-inch instrument cluster screen
8.0-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Wireless Apple CarPlay
Wired Android Auto
Digital radio
Cloth upholstery
Push-button start
Dual-zone climate control
Rear centre armrest
RAV4 GXL adds:
18-inch alloy wheels (dark silver)
Rear privacy glass
Front mudflaps
Roof rails
‘Premium’ gear lever
Proximity entry
Auto-dimming rear-view mirror
Wireless phone charger
RAV4 XSE adds:
18-inch alloy wheels (gloss black)
Power tailgate
SofTex upholstery
Heated front seats
10-way power driver’s seat
12.3-inch digital instrument cluster
10.5-inch touchscreen infotainment system
RAV4 Cruiser adds:
Sunroof
Power-folding exterior mirrors
9-speaker JBL sound system
Leather upholstery
Heated and ventilated front seats
8-way power passenger seat
Driver’s seat memory
Ambient lighting
Digital rear-view mirror
RAV4 Edge adds:
19-inch alloy wheels (matte grey)
SofTex upholstery
4-way manually adjustable passenger seat
*Removes driver seat memory
*Removes power front passenger seat
Colours
Glacier White is the standard paint finish in the RAV4.
2019 Toyota RAV4 lineup shown
The following finishes are available for an extra $675:
Silver Sky
Graphite
Eclipse Black
Atomic Rush (red)
Mineral Blue
Saturn Blue
Frosted White (excludes GX)
The XSE is available only in Mineral Blue, Graphite, Silver Sky and Frosted White, all paired with a black roof. The Edge also has a limited palette, comprising Mineral Blue, Atomic Rush, Eclipse Black, Graphite, and exclusive Jungle Khaki finishes.
All models have a black interior, though the XSE gets blue accents. The Cruiser can be had with optional Nutmeg (beige) leather, while the Edge offers a Orchid Brown and Light Grey Soft interior colour-way.
India’s industrial production contracted mainly due to poor showing by the mining and power generation sectors.
The IIP growth rate for the month of August 2024 is (-) 0.1 per cent, which was 4.7 per cent in the month of July 2024
India’s industrial production contracted 0.1 per cent in August, mainly due to poor showing by the mining and power generation sectors, according to official data released on Friday. The factory output, measured in terms of the Index of Industrial Production (IIP) witnessed a growth of 10.9 per cent in August 2023.
“The IIP growth rate for the month of August 2024 is (-) 0.1 per cent, which was 4.7 per cent in the month of July 2024,” an official statement said.
The data released by the National Statistical Office (NSO) showed that the growth in mining, manufacturing and electricity for August 2024 stood at (-) 4.3 per cent, 01 per cent and (-) 3.7 per cent, respectively.
The decline in growth of the mining sector is likely due to heavy rainfall in August 2024, NSO said.
In April-August this fiscal, the IIP grew 4.2 per cent against 6.2 per cent in the year-ago period.
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – PTI)
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to markets, economy and companies. Having a decade of experi…Read More
The overall cryptocurrency market is experiencing an impressive recovery, amid this former hedge fund manager and host of CNBC’s Mad Money, Jim Cramer made a big call. He recently predicted that Kamala Harris would win the upcoming presidential election and added, “I don’t see how Trump wins.”
Jim Cramer’s Inverse Nature
Following Cramer’s prediction, there is growing optimism in the crypto market, with the community viewing his statement as a positive sign. In the realm of finance, most investors are familiar with the inverse nature of signals typically associated with Jim Cramer.
Despite Cramer predicting that Kamala Harris would win, the market and investors view this as a potential win for Donald Trump. Additionally, this could especially benefit the crypto market, leading to impressive growth as the United States presidential election approaches, with Harris and Trump as the top contenders.
We all know that Trump is pro-crypto, and if wins the forthcoming election there is a high possibility that the crypto market will skyrocket.
Despite this prediction which the industry views inversely, Solana (SOL) the fifth biggest cryptocurrency by market cap appears bullish and is poised for a significant upside rally.
Solana Technical Analysis and Upcoming Level
According to CoinPedia’s technical analysis, SOL appears bullish as it has formed a bullish double-bottom price action pattern on a daily time frame at the crucial support level of $137 and the 200 Exponential Moving Average (EMA). In investing and trading, investors and traders see this pattern as a bullish sign.
Source: Trading View
Based on the recent price momentum, if SOL breaks out from the neckline of the double-bottom price action pattern and closes a daily candle above the $150 level, there is a strong possibility that it could soar by 10% to reach the $165 level in the coming days.
Current Price Momentum
Currently, SOL is trading near $145.7 and has experienced a price surge of over 5.2% in the past 24 hours. During the same period, its trading volume and future open interest increased by 7% and 4.3% respectively. This shows growing participation and interest among traders and investors.
Building the ideal tech stack for content marketing remains a pie-in-the-sky dream for most marketers.
So, we asked the experts presenting at Content Marketing World 2024 which tools should be in those tech stacks but usually aren’t.
As usual, some rejected the premise, offering smart advice about why you should pause before moving forward with a new tool. Others got into specifics about the categories of tools every content marketing team needs.
Combine their tips to form a thoughtful approach to updating your content and martech strategy.
Retro ideas: Don’t buy new martech until you do these things
Before the era of digital marketing technology, marketers had to rely on strategies and other kinds of tools to reach audiences and deliver results to their brands. Some of that work should still happen today, as several experts advised:
Make a measurement plan before investing in new technology
It may not be a tool specifically, but most content marketers lack a measurement strategy and plan. Crafting a measurement strategy and tagging implementation are important steps that help inform future content and marketing decisions as well as optimizations. Marketers need to document business objectives and engagement goals that highlight where and how content is aiding in the customer journey. — Jill Roberson, senior vice president, digital marketing, Velir
Pick up the phone
The one invented by Alexander Graham Bell in 1876. It’s also one that we all carry in our pocket or pocketbook. The prevalence of AI tools in marketing creates an abstraction layer that I fear takes us further away from our customers. So yes, use that telephone and have meaningful conversations to better understand your customers. Getting on Zoom with webcams on is OK, but I prefer old-fashioned audio. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention
Invest in people first
I’d say that many content marketers are probably trying to use too many tools. Instead of adding more tools, I’d take stock of what you’re paying for now and how (if?) you’re using them. If I had additional budget, I’d invest that in talent, either as full-time employees or consultants/contractors. — Michelle Garrett, consultant and writer, Garrett Public Relations
Use your noggin
There are many wonderful tools out there, but I think the biggest tool missing is the brain. With no offense, your client or your business should be as individual as a human. Tools can’t capture the humanness of your brand. — Michael Bonfils, global managing director, Digital International Group
Acquire new tools following this thinking
With your plans in place and your teams well educated, it’s time to tackle the martech tools and categories. Here’s some advice to consider:
Pay for generative AI
Tools are less important than the process. You can have a great process and be successful with no tools. And you can have lots of tools with no process and you won’t be successful.
That said, I think most content marketers are missing paid versions of generative AI tools and training on how to best leverage those to help with their workflows and processes.
This technology can make us so much more efficient and effective, and it’s still not being leveraged by the marketing teams at most of the institutions I work with. — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
Buy for internal comms
An internal communication tool (beyond email/Slack) can organize ideas, concerns, suggestions, etc.
Sometimes the battles that content marketing has in quantifying its value up and down the organization are because of a lack of communication. — Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
Get a keyword research tool (and training)
Every web content marketer needs direct access to a key phrase research tool and knowledge of how to use it. Fewer walls between SEO optimization tools and content marketing execution speed up the build-measure-learn process. — Haley Collins, director of operations, GPO
Choose beyond-basic measurement tech
Marketing tech stacks today are siloed by function. As a result, many content marketers focus on vanity metrics such as downloads, page views, etc. What’s missing are sophisticated measurement tools that don’t just show how many downloads your content has generated but whether the content resonates with your intended audience. Similarly, we need data to capture where and how content is consumed in the customer journey. — Royna Sharifi, senior marketing campaign manager, Amazon Web Services
Unify management
True omnichannel content platforms, rather than simplistic web CMS (content management systems) and DAM (digital asset management) platforms that don’t manage component data, text, and media in a truly object-oriented way. — Tony Byrne, founder, Real Story Group
Get a comprehensive DAM
Many organizations attempt to save costs by using one platform for multiple purposes that may not be intended. Many SaaS vendors are happy to try to sell companies more features or functionalities they might not need or that are not right for them. The one piece of technology that is present in most SaaS platforms but is more of an afterthought than a strategic advantage is digital asset management (DAM). While most project management, social media, and campaign management platforms have a built-in DAM, that does not mean it should be used as a company-wide DAM. Most organizations lack a true, full-featured DAM with the appropriate functionality to manage all their content effectively. — Andi Robinson, content strategist, Hijinx Marketing
Listen to your customers on social media
Many organizations don’t have a tool for social listening or understanding their customer behaviors and preferences, which is crucial for improving their strategy and delivering personalized content. Social media can offer a treasure trove of insights into their customers and what they want to see from their content. Social media also provides a snapshot of the everyday language people use to talk about your topic, including specific pain points, giving color to your qualitative audience research. — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
Invest in listening, despite the cost
Social listening tools! I’m baffled at how expensive social listening tools are — making them harder to access for content marketers without the right financial resources. This may be more of an accessibility issue than a personal one. Still, I feel social listening tools should be made more equitable so all content marketers can benefit from each other’s successes. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
Project management tools to monitor upcycled content
Most content marketers’ tech stack lacks sufficient tools to track the usage and repurposing of content. Digital asset management platforms may do well to store and catalog content but can fall short of tracking its use. Social media platforms typically are a poor place for storing content. To solve this, marketers need tools that allow them to both store and track the use of content so that it is not used once and forgotten. This could be a project management tool that integrates with both DAM and social media distribution platforms. — A. Lee Judge, co-founder and CMO, Content Monsta
Tools for bottom-of-the-funnel insights
Content marketing teams need a tool to easily understand their audiences’ interests, behaviors, activities, and intent signals. With insights like these, they can craft the content their audiences need and crave.
An abundance of content today focuses on top-of-funnel education, but audiences need more. Richer insights into buyer-level intent, interests, and needs allow content marketers to go deeper, understanding why their buyers buy and what challenges or hesitations they face along the way.
This enables content marketers to create content that directly addresses these needs, positioning themselves and their brand as trusted guides throughout the buying journey. — Josh Baez, senior manager, demand generation, NetLine
Seek out SEO research and website intelligence
SEO platforms related to website optimization and intelligence. Without this in their tech stack, it’s extremely hard for content marketers to do the research necessary to improve their content and monitor how it is doing. — Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director, Conductor
Ask for search query trackers
Organic search query tracking dashboards. There are tools that can help you identify the sentiments and search terms surrounding user search, but many organizations don’t use them to their full extent from content ideation to creation and distribution. — Mariah Obiedzinski Tang, assistant vice president of content marketing, Stamats
Keep asking for what may not (yet) exist
The unicorn of marketing remains elusive: true multi-touch attribution. — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
Build a martech stack you’ll really use
Yes, that famous martech diagram now includes 14,000-plus tools. But you don’t need every one of them.
Start building and editing your organization’s martech stack by assessing the resources you have (people, processes, and technology). Then, modify your tech stack to deliver what you need to grow a content marketing program that delivers big results.
All tools noted in the article are mentioned by the source. If you have a tool to suggest, tag Content Marketing Institute or @CMIContent on social media.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
MORE ADVICE FROM CONTENT MARKETING WORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Member of the Prime Minister’s Economic Advisory Council Sanjeev Sanyal to be new Chancellor of Pune based Gokhale Institute of Politics and Economics (GIPE). He will succeed Bibek Debroy, the Chairman of the Economic Advisory Council to the Prime Minister of India.
Debroy quit last month. After that, the Servants Society of India, which manages GIPE, approached Sanyal. In a social media post, Sanyal said “This is just to state that I have accepted the Chancellorship of Gokhale Institute of Politics and Economics, Pune. Look forward to working with faculty, staff and students to build on GIPE’s well-established legacy.”
Further he said that for those uninitiated with the structure of academic administration, the Chancellor of a university is somewhat like a “non-executive chairman” – duties relate to broad direction and governance rather than the daily running of the institution. “This role does not impact my normal work as a full-time member of the Prime Minister’s Economic Advisory Council,” he added.
Debroy was appointed as Chancellor of GIPE, a deemed to be university, in July this year. In an email addressed to Ajit Ranade (Vice Chancellor), who is also an eminent economist, Debroy had said he is standing down from his post with immediate effect. Last month, Ranade was removed from the position of GIPE Vice-Chancellor after a fact-finding committee set up by Debroy found that his appointment violated University Grants Commission (UGC) norms.
Ranade approached the High Court challenging his termination order and got interim relief till September 23. On Thursday, the HC extended the relief, allowing him to remain VC till October 7.
In the email, Debroy congratulated Ranade for getting a stay order and his continuation as VC of GIPE. “You asserted in your writ petition that I had not applied my mind and the stay order vindicates your position,” Debroy stated in the email. Under these circumstances, Debroy noted, he has no moral right to continue in his post. “I am standing down with immediate effect,” he had stated.
Mexico is ready to hit the U.S. where it hurts: Corn.
Mexico is one of the top buyers of American corn in the world today. And Mexican senator Armando Rios Piter, who leads a congressional committee on foreign relations, says he will introduce a bill this week where Mexico will buy corn from Brazil and Argentina instead of the United States.
It’s one of the first signs of potential concrete action from Mexico in response to President Trump’s threats against the country.
“I’m going to send a bill for the corn that we are buying in the Midwest and…change to Brazil or Argentina,” Rios Piter, 43, told told CNN’s Leyla Santiago on Sunday at an anti-Trump protest in Mexico City.
He added: It’s a “good way to tell them that this hostile relationship has consequences, hope that it changes.”
American corn goes into a lot of the country’s food. In Mexico City, from fine dining restaurants to taco stands on the street, corn-based favorites like tacos can be found everywhere.
Related: Mexican farmer’s daughter: NAFTA destroyed us
America is also the world’s largest producer and exporter of corn. American corn shipments to Mexico have catapulted since NAFTA, a free trade deal signed between Mexico, America and Canada.
American farmers sent $2.4 billion of corn to Mexico in 2015, the most recent year of available data. In 1995, the year after NAFTA became law, corn exports to Mexico were a mere $391 million.
Experts say such a bill would be very costly to U.S. farmers.
“If we do indeed see a trade war where Mexico starts buying from Brazil…we’re going to see it affect the corn market and ripple out to the rest of the ag economy,” says Darin Newsom, senior analyst at DTN, an agricultural management firm.
Rios Piter’s bill is another sign of Mexico’s willingness to respond to Trump’s threats. Trump wants to make Mexico pay for a wall on the border, and he’s threatened taxes on Mexican imports ranging from 20% to 35%.
Trump also wants to renegotiate NAFTA. He blames it for a flood of manufacturing jobs to Mexico. A nonpartisan congressional research report found that not to be true.
Related: Mexico doubles down on Trump ‘contingency plan’
Still, Trump says he wants a better trade deal for the American worker — though he hasn’t said what a better deal looks like.
All sides signaled two weeks ago that negotiations would begin in May after a 90-day consultation period.
But Trump says if negotiations don’t bear the deal he wants, he threatens to withdraw from NAFTA.
Such tough talk isn’t received well by Mexican leaders like Rios Piter. He’s not alone. Mexico’s economy minister, Ildefonso Guajardo, said in January Mexico would respond “immediately” to any tariffs from Trump.
“It’s very clear that we have to be prepared to immediately be able to neutralize the impact of a measure of that nature,” Guajardo said Jan. 13 on a Mexican news show.
–Shasta Darlington contributed reporting to this story
CNNMoney (Mexico City) First published February 13, 2017: 12:06 PM ET
In an ideal world, we would all be stocking our cheese boards with only those hunks acquired from a farmers’ market or specialty cheese stores. In the real world, most of us are picking up cheese while doing our regular grocery shopping where the requisite mongers or cheesemakers who might guide us are entirely absent from the proceedings.
This is not a reason to despair, as there is high-quality cheese to be found at the supermarket if you know how to seek it out. “It’s really hard sometimes just to know what exactly a particular cheese is, especially if it’s a generic, plastic-wrapped piece of something you’re not familiar with,” says Hannah Howard, author and cheese educator. “It could be incredibly delicious. It could be incredibly disappointing.”
Read more: How to Find Great Cheese for Cheap
Many excellent cheeses from around the world have the necessary scalability and distribution required to allow them to share shelf space with the shreds and slices that we buy for cooking and sandwich-assembling convenience, however. To start, head away from the basic dairy aisle in your supermarket and over to what I like to call “cheese island,” where the “fancy” stuff is kept. (You know what I’m talking about.) Many excellent grocery stores such as Whole Foods and Kroger have worthy cheese counters, but even conventional grocers without a designated cheese department are guaranteed to have some really good stuff lurking in the selection.
Howard recommends 10 grocery store cheeses that you can always count on: they are as easy to find as they are appropriate to serve to company.
Le Gruyere AOP
La Gruyere is a perfect addition to your next cheese board.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
I’d stake a claim on Le Gruyere AOP being the cheese with the most history, pedigree and care to be routinely available no matter where you shop. Even Trader Joe’s has it. A classic cheese from Switzerland — not to be confused with the generic category that we call “Swiss cheese” — “there is an incredible amount of care, love and attention to detail that goes into every single step of the process for making the cheese, from treating the cows well, to getting the very freshest milk, to the cheesemaking heritage, which has been passed down for over 1000 years,” says Howard. “With Le Gruyere AOP, you can feel completely confident that the flavor, the texture, the caliber and everything that went into making that cheese is of the very highest quality.”
Le Gruyere AOP is also among the most flavorful cheeses available in a grocery store, with its washed rind and raw milk pedigree. (Raw milk cheese is permitted in the U.S. so long as it ages for at least 60 days, so no worries, as Le Gruyere AOP ages for six months or more.) It is also a terrific melter, perfect for all manner of cooked cheese preparations like fondue, grilled cheese, or mac and cheese.
It bears mentioning that the term “Gruyere” here is not enough, as the U.S. government has deemed the term a “generic” one, although those that rightfully favor the real thing would say that there’s nothing generic about Alpine pastured cows and a millennium of precedent. So take care in observing the label: “You want to see that AOP,” says Howard, which indicates it’s actually from Switzerland, “and the ‘le’ is also a good sign.”
Parmigiano Reggiano
Parmigiano Reggiano is called the king of cheese for a reason.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Often deemed the “king of cheese” by those in the know, Parmigiano Reggiano is another selection that is broadly available, but that must be sought by its official name. The term “parmesan” was developed to get around name-protected restrictions, and anything labeled as such is a far cry from the real thing.
“‘Parmesan’ in the supermarket could be anything at all,” says Howard, “whereas, you know that Parmigiano Reggiano is crafted in the Emilia Romagna region of Italy. It’s a very different cheese than Le Gruyere AOP, but like it, there is a dedicated consortium that is committed to honoring every single step of the process so that nothing gets stamped with that label that isn’t incredibly high quality,” she says.
You can typically find the real thing next to the parmesan shreds and powders. Even if it’s shrink-wrapped and cut into uniform pieces, so long as it’s called Parmigiano Reggiano you’re getting the good stuff. Full of crunchy crystals and flavor that brings forward pineapple notes, it isn’t just for cooking or shaving on top of pasta — put some chunks of Parmigiano Reggiano on your grazing cheese board and people will invariably ask “wait, what is this?”
Fromager D’Affinois Le Fromager
The best brie in your supermarket isn’t actually brie.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
The best brie available in your supermarket doesn’t have the word “brie” anywhere on the packaging. That’s because brie isn’t a category of cheese, only one player in what is known to cheese people as the “bloomy rind” game, and conventional, supermarket brie bears little resemblance in either flavor or texture to the real, French thing. So be wary of anything that is actually labeled “brie,” and steer yourself toward those that look like brie, but aren’t.
Enter Fromager D’Affinois Le Fromager. (Don’t worry about the pronunciation. You can just tell everyone it’s brie.) An ultrafiltration process and custom cultures ensure a cheese that is both extra creamy and much fuller in flavor than industrial bries. Fromager d’Affinois cheeses are pasteurized according to U.S. regulations (real French brie is not, by the way), but “you still get a lot of nuance and depth of flavor that you would from raw milk cheeses,” says Howard.
Plus it’s a “double cream” cheese, meaning that extra cream is added to the base milk for richness. “With all that butterfat content, it’s going to be luxurious,” says Howard, and will actually ooze as it comes to room temperature, which a lot of industrial bries won’t. “If you put it out at a party, it’s going to disappear quickly, and it’s going to be a hit.”
St. Agur Blue
Real blue cheese like Saint Agur’s easy-to-find offering is dense, creamy, sweet and just a little spicy
Pamela Vachon/CNET
In this country, we are usually introduced to blue cheese in its saddest forms: conventional crumbles or bottled salad dressing, so it’s no wonder that many of us believe we don’t like it. Every blue cheese is different — there’s a blue for you, I swear it — real blue cheese is dense, creamy, sweet and just a little spicy or pungent from its blue veining.
Still not convinced? Try St. Agur, a blue cheese from France that enjoys wide distribution due to its large-scale production, but still exhibits artisanal qualities and is about as likable as blue cheese gets. “If you’re a blue cheese skeptic, I think this is a cheese that could convert you,” says Howard.
Like Fromager D’Affinois above, St. Agur is also a double cream cheese, with the additional cream adding to the cheese’s richness and semi-sweet flavor. Even if you’re not snacking on it but are simply looking for a salad crumble, it’s better to go with the real thing and do the (minor) work yourself. “Grating a lot of harder cheese might take some time, but crumbling a creamy blue cheese is super easy,” says Howard.
Chevre
Tangy chevre cheese can be found in any grocery store in the US.
Pamela Vachon
A log of fresh goat cheese is always a good find from your supermarket. I didn’t name a brand here; because of its fresh and inexpensive nature, you may be able to find a good, relatively local brand in your supermarket wherever you are shopping. Vermont Creamery is a great choice on the East Coast, and Laura Chenel — the first lady of goat cheese in the U.S. — is excellent on the West. Trader Joe’s carries one of my absolute favorites, a goat cheese log with an herb blend known as fine herbs. (Looks like “fine,” but is French, and therefore “feen.”)
“Chevre is always very pretty on a cheese plate or a salad with its snow-white color from the goat’s milk, and it has this beautiful, tangy quality that sets it apart and just lends some personality and zing to whatever it touches,” says Howard. “And it is very versatile in the kitchen. It’s a great way to kind of spruce up a flatbread or a pasta with minimal effort.”
It also happens to be a great value, and can often be found in the neighborhood of just three dollars, for those who lament the price of cheese when it comes to buying the quality stuff.
Cabot Clothbound Cheddar
Cabot Clothbound is a premier cheddar with mass market distribution.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Cheddar is the second-most consumed cheese in the U.S. — mozzarella is the first, owing to our love of pizza — but few of us know it in its true, original nature. Cheddar wasn’t born yellow in shrink-wrapped packages. If you’re not yet hip to “clothbound” or “bandaged-wrapped” cheddars, prepare for a mind-blowing experience of flavor and texture.
“It’s exactly how it sounds,” says Howard. “It is literally bound in a cloth and wrapped up,” which preserves its moisture, especially when rubbed with oil or lard during the aging process. “It is a kind of alchemy of maturation, where the flavors develop in a specific way,” she says, “and it’s a tradition from English cheddar that also is about 1000 years old, and it creates this beautiful crumbly texture, and approachable but complex flavor as the cheese ages.” Think hazelnuts and horseradish.
Cabot is one of the first families of U.S. cheesemaking, and its Clothbound Cheddar is a sharp and savory marvel. Before “girl dinner” there was “ploughman’s lunch,” where a robust cheddar of this kind was served with a hunk of bread, some mustard and ale to wash it down with. Can we please make this a hashtag?
Manchego
You can’t go wrong with a block of salty manchego.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
You already know you love Manchego, but do you know why? “When I worked at a wine and cheese bar, we would always joke that everybody asked for Manchego,” says Howard. “I think it’s a lot of people’s gateway into fancy cheese, and it’s really delicious.”
The good news is that Manchego isn’t an industrial cheese hiding in fancy cheese’s clothing. It happens to be an expertly crafted, carefully protected cheese that is Spain’s number one export, so we happen to have a lot of it available. You’ll recognize it from its basket-weave-looking rind. While baskets are no longer used in the aging of Manchego, it’s a nod to its historical pedigree.
“I think what’s so appealing about it is that it’s made with sheep milk from La Mancha sheep in central Spain, and sheep’s milk has more fat and more protein than cow’s milk, so it’s extra rich and extra full of delicious flavor,” says Howard. “It’s both approachable, but a little bit unexpected and outside of what you might eat every day.”
Pro tip: if the Manchego on your cheese board starts to sweat, this is a good thing, not a red flag. Due to the high fat content of sheep’s milk cheese, it’s just the fat globules liquefying as the cheese comes to room temp, and it indicates that the cheese is at a good temperature for serving to enjoy its maximum flavor.
Humboldt Fog
Blue cheese is polarizing but you can find this excellent version at most grocery stores.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Cypress Grove is one of America’s first artisanal cheesemakers, beginning in 1983. It was purchased by Emmi in 2010, one of the larger cheese distributors in the U.S., but that just means more of us get to enjoy it, but its cheeses are still crafted with care and creativity.
Humboldt Fog is a stunner and one that you can even find in your typical supermarket. More than just a fresh goat’s milk cheese, it’s got a delicate bloomy rind and a sexy stripe of ash to show off.
“Humboldt Fog is one of the first original American artisan cheeses, inspired by the fog that comes in in the morning in Humboldt County, California where it was created,” says Howard. “Some people think the ash stripe that bisects it is blue, but it is vegetable ash, so it doesn’t affect the taste of the cheese, but it does create a very beautiful presentation for a cheese board.” (This was also one of three American cheeses that were served to the President of France at a State dinner in Washington D.C. French/American relations remain secure so that’s saying something.)
Even those who don’t love goat cheese can’t resist its look. “A lot of people are hesitant about goat cheese,” says Howard, “and I find this a goat cheese that can win over even goat cheese skeptics.”
Midnight Moon
Midnight Moon is available at most major supermarkets.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Midnight Moon was my personal conversion cheese, where the lightbulb went off that some cheeses were better than the conventional ones I had grown up consuming. (Those are still good, and I still love them.) Another selection from Cypress Grove, imagine my ongoing joy that I don’t even have to go to the fancy supermarket in my neighborhood in order to acquire some Midnight Moon, which is sitting in the case not far from my childhood cheeses.
“When I worked behind a cheese counter, if we didn’t know what to give someone, Midnight Moon was always the sure bet,” says Howard. “People loved it, cheese newbies and cheese connoisseurs alike,” she says. “It has the sweetness that comes from the Gouda process and cultures, and then it’s aged for six months or longer, so it has those delicious crunchy tyrosine crystals, and then it’s a goat milk cheese, which is really unexpected.”
Sartori Bellavitano
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Wisconsin is America’s dairy state, so it fits that a Wisconsin cheese is one of the best supermarket cheeses you can find. Sartori Bellavitano is a cheese that behaves like equal parts of parm and gouda, bringing a salty sweetness to the occasion. It also comes in a number of flavors and styles to suit myriad tastes.
“If you want to be playful on a cheese board and introduce a beautifully colored rind, or just something that stands out they have a bunch of flavors,” says Howard, including selections that are wine-soaked, studded with herbs or peppercorns, or rubbed with espresso. “It’s kind of eye catching and a good conversation starter, but it’s also a high bar of quality for a industrial produced cheese, and is consistent and delicious.”
You have reached your maximum number of articles. Log in or create an account FREE of charge to continue reading.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Just as no two cancers are the same, treatment isn’t one-size-fits-all — and for one Arizona mother and teacher, personalized chemotherapy became the path to survival.
Tammy Morrow, 55, had been healthy for decades when, after seeing a doctor for what she thought was a stomach bug in December 2023, she was blindsided by a diagnosis of stage 4 metastatic breast cancer.
The cancer had spread to her bones, lymph nodes, liver and other areas, she told Fox News Digital. It became evident fairly quickly that her disease was beyond the scope of traditional treatments.
CHEMOTHERAPY DRUG COULD HAVE A SERIOUS AND SURPRISING SIDE EFFECT, STUDY FINDS
“I received one round of traditional chemo in the hospital,” said Morrow, who lives in Phoenix, Arizona. “After just the one treatment, all of my hair fell out within just eight days.”
Tammy Morrow, center, is pictured with her two sons, Gabriel and Izaak Morrow. “I am persuaded that I would not be alive today if I had not received care at Envita,” she told Fox News Digital.(Derek Morrow)
“The rapid hair loss demonstrates the systemic nature and toxicity of traditional chemo,” she added.
Morrow’s oncologist told her that she likely only had months to live, but she was determined to find another alternative.
Through her research, she found Envita Medical Center in Scottsdale, which offers a novel cancer treatment called Genetically Targeted Fractionated Chemotherapy (GTFC).
HALF OF CANCER DEATHS COULD HAVE BEEN PREVENTED THROUGH LIFESTYLE CHANGES, SAYS AMERICAN CANCER SOCIETY REPORT
“When I arrived at Envita, I was not taking in food orally, and for almost three months, I had to receive all of my nutrition from a catheter delivered directly into my veins,” Morrow said.
She began receiving GTFC treatments, which she credits as “essential to survival.”
“In just 21 weeks, my diagnosis changed from terminal to normal.”
“I am persuaded that I would not be alive today if I had not received care at Envita,” Morrow told Fox News Digital.
“Now, I am thriving.”
BREAST CANCER SIGNS, SYMPTOMS TO LOOK OUT FOR, PLUS WHEN TO SCHEDULE ROUTINE SCREENING
Morrow’s last several blood tests have shown no evidence of disease, and her most recent PET scan in May confirmed that she is cancer-free.
“In just 21 weeks, my diagnosis changed from terminal to normal,” she said.
Making it personal
Genetically targeted fractionated chemotherapy (GTFC) is a targeted approach to cancer treatment that personalizes chemotherapy based on a patient’s genetic makeup and specific tumor biology, according to Dr. John Oertle, chief medical director at Envita Medical Centers.
Tammy Morrow is pictured with her husband, Derek Morrow, before her diagnosis.(Tammy Morrow)
“This method also enhances the tumor’s ability to absorb the chemotherapy, allowing us to use reduced dosages while maintaining effectiveness,” Oertle, who specializes in “individualized, outcome-based care models for chronic disease and integrative oncology,” told Fox News Digital.
GTFC is designed to deliver medicine with more precision while having fewer side effects, he noted.
BREAST CANCER DIAGNOSES SPIKING AMONG WOMEN UNDER 50, NEW REPORT REVEALS
“Conventional chemotherapy targets all rapidly dividing cells, both cancerous and healthy, using high doses, which often leads to widespread side effects,” Oertle said.
“Additionally, we have found that 90% of patients on conventional chemotherapy are dealing with cancer that has already become resistant to it.”
Morrow had been healthy for decades when, after seeing a doctor for what she thought was a stomach bug in December 2023, she was blindsided by a diagnosis of stage 4 metastatic breast cancer.(Tammy Morrow)
GTFC is designed to specifically target cancer cells with genetic mutations, he said, so that more chemo gets into the tumor.
“While only 5% to 7% of conventional chemotherapy administered through an IV typically reaches the tumor, GTFC significantly improves this uptake,” Oertle said.
“As a result, we can reduce the overall dosage and administer treatment more frequently.”
“Not only are these specific treatments resulting in better outcomes, they are less harmful as well.”
Fox News medical contributor Dr. Nicole Saphier, who is not associated with Envita, referred to GTFC as “the future of cancer treatment.”
“Historically, we depended on traditional chemotherapy to kill cancer cells,” she told Fox News Digital.
“Unfortunately, traditional chemotherapy isn’t very specific, so while it killed cancer cells, it also killed healthy cells.”
In the midst of cancer treatments, as she began losing her hair, Morrow had a friend give her a haircut.(Tammy Morrow)
Because of this limitation, traditional chemo can have “severe” short-term and long-term side effects, Saphier confirmed.
“GTFC is a targeted therapy, which is a type of cancer treatment that’s designed to attack cancer cells while leaving healthy cells alone,” she went on.
“Not only are these specific treatments resulting in better outcomes, they are less harmful as well.”
THESE 17 CANCER TYPES ARE MORE COMMON IN GEN X AND MILLENNIALS, AS STUDY NOTES ‘ALARMING TREND’
While there are some possible side effects with GTFC, they are “significantly fewer” than with traditional chemo, Oertle said.
“Many patients are even able to maintain their hair,” he added.
Morrow, seen here with a few of her fitness friends at the gym, was an avid health and wellness enthusiast before getting diagnosed.(Tammy Morrow)
In Morrow’s case, she said her side effects were “minimal,” even after receiving GTFC chemo treatments once or twice every week for 21 weeks.
Her main side effects were weakness and digestive issues for a day or two after the treatment.
NOVEL CANCER TREATMENT OFFERS NEW HOPE WHEN CHEMO AND RADIATION FAIL: ‘BIG CHANGE IN PEOPLE’S LIVES’
“I was even able to work full-time during my treatment,” she said. “On a couple of occasions, I virtually attended work meetings while receiving the chemo treatments.”
Who can get GTFC?
In addition to breast cancer, GTFC can be an option for any type of cancer that needs systemic therapy, according to Oertle.
“For early-stage cancers, we utilize advanced blood tests to ensure that the disease has not spread,” he said.
“I pray that one day, I will have the money to help others receive care at Envita,” Morrow said.(Tammy Morrow)
“If the cancer remains localized, we offer other precision-based, less invasive treatments that may eliminate the need for GTFC. However, for cancers that have spread beyond the initial tumor, GTFC may be an effective treatment option.”
“Most people simply cannot afford to pay for this type of medical care.”
There are some barriers to receiving this type of chemo, however.
“It is very difficult to receive this care because no insurance company in America will cover the advanced and targeted integrated care Envita offers,” Morrow told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“Even though the chemotherapy drugs I received at Envita are a part of the normal medical protocol, because the method of delivering these chemotherapy drugs is not normal, my insurance company refused to cover any of it.”
While there are some possible side effects with GTFC, they are “significantly fewer” than with traditional chemo, an expert said.(iStock)
Morrow paid nearly $250,000 out of pocket for her chemo treatments.
“Most people simply cannot afford to pay for this type of medical care — and I could not have afforded it, either,” she said.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
To cover the cost, Morrow’s two sons started a GoFundMe and raised almost $120,000, and Morrow and her husband took out a second mortgage to cover the rest.
“I would encourage people to not let the cost prevent them from seeking out this innovative and life-saving approach to cancer care,” Morrow urged.
In addition to breast cancer, GTFC can be an option for any type of cancer that needs systemic therapy.(iStock)
“I pray that one day, I will have the money to help others receive care at Envita. In the meantime, my husband and I have two guest bedrooms waiting to be filled by out-of-town patients.”
Envita includes the below disclaimer on its website.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“Disclaimer: Individual results will vary. Envita makes no guarantees for outcomes. Each patient’s case is unique. Please consult your doctor before making any changes to your medical treatment. Not every patient is a candidate for care or achieves these results. Treatments used in this case may not all be FDA-approved for the treatment of this condition.”
Fox News Digital reached out to the FDA requesting comment.
Food and festivals are like two sides of the same coin, one is incomplete without the other. With Navratri celebrations underway, everyone has indulged in the joy of the festive spirit. Our favourite Bollywood celebrities are also making the most of this season. For proof, head straight to Vicky Kaushal’s latest Instagram Stories. The actor shared a picture of his special Ashtami meal which was all thing sugar, spice and everything nice. On the menu, there was a crispy-flakey poori served with sukha kala chana (boiled black chickpeas). For dessert, Vicky treated his taste buds to delicious suji ka halwa. Along with the post, the star wished his fans a “Happy Ashtami”.
Vicky Kaushal seems to have a soft spot for sweets, especially homemade ones. Back in August, the actor uploaded a snap on his social media feed. It featured a bowl brimming with home-cooked seviyan (vermicelli). The milk-slathered vermicelli was topped with dry fruits for some crunch. Guess who prepared the lip-smacking dish? It was Vicky’s mother Veena Kaushal. “Maa ke haath ki seviyan,” read the side note. Read on to know more.
Just like all of us, Vicky Kaushal is also a fan of street food. The actor allows himself a cheat meal once in a blue moon. On another page of his food diaries, Vicky was seen savouring paani puri. He could not hold back his excitement after enjoying the desi snack “after months”. In his caption, Vicky wrote, “Cheat meal after months!!! Had to be paani puri…Ro dunga aaj (I will cry now).” We totally get it, Vicky! Tagging his friend Akshay Arora to the post, he said, “Love you.” Here’s the full story.
Before that, Vicky Kaushal gave in to his sugar cravings by having a plate of peanut butter toast. Oh, there was a half-eaten chocolate bar too. He expressed his fondness for the sweet treats by adding a heart illustration. Full story here.
Chinese Premier Li Qiang said in Vientiane on Thursday that facing an international situation intertwined with changes and chaos, China and Japan should strive to maintain a sound and steady development of bilateral relations, which is of great significance to both countries, the region and the world at large.
In his meeting with Japanese Prime Minister Shigeru Ishiba, Li also noted that China-Japan relations are at a critical stage of improvement and development.
As Chinese President Xi Jinping said in his congratulatory message to Ishiba, it serves the fundamental interests of the two peoples of both sides to walk on a road of peaceful coexistence, everlasting friendship, mutually beneficial cooperation and common development, Li said.
Li expressed his hope that the two sides will meet each other halfway, continuously consolidate political mutual trust, strengthen dialogue and cooperation, and strive to build a constructive and stable China-Japan relationship that meets the requirements of the new era to better benefit the two peoples.
The information is current and up-to-date in accordance with the latest veterinarian research.
Learn more »
Our pets are a wonderful source of affection, companionship, entertainment, and stress relief, but they can also make us worry. Despite the many steps we take and the measures we put in place to make sure we are giving our cats the very best care, there will always be illnesses that are completely out of our control, and cancer continues to be one of them.
There are several types of cancer that can affect our feline companions, and basal cell tumors are one of the most common skin tumors in cats. The good news is that more than 90% of these are benign.
Let’s take a closer look at basal cell tumors in cats, including how to recognize them and how they are treated.
What Is a Basal Cell Tumor?
A tumor is an abnormal growth of cells, with the type of tumor determined by the type of cells involved. Why tumors form is still not fully understood, but once they begin, the abnormal cells continue to grow and replicate. Some are limited to a single, contained area, also known as benign tumors. Meanwhile, malignant tumors (cancer) invade surrounding tissues and structures and may spread (metastasize) to different parts of the body through the blood or lymphatic system.
Basal cell tumors form from the basal cell layer of the epidermis. In most cases, these tumors are benign and do not grow beyond the basal cell layer in the area where they started. In approximately 10% of cases, the tumor will grow and replicate beyond the basal cell layer and into the surrounding tissues. This is known as malignant basal cell carcinoma (BCC).
Where Are the Signs of a Basal Cell Tumor?
Although basal cell tumors can grow anywhere on the skin, they are most common on the head, neck, and shoulders. They can range from 0.4 inches to over 4 inches in diameter and are usually firm, raised, hairless, or may develop from a stalk.
BCC lesions are not usually raised but appear as irritated, ulcerated lesions on the head, neck, or legs. Although BCCs will grow and spread into the surrounding skin, they do not tend to metastasize.
What Causes Basal Cell Tumors?
We do not fully understand how or why basal cell tumors form. There may be several predisposing factors, including viral infections, age, genetics, sun exposure, and breed. Long and medium-haired cats, such as Persians, Himalayan, and Angoras, have a higher incidence of basal cell tumors compared with other breeds.
Image Credit: Eleanor McDonie, Shutterstock
How Are Basal Cell Tumors Diagnosed?
Depending on the size and location of the growth, a diagnosis may be made using:
Fine-needle aspirate: A small number of cells are taken from the mass using a needle and examined under a microscope.
Incisional biopsy: A section of the tumor is removed using a scalpel or biopsy punch, and sent for histopathological examination (examining thin sections of tissue under a microscope).
Excisional biopsy: The entire tumor is removed surgically and sent for histopathological examination.
If the tumor is found to be a malignant BCC, your vet may recommend further investigations, such as blood tests, imaging, and lymph node biopsies, to check whether the tumor has spread.
How Is a Basal Cell Tumor Treated?
Small, benign basal cell tumors may be monitored and only removed if they undergo rapid growth or changes in appearance. Cryosurgery may be used to remove very small tumors.
Surgical removal is the treatment of choice for malignant basal cell carcinomas. If the BCC is in a location where surgical removal is not possible or likely to be successful, radiation therapy or chemotherapy can be used.
Basal cell carcinomas have a high treatment success rate.
Frequently Asked Questions
What Is the Prognosis for a Cat With Basal Cell Tumor or Carcinoma?
For cats with basal cell tumors, the prognosis is excellent. Even those with malignant BCC have a very good prognosis due to the low rate of malignancy of this type of tumor. However, left untreated, they can cause pain, suffering, and possibly spread, so removal of BCCs is always recommended.
Image Credit: Maria Sbytova, Shutterstock
What’s the Difference Between a Basal Cell Carcinoma and a Squamous Cell Carcinoma?
As the name suggests, squamous cell carcinoma (SCC) originates from the squamous layer of the epidermis, which is thicker and more superficial than the basal layer. Unlike BCC, SCC is an aggressive, invasive, and sometimes metastatic tumor. They commonly occur on the face and ears, particularly in white or light-pigmented skin. They are also a common oral tumor in cats. There is no recognized benign form of SCC in cats.
What Should I Do if My Cat Makes Their Basal Cell Tumor Bleed?
If your cat has a benign basal cell tumor, they may occasionally knock or scratch the lesion and make it bleed. While this is no immediate cause for concern, if this happens repeatedly, it can increase their risk of infection, and removal of the mass should be considered.
Conclusion
Basal cell tumors are the common skin tumors of cats and dogs, with less than 10% being malignant. In the case of basal cell carcinoma, early detection and treatment have a high success rate, so it is important to have any new lump, bump, or growth checked by your vet. The smaller the growth, the easier it is to remove.
Real estate developer Puravankara recorded an 18 per cent uptick posting ₹1,331 crore in sales for the second quarter of FY25, compared to ₹1,128 crore in Q1FY25. The company’s cumulative sales value reached ₹2,459 crore in H1FY25.
Customer collections grew by 18 per cent year-on-year (y-o-y), rising to ₹1,033 crore in Q2FY25 up from ₹879 crore in Q2FY24. In the first half of FY25, the collections surged by 27 per cent to₹1,998 crore, compared to ₹1,575 crore in the same period last year.
“In the first half, we witnessed sustained traction across our portfolio and continued to replenish our land bank by acquiring over 5.75 msft of saleable area in Mumbai, Bengaluru and Goa with a total potential GDV of around ₹10,000 crore plus in this financial year,” said Ashish Puravankara, Managing Director, Puravankara Ltd.
New launches
Puravankara has over 12 msft of new launches for the second half of the financial year with a potential GDV of over ₹13,000 crore, added Ashish.
The company reported a 9 per cent increase in average price realisation, reaching ₹8,697 per sq ft, up from ₹7,947 per sq ft in the year-ago period, said the company.
In addition, Puravankara expanded its footprint in Lokhandwala, Andheri West, adding a new cluster of four societies. This expansion brings a potential GDV of ₹700 crore, increasing the total land area in the region to approximately 4.3 acres with a combined GDV of ₹2,350 crore for the project.
Furthermore, the company signed a Joint Development Agreement (JDA) for a 1.95-acre land parcel at a prime location in the Electronics City micro-market, adjacent to the Purva Westend project, which has a saleable area of 2.6 lakh sq ft with a potential GDV of ₹250 crore.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
KATE MIDDLETON, princeza od Walesa, već je dugi niz godina simbol ljepote i elegancije. Njezin bezvremenski modni stil i profinjen izgled inspirirali su mnoge, koji se često ugledaju na njezine modne i beauty odabire.
Interes za njezine beauty tajne nije iznenađujući, a mnogima su posebno zanimljivi parfemi koje nosi. Na društvenim mrežama, osobito na TikToku, brojni korisnici raspravljaju o njezinom prepoznatljivom mirisu, o kojem je prije nekoliko godina pisao i časopis Harper’s Bazaar.
Njezin omiljeni parfem, Jo Malone Orange Blossom, lagan je i osvježavajući citrusni miris, koji se idealno uklapa u njezin sofisticirani stil. S gornjim notama cvijeta mandarine, srednjim notama bijelog jorgovana i baznim notama vetivera, ovaj parfem donosi svježinu koja podsjeća na procvat citrusnih stabala.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Citrusni mirisi su ove jeseni i zime ponovno u trendu
Nije iznenađenje da je Jo Malone Orange Blossom sastavni dio Kateine beauty rutine. Lagani i osvježavajući, ovaj miris savršeno se uklapa u njezin elegantan, ali nenametljiv stil, čineći ga idealnim odabirom za sve prilike.
Zanimljivo je primijetiti da, unatoč tome što bi mogla birati skuplje, luksuznije ili niche parfeme, Kate ostaje vjerna ovom parfemu. S cijenom između 70 i 150 eura, Jo Malone Orange Blossom je relativno pristupačan u svijetu luksuznih parfema, a svakako povoljan s obzirom na kraljevske standarde.
Citrusni mirisi, poput onih naranče i mandarine, ponovno su u trendu 2024. godine. Ovi svježi i živahni mirisi, koji donose osjećaj osvježenja, sada su omiljeni ne samo tijekom ljeta, već i u zimskim mjesecima, dajući energiju i podižući raspoloženje. Ako u svojoj kolekciji još nemate citrusni parfem, možda će vam se upravo svidjeti onaj koji bira Kate.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
As Woody Marks weighed his football future last winter, Darren Myles was frank with his former running back. His body of work, he told Marks, was an incomplete picture of the player Myles knew he could be. Four seasons at Mississippi State, playing in Mike Leach’s pass-happy Air Raid offense, proved Marks could catch passes out of the backfield. But he was typecast in the eyes of NFL scouts as a third-down, change-of-pace player, incapable of carrying the load as a bruising back running between the tackles.
His high school coach knew better than that. Myles had seen it during four years at Carver High in Atlanta. He watched as Marks stepped in as the starter before his first game as a freshman, taking the place of a senior who missed practice and never relinquishing the role.
During 43 games at Carver, Marks carried the offense on his back, toting the ball 614 times for 10 yards per carry. As a sophomore, he tallied 13 consecutive 100-yard games. As a senior, he scored 23 touchdowns. Never did he catch more than a pass or two per game.
So the notion that Marks was pigeonholed as a pass catcher or seen as anything less than a three-down workhorse didn’t sit well with Myles. His advice? Find an offense where you could prove who you are.
Marks seems to have found that and then some at USC, where he’s already established himself as one of the Big Ten’s most complete backs. Through five games, Marks has carried the ball 81 times, sixth most of any running back in the conference. At his current pace — more than 16 per game — he’s likely to break his career high in carries before the end of October.
That hasn’t precluded him from being a pass catcher, either. Marks is third on the team in catches with 19, just two fewer than the Trojans’ top two receivers.
“He’s been exactly what we’d hoped he’d be at this point,” coach Lincoln Riley said.
That feeling, his mother says, is mutual.
“He looks just like he did in high school,” Tameka Marks said. “He’s showcasing it again, what he didn’t get to showcase the last four years at Mississippi State — that he can actually run!”
USC running back Woody Marks runs through Utah State safety Jordan Vincent to score a touchdown at the Coliseum on Sept. 7.
(Allen J. Schaben / Los Angeles Times)
Myles knew that to be true before Marks made it to high school. He was only 13 years old, still in the eighth grade, and weighed barely 155 pounds, but Myles, a former running back himself, could see Marks was a natural. He had the vision, the quickness, the instincts. Most of all, he was fearless. Even at his size, there wasn’t a tentative bone in his body.
After four practices, Myles approached Tameka to tell her Woody probably would factor into the varsity roster as a freshman. By the first week of football season the following fall, Marks already was the focal point of Carver’s offense. The promotion had come after the senior incumbent missed a mandatory practice during fall break. Marks ran for 145 yards and two touchdowns in his stead.
“Right away, I moved that kid to slot receiver,” Myles said. “Like, you’re gonna back up Woody Marks now.”
Marks averaged 12 yards per carry as a freshman, yet was limited to fewer than 10 carries per game as Myles spread the ball around in Carver’s offense. But by the end of that season, Myles said, Marks had mastered the zone-run concepts at the heart of his offense, and as a sophomore, he exploded for 2,127 yards in 13 games.
USC running back Woody Marks celebrates after scoring the winning touchdown against LSU on Sept. 1.
(Robert Gauthier / Los Angeles Times)
By then, Myles knew he could lean on Marks, if needed. He rarely received more than 20 carries in a game, but in consecutive playoff wins over Jones High and Flowery Branch, Marks put the offense on his back, tallying more than 200 yards rushing.
“Once he got past the linebacker, it was over,” Myles said. “You talk about having a running back with wide receiver speed. Once he gets to the second level, he’s gone. You’re not catching him.”
Offers rolled in from across the country — everywhere, it seemed, but Georgia, the local college football power, whose staff had asked Myles if Marks would consider changing to slot receiver.
“It bothered him,” Myles said. “But it motivated him to work even harder.”
And with more work, Myles trusted Marks even more to carry them.
During one game, as a senior, Carver lost its quarterback to a hip-pointer injury. With only an inexperienced freshman left at the position, Myles pivoted to run the entire offense through Marks.
For the second half, nearly every play went through the running back, who even lined up for some direct snaps as a wildcat quarterback. By then, the defense knew what was coming most plays. Inside zone. Outside zone. Inside zone. And on and on.
“They were stacking the box,” Myles said. “It didn’t matter.”
USC running back Woody Marks drags LSU safety Dashawn Spears into the end zone for a touchdown on Sept. 1.
(Robert Gauthier / Los Angeles Times)
Marks committed to Mississippi State about eight months before the coach he committed to, Joe Moorhead, was fired. Into his place stepped Leach, whose reputation for largely ignoring the run preceded him. The family weighed whether Marks would be better suited elsewhere. But he’d already made his pledge. He stuck with it.
And over four years at Mississippi State, three of which were under Leach, Marks never rushed for more than 582 yards in a season. In 45 games, he received more than a dozen carries just eight times and only twice ran for more than 100 yards.
Losing Leach, who died suddenly in late 2022, only muddied Marks’ role. He considered transferring but ultimately chose to stay in Starkville. Then a hamstring injury late in the 2023 season sapped Marks of his usual burst.
If not for the injury, he might’ve declared for the draft right then, his mother said. Prospective agents told them he’d be picked in the middle rounds, perhaps as high as the third. But they wondered if another year, in the right offense, might alter that trajectory.
Several schools had the same thought, among them Georgia, which apparently had gotten over its hang-ups about Marks’ size. But the fit with Riley, an Air Raid protege of Leach, felt seamless. Marks already was familiar with most of the offense’s zone-run concepts.
“He’s been doing those things since he was 13 years old,” Myles said.
It’s no wonder then that his impact at USC has been so instantaneous. Marks already has more 100-yard games (three) at USC than he did in all of his time at Mississippi State. And as defenses have tried to take away dynamic plays downfield, he’s been called upon even more, having touched the ball 47 times over the last two games.
“Everything [Riley] told us about how he would use him,” Tameka said, “we’re seeing it every game.”
Marks’ role actually could stand to grow from here, with Big Ten defenses daring Riley to run, sure to follow a similar blueprint to what worked for Minnesota last Saturday. Marks was on his way to a career day until the final 11 minutes, when he didn’t touch the ball a single time.
Nonetheless, there’s no doubt at USC that it has a three-down back at its disposal, one capable of grinding away Big Ten games in a way it desperately will need down the stretch.
Though, Marks isn’t sure he’s lived up to that just billing yet.
“I really think I haven’t proven a lot,” Marks said. “We hold ourselves to a higher standard. We’re going to get to that.”
Realme PI Speed Launch Date in India: With the Reame P1 Speed set to launch on October 15, the company has officially revealed some of its key specifications, such as the MediaTek Dimensity 7300 Energy chipset, which is a capable processor for its segment. Let’s take a brief look at the officially disclosed features of the device.
Realme PI Speed: Design and Display
The Realme P1 Speed will have a thickness of 7.6mm and feature dual speakers. It will sport an OLED “Esports Display” with a 92.65 per cent screen-to-body ratio. The display will support 90 FPS gaming for specific games. With a refresh rate of up to 120Hz, the display is expected to be smooth and dynamic. The phone will be compatible with Bluetooth 5.4, Wi-Fi 6, and an IP65 rating for dust and water resistance.
Realme PI Speed: Camera
The Realme PI Speed will come with a 50MP AI triple camera set-up, with a flashlight visible in the camera panel. Further details about the other sensors are yet to be revealed.
Realme PI Speed: Processor
Powered by the Dimensity 7300 Energy and carrying the tagline ‘legend of chipsets’, the device is expected to perform well in day-to-day usage. On performance benchmarks, the processor is claimed to perform well, which is a good proposition for the segment it belongs to.
Realme PI Speed: Memory
The device will be available with up to 26GB RAM (including virtual RAM) and 256GB of internal storage. According to the company, the Realme PI Speed can keep 32 apps active in memory at the same time.
Realme PI Speed: Battery
The smartphone will be packed with a 5,000mAh battery, supported by 45W charging.
Realme PI Speed: Other features
The company claims that the Realme P1 Speed will be TuV-SUD-rated, promising a seamless gaming experience. Additionally, it will offer a Voice Changer feature to enhance the gaming experience and an AI eye protection feature that adjusts brightness and colour tones automatically.
Florida theme parks including Walt Disney World, Universal Orlando and SeaWorld planned to reopen Friday after an assessment of the effects of Hurricane Milton.
Guests weather early bands of rain from Hurricane Milton at the Magic Kingdom at Walt Disney World in Bay Lake, Florida. All four of Disney’s Florida theme parks closed early Wednesday due to the forecast track of the storm. (Photo by Joe Burbank/Orlando Sentinel via AP)
Some Halloween special events won’t be offered and they won’t necessarily be fully functioning Friday, but the public is welcome back, the parks said in statements.
As Milton came ashore as a major storm Wednesday, all three Orlando-based parks shut down, putting a damper on the vacations of tens of thousands of tourists, many of whom hunkered down in hotels. Disney World, Universal and SeaWorld were all closed for at least part of Wednesday and all of Thursday.
Orlando International Airport, Florida’s busiest, planned to resume domestic arrivals on Thursday and departures Friday after mostly shutting down Wednesday.
The airport’s closure prevented Simon Forster, his wife and their two children from returning to Scotland, so they enjoyed an extra two days of their two-week vacation on the bustling International Drive in Orlando’s tourism district on Thursday. Hurricanes seem to follow them since two years ago Hurricane Ian kept them from returning to Scotland after another Orlando vacation.
“Last night, it was quite intense, Forster said. “I was watching the palm trees sway back and forth outside my hotel room. How they didn’t come down, I don’t know. Scary stuff.”
Their hotel at Universal Orlando Resort had a party atmosphere Wednesday night ahead of Milton’s arrival.
“The bar was good fun,” he said. “Two extra days here, there are are worst places we could be.”
In Tampa, the animals were safe at popular tourist attractions ZooTampa and The Florida Aquarium, which were aiming to reopen Saturday.
The 1,000 animals at the zoo will remain in their night houses and hurricane shelter locations while habitats are cleared of debris, a spokesperson said. The aquarium also confirmed their animals are “doing well.”
“Our buildings weathered the storm well, as did our animals,” Roger German, president and CEO of the aquarium said in a Thursday news release.
The zoo sustained some damage from the high winds and does not have power, and the spokesperson anticipates the debris cleanup and restoration, which is already underway, will take a few days.
In Orlando, miniature golf was among the few activities available to tourists who had been locked down in their hotel rooms and rental condos with the parks closed. There was a line getting into Congo River Golf on International Drive.
Craig Greig of Glasgow, Scotland, would have been at the Magic Kingdom with his wife and 10-year-old if the theme parks had been open. Instead he was clutching a putter ready to putt golf balls over a man made lagoon filled with baby alligators.
“We just wanted to stretch our legs and get out of the hotel,” he said. “Especially for the little one.” He slept through the night as the hurricane, his first, roared through central Florida.
Disney World, Universal and other attractions make Orlando the United States’ most visited destination, drawing 74 million tourists last year alone.
And Halloween-related celebrations have made October one of the busiest and most lucrative stretches.
Hurricanes in the Orlando area are uncommon but not unheard of. Three crossed the area in 2004 – Charley, Frances and Jeanne, and Hurricane Ian caused some flooding as it plowed through as a downgraded tropical storm in 2022.
Stereophonics are planning on taking 2025 by force. The British rockers – who are best known for Dakota, Maybe Tomorrow, All In One Night and other bangers – have just confirmed a seven-date stadium tour kicking off in summer 2025.
The stars will be hitting some incredible venues along the way, as well. This includes the likes of London’s Finsbury Park, Glasgow’s Bellahouston Park, Cardiff’s Principality Stadium, and plenty more.
Each of these shows promises to be even more spectacular than the last… but as a result, fans sold out many of the tickets straight away, after they were released on Friday, October 11, 2024, at 9:30am.
As a result, fans have since been looking at resale websites to secure their spot at the upcoming tour.
Below we’ve got the full list of websites where you can buy tickets right now.
These are sure to be an incredible set of shows for the British band – but don’t take our word for it.
Stereophonics frontman Kelly Jones said: “Being on the road again with my best friends, playing all the hits of this band’s catalogue, for people in huge outdoor gatherings through the summer of 2025 makes me so excited, we should make a new album… oh wait… we already did that! See ya there for more good times… TUNE!!! TUNE!!! TUNE!!” (sic)
If resale markets are not what you feel comfortable using, however, there may still be ticket opportunities on official sellers.
Kia Australia has confirmed its all-new and all-electric EV5 SUV will start from $56,770 drive-away when it arrives in showrooms later this month – see below for the full price list.
Three trim levels will be available from launch – Air, Earth and GT-Line – with the latter arriving in December. Further, two battery options will be offered depending on variant, as will single-motor and dual-motor drivetrains.
As with other Kia models, the EV5 has been subjected to an “an extensive local ride and handling program to ensure it is suitable for Australia’s unique road conditions”.
All grades will feature dual 12.3-inch displays incorporating the digital instrument cluster and touchscreen infotainment system, with the brand’s latest ccNC interface offering Kia Connect online and remote services and over the air (OTA) software updates. A 5.0-inch bridging segment houses the climate controls.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Available features higher up in the range will include a power tailgate (Earth, GT-Line); heated and cooled storage (GT-Line); a fingerprint scanner module (GT-Line), an augmented reality (AR) head-up display (GT-Line); and Remote Smart Park Assist 2 (GT-Line).
The brand’s suite of driver assistance and active safety features will also be available, with the semi-autonomous Highway Driving Assist 2.0 (HDA) confirmed to be standard across the range, as will a front-centre airbag.
The flagship GT-Line will also boast Kia’s Blind Spot View Monitor camera system.
Kia Australia has confirmed a “variety of exterior colours” will be offered across the range, with the GT-Line also offering exclusive two-tone options.
The mid-spec Earth will also offer a secondary interior colourway beyond just Smoky Black, with a Nougat Beige leatherette confirmed as an option – though tied to Tide Blue, Shale Grey and Starry Night Black exterior colours.
Full specification details will be revealed closer to launch – stay tuned to CarExpert for all the latest, and share your thoughts with us in the comments below!
Pricing
Model
Price before on-roads
Drive-away pricing
2025 Kia EV5 Air 2WD Standard Range
$56,770
$56,770
2025 Kia EV5 Air 2WD Long Range
$61,170
$63,990
2025 Kia EV5 Earth AWD Long Range
$64,770
$68,990
2025 Kia EV5 GT-Line AWD Long Range
$71,770
$75,990
Drivetrains and Efficiency
Model
EV5 Air 2WD Standard Range
EV5 Air 2WD Long Range
EV5 Earth AWD Long Range
EV5 GT-Line AWD Long Range
Battery
64.2kWh
88.1kWh
88.1kWh
88.1kWh
Powertrain
Single motor
Single motor
Dual motor
Dual motor
Outputs
160kW + 310Nm
160kW + 310Nm
230kW + 480Nm
230kW + 480Nm
Wheels
18-inch alloy
18-inch alloy
19-inch alloy
20-inch alloy
WLTP range
400km
555km
500km
470km
Note: CarExpert understands the EV5 uses lithium iron phosphate (LFP) batteries sourced from BYD. We are awaiting official confirmation from Kia Australia that both Standard and Long Range versions feature the same chemistry.
India’s reserve position with the IMF was down by $35 million to $4.352 billion.
For the week ended October 4, foreign currency assets, a major component of the reserves, decreased by $3.511 billion to $612.643 billion, showed the RBI data released on Friday.
India’s forex reserves dropped by USD 3.709 billion to USD 701.176 billion for the week ended October 4, the RBI said on Friday. In the previous reporting week, the reserves had jumped by USD 12.588 billion to an all-time high of USD 704.885 billion.
For the week ended October 4, foreign currency assets, a major component of the reserves, decreased by USD 3.511 billion to USD 612.643 billion, the data released on Friday showed.
Expressed in terms of dollar, the foreign currency assets include the effect of appreciation or depreciation of non-US units like the euro, pound and yen held in the foreign exchange reserves.
Gold reserves decreased by USD 40 million to USD 65.756 billion during the week, the RBI said.
The Special Drawing Rights (SDRs) were down by USD 123 million to USD 18.425 billion, the apex bank said.
India’s reserve position with the IMF was down by USD 35 million to USD 4.352 billion in the reporting week, the apex bank data showed.
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – PTI)
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to markets, economy and companies. Having a decade of experi…Read More
In 2021, Shiba Inu price experienced an astronomical rise, becoming one of the most talked about cryptocurrencies of the year. Starting from a nearly negligible value of $0.0000000001, Shiba Inu (SHIB) surged to a high of $0.00008 representing an unbelievable return for early investors. An analyst has predicted this AI token, WallitlQ (WLTQ), could follow in Shiba Inu’s (SHIB) footsteps.
WallitlQ (WLTQ) To Match Shiba Inu Price Rally
A prominent analyst has predicted AI Token, WallitlQ (WLTQ) will enjoy an unprecedented price gain from its presale matching the Shiba Inu price rally in 2021. This AI Token is positioned to disrupt the market thanks to its impressive technology and user-focused design.
While Shiba Inu (SHIB) succeeded largely due to meme culture and market momentum, the analyst says this new token, powered by AI, brings advanced functionality and utility to the table. Fundamentally, WallitlQ (WLTQ) uses machine learning and artificial intelligence algorithms to provide holders with real-time insights, such as predictive market analysis, risk assessments, and portfolio optimization.
What makes this even more appealing is its easy interaction with Decentralized Finance (DeFi). WallitlQ (WLTQ) integrates with various DeFi services, like staking, yield farming, and liquidity provision, empowering users to maximize returns while reducing risks through AI-driven insights. In essence, it automates difficult decisions, making DeFi more accessible and simpler to use—even for beginners.
Furthermore, the analyst also stated that this AI token provides users with an affordable option for paying transaction fees, which eliminates the need to convert other cryptocurrencies for transaction charges. Using WallitQ (WLTQ) to settle costs also entitles users to future discounts, making it a more cost-effective option. This smooth integration improves the overall user experience, providing both convenience and savings.
WallitlQ (WLTQ) also introduced its own multilingual chatbot. WallitIQ’s (WLTQ) AI chatbot is your 24/7 support buddy, ensuring you have assistance whenever you need it. Whether you’re setting up your wallet, making transactions, or troubleshooting any hiccups, this friendly chatbot delivers instant help to keep everything running smoothly.
Another exciting feature of WallitlQ (WLTQ) that encompasses its impressive utility is its Scan & Pay QR feature. Rather than manually inputting wallet addresses or dealing with complicated transaction steps, users can simply scan a QR code to complete their payment in seconds. This user-friendly solution not only speeds up transactions but also amplifies security.
The analyst stated that this AI token represents a significant evolution within the cryptocurrency space, changing from the usual meme coins’ speculative nature. WallitlQ (WLTQ) is distinguished by its value, with innovation and utility at its core.
The Shiba Inu price at the start of 2021 was $0.0000000001, which began a rally to $0.00008, knocking out five ‘zeros’ in 12 months. The Shiba Inu price rise occurred during a broader crypto bull run in 2021 when the entire market saw massive inflows of retail and institutional investment.
Key factors, including the growing popularity of meme coins and token burns, fueled Shiba Inu’s (SHIB) incredible rise. The strong, active community behind the coin was also crucial in the price growth.
However, Shiba Inu’s (SHIB) utility at the time was minimal—it was primarily a token with speculative appeal, though it did later introduce features like its decentralized exchange, ShibaSwap.
The analyst’s prediction for this AI token mimics the Shiba Inu price rise but believes that fundamental utility, powered by modern technology, can drive value in a similar, if not more significant, way.
Conclusion
With strong parallels in market sentiment, the influence of a dedicated community, and the major differentiator of actual utility, the analyst is confident that the WallitIQ (WLTQ) AI token is positioned to experience a rise similar to the Shiba Inu price success while potentially being more sustainable in the long run.
With the WallitlQ (WLTQ) presale, this is an opportunity to be a part of a redefining technology while making massive gains as an investor.
All this fragmentation of content consumption takes people out of shared media and cultural experiences and puts them into echo chambers, which makes it tough for new content experiences to break through. Almost every viral, popular, or culturally resonant breakout seems like an accident — content lightning in a bottle.
Successful marketers follow the same memo. They understand fragmentation’s implications on paid advertising, search marketing, social media, and owned media.
So, how do you innovate on fragmented terrain?
Where do you focus that hard-earned marketing budget in a world where reaching your consumers feels a bit like playing Dungeons and Dragons? You know, when you awake in the early morning among the failed remnants of your competitors’ content marketing campaigns. You have content to create. What do you do?
We took that question to Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor. Read on or watch for his take:
See a full content experience like Progressive and Lenovo
Over the last couple of months, I’ve talked a lot about moving your content experiences to the edge. In this article and a subsequent webinar, I discussed the trend in content and marketing of delivering valuable content experiences in their entirety beyond your website.
As much as I found it annoying, I said it was the oxygen in the room. You’ve got to focus more on designing the experiences on your “rented land properties.” That’s content at the edges. It puts increased pressure on making your owned media experiences even more valuable, such as making that FAQ with the special, you-can’t-get-it-anywhere-but-here content.
This week, Digiday made that point in a discussion on the fragmentation in marketing and media consumption: “Brand marketers are increasingly more receptive to alternative advertising options to reach consumers.”
While Digiday refers to these options as “non-traditional formats,” you know them better as content marketing efforts.
The article references the Are We Becoming Our Parents? campaign from Progressive.
Its wonderful fictional counselor, Dr. Rick (played by Bill Glass), has appeared as a guest on the Hot Ones, the popular YouTube series where the hosts interview celebrities as they eat increasingly spicy hot wings.
Digiday also talks about the Pop-Tarts Bowl, the college football bowl game that originated last season and returns on Dec. 28, as a wonderful example of a differentiated owned-media approach.
But back to the Digiday article. The kicker for me was two quotes from Evan Giordano, a strategist at the creative and ad agency Mother New York. “You can’t rely on advertising around a piece of culture anymore and expect that anyone and everyone will see it,” he said.
Eric followed that up with the approach to alternative formats “is pretty liberating because your creative team and your strategist have to think like product people; they have to conceptualize the outside of traditional formats.”
Yes, that’s long been the focus of how content marketers can build value in today’s world. I devote a module to thinking like a product manager in my content marketing strategy class.
In any event, the heart of these trends in alternative formats involves doing interesting, out-of-the-box experiences and delivering them on specially designed platforms at the edges and your owned media.
Here’s my question for you: As you plan for 2025, can you plan swing-for-the-fences, content-driven experience products? You can design them for YouTube, other social media, your owned media, or all of the above.
Think about what you can do that goes beyond another year of incrementally getting one more spot higher in search, decreasing your cost per lead by 5%, or testing a hundred button shapes and colors to bump conversion rates by 2%.
Those expected goals are important, no doubt. But maybe in a world of fragmentation, you can try something that’s not so, well, piecemeal.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
America is great because of its willingness to accept talented immigrants.
That’s what Nandan Nilekani, the billionaire co-founder of Infosys Technologies, would tell President Trump if he had the opportunity.
“If you really want to keep the U.S. … globally competitive, you should be open to overseas talent,” Nilekani said on the sidelines of CNN’s Asia Business Forum in Bangalore.
Infosys(INFY) is India’s second-largest outsourcing firm, and a major recipient of U.S. H-1B visas. The documents allow the tech firm to employ a huge number of Indians in U.S. jobs.
The Trump administration is now considering significant changes to the visa program. Press Secretary Sean Spicer said in January that Trump will continue to talk about reforming the H-1B program, among others, as part of a larger push for immigration reform.
Curbs on the visas could hit Indian workers hardest.
India is the top source of high-skilled labor for the U.S. tech industry. According to U.S. government data, 70% of the hugely popular H-1B visas go to Indians.
Shares in several Indian tech companies — including Infosys — plunged spectacularly two weeks ago amid reports of an impending work visa crackdown.
Related: Tech industry braces for Trump’s visa reform
Nilekani said it would be a mistake for the administration to follow through.
“Indian companies have done a great deal to help U.S. companies become more competitive, and I think that should continue,” Nilekani said. “If you look at the Silicon Valley … most of the companies have an immigrant founder.”
India’s contribution to the industry — especially at top levels — has been outsized. The current CEOs of Google(GOOG) and Microsoft(MSFT), for example, were both born in India.
Related: India freaks out over U.S. plans to change high-skilled visas
But Nilekani, who is also the architect of India’s ambitious biometric ID program, suggested that India would ultimately benefit from any new restrictions put in place under Trump’s “America First” plan. If talented engineers can’t go to the U.S., they will stay in India.
“This issue of visas has always come up in the U.S. every few years, especially during election season,” he said. “It’s actually accelerated the development work [in India], because … people are investing more to do the work here.”
Nilekani cited his own projects for the Indian government as an example.
The Bangalore-born entrepreneur left Infosys in 2009 to run India’s massive social security program, which is known as Aadhaar. As a result of the initiative, the vast majority of India’s 1.3 billion citizens now have a biometric ID number that allows them to receive government services, execute bank transactions and even make biometric payments.
“It was built by extremely talented and committed Indians,” Nilekani said. “Many of them had global experience, but they brought that talent and experience to solve India’s problems.”
Nilekani said the country’s massive youth population is increasingly choosing to stay home and pitch in.
“It’s India first,” he said.
CNNMoney (Bangalore, India) First published February 13, 2017: 2:19 PM ET
The Indian Institute of Technology Madras (IIT Madras) has launched a new research lab focused on Quantitative Finance. AlphaGrep Securities, a quantitative trading and investment firm, is providing CSR Funding of ₹5.65 crore towards the establishment of this lab.
The lab will conduct exploratory research projects in AI for quantitative finance, including research in financial markets and its microstructure, quantitative investment management and quantitative risk management.
The key outcomes envisaged from this Research Centre include exploratory projects on applying frontier AI techniques to quantitative finance; training programmes for different stakeholders in this space; focused courses for students on AI for quantitative finance and development of data sets and other resources to enable research, says a release.
V Kamakoti, Director, IIT Madras, said, three decades before, the financial institutions were predominantly run by their legal group, the next decade by their finance/audit group and currently by the Information Technology group. The time is ripe now to look at how AI can be used for effective and efficient conduct of business of these institutions. The proposed lab will be precisely addressing this issue.
Mohit Mutreja, Chairman and Managing Director, AlphaGrep Securities, said, the lab aims to nurture collaboration between faculty members of IIT Madras, and staff at AlphaGrep, and provide advanced resources and mentorship to IIT Madras students, enabling ground breaking research and development in these cutting-edge fields.
Apple has joined an industry group devoted to wireless charging, strengthening existing rumors that the next iPhone will charge without a cord. The Wireless Power Consortium, which is made up of some 200 organizations that promote a single wireless charging standard, confirmed to CNNTech that Apple joined the group last week.
IPhone rumors swirl months before each new version is announced, and hype around the so-called ‘iPhone 8″ is particularly high: Apple(AAPL) is expected to unveil a major redesign of the this fall to mark the 10-year anniversary of the smartphone.
The company has already shown interest in doing away with cumbersome cords. The Apple Watch charges wirelessly, provided consumers spend $79 on a magnetic charging dock. And the latest MacBook now comes with only one USB port.
Related: Apple stock nears a record high
Apple would also create another iPhone revenue stream by selling a wireless charging station separately. The feature would simplify charging for smartphone owners. Rather than plugging in one’s phone, a user would only need to place it on the charging dock.
Apple said in a statement Monday it was joining the Wireless Power Consortium to contribute its ideas as wireless charging standards are developed.
As for the speculated possible features of the next iPhone, other rumors include an edge-to-edge display, a glass body and the removal of the home button.
CNNMoney (Washington) First published February 13, 2017: 2:42 PM ET
iHerb는 시장 경쟁력 있는 가격으로 다양한 제품을 제공하는 가장 크고 인기 있는 건강 및 웰빙 온라인 쇼핑 웹사이트 중 하나입니다. 이 회사는 또한 빠른 배송, 쉬운 반품, 안전한 온라인 결제 방법 및 유용한 고객 지원을 제공하여 고객을 완벽하게 만족시킵니다. 이 브랜드에 충성하고 다른 사람에게 추천하는 건강을 의식하는 사람들의 거대한 커뮤니티가 있습니다.
이 회사는 다양한 보충제, 스포츠 영양제, 허브, 뷰티 아이템, 어린이용 제품 및 식료품을 보유하고 있습니다. 그 외에도 다양한 비건, 글루텐 프리, 유제품 프리 및 유기농 제품을 보유하고 있습니다. 보충제에는 비오틴, 마그네슘, 크릴 오일, 생선 오일, 종합 비타민, 아미노산, 프로바이오틱스, 글루코사민 등이 있습니다. 이 웹사이트는 또한 케토제닉 다이어트와 같이 특정 건강 요구 사항을 충족하도록 설계된 여러 가지 특별 카테고리를 제공합니다.
신규 및 기존 고객이 필요에 맞는 최상의 제품을 쉽게 찾을 수 있도록 iHerb는 다양한 제품 체험 상품을 제공합니다. 이러한 딜을 통해 고객은 최소 $1의 가격으로 체험하고 싶은 제품을 구매할 수 있으며, 제품을 계속 사용할지 여부를 결정하기 전에 제품을 검토할 수 있는 기회를 제공합니다. 이 회사는 California Gold Nutrition, Yumearth, Sympli Beautiful, Radiant Seoul을 포함한 최고 브랜드의 다양한 체험 제품을 제공합니다.
생선기름 보충제에 대한 iHerb 할인 코드를 찾을 수 있나요?
귀하와 같은 것에 관심이 있는 친구가 있다면 iHerb에 추천하여 첫 주문 시 5% 할인을 받을 수 있습니다. 이 회사의 친구 추천 제도는 아는 사람에게 좋아하는 제품에 대한 할인을 제공하는 좋은 방법이며, 다음 구매 시 사용할 수 있는 보상 크레딧도 적립할 수 있습니다.
iHerb는 또한 고객이 주문 시 큰 금액을 절약할 수 있는 기회를 제공하는 주간 딜을 제공합니다. 이러한 딜은 일반적으로 10% 이상 할인된 제품을 혼합하여 제공하며, 매주 다른 품목이 제공됩니다. 이 사이트는 매주 수요일에 주간 특가를 업데이트하며, iHerb 웹사이트의 주간 특가 페이지를 방문하면 찾을 수 있습니다.
iHerb는 정기 세일 할인 외에도 신규 및 기존 고객을 위한 추가 프로모션 코드를 자주 제공합니다. 이러한 코드는 일반적으로 제한된 기간 동안만 유효하며 iHerb 웹사이트의 오른쪽 상단에 있는 바구니 아이콘을 클릭한 다음 비용 세부 정보 위에 나타나는 할인 상자에 코드를 입력하여 체크아웃 시 구매에 적용할 수 있습니다. iHerb에서는 주문당 쿠폰을 하나만 적용할 수 있으므로 올바른 쿠폰을 선택해야 합니다. 코드가 적용되면 새 총액이 카트 페이지에 표시됩니다. 그런 다음 체크아웃 프로세스를 진행할 수 있습니다. iHerb 웹사이트는 모든 주요 결제 방법을 허용하며 개인 정보와 보안을 보장하기 위해 안전한 암호화 프로세스를 갖추고 있습니다.
가족을 돌보든, 학위를 마치든, 개인적인 일에 집중하기 위해 근무 시간을 줄여야 하든, 고소득 파트타임 일자리가 도움이 될 수 있습니다. 이러한 옵션은 새로운 관심사를 키우고 유연한 일정의 자유를 누릴 수 있는 기회도 제공할 수 있습니다.
여성은 성평등을 달성하고 리더십 직책을 확보하는 데 큰 진전을 이루었지만, LinkedIn의 최근 연구에 따르면 2023년에는 이사 이상 직책에 채용된 여성의 수가 감소했고 2024년 첫 달에는 더욱 감소했습니다. 이러한 역전은 고용 결정에 영향을 미칠 수 있는 노동 시장의 긴축과 같은 경제적 요인으로 인해 발생했을 가능성이 높거나, 여성이 과거보다 리더십 역할을 맡는 데 덜 열의를 가지고 있음을 나타낼 수 있습니다.
이에 따라 여성은 관심사를 추구하고 삶의 균형을 이룰 수 있는 유연한 일정의 파트타임 일자리를 찾고 있습니다. 그리고 좋은 소식은 여성들이 유연성을 제공할 뿐만 아니라 상당한 재정적 보상을 제공하는 일자리를 찾고 있다는 것입니다. AARP에 따르면 2024년 가장 인기 있는 여성 파트타임 직업은 부동산 중개인으로, 적절한 기술과 경험이 있는 사람에게는 매우 수익성이 좋은 직업입니다. 부동산 산업은 지역 부동산 시장에 대한 이해와 인맥이 필요합니다. 또한 강력한 대인 관계 기술이 필요한데, 이는 종종 여성의 인생 경험과 광범위한 관계에 의해 강화됩니다.
2024년 가장 인기 있는 여성 파트타임 일자리는?
50세 이상 여성에게 수익성이 좋은 또 다른 직업은 개인 요리사입니다. 이 직업은 유연한 일정과 자영업을 하거나 고급 가정에서 일할 수 있는 능력을 제공합니다. 또한 광범위한 요리 교육을 받았거나 요리에 열정적인 여성에게 매우 적합합니다.
튜터링은 다른 사람과 지식을 공유하고자 하는 여성에게 또 다른 보람 있는 기회입니다. 이러한 유형의 직업의 유연성 덕분에 학생들의 학습 요구와 일정에 맞게 세션을 조정할 수 있습니다. 여성은 학문 분야에서 음악이나 언어에 이르기까지 광범위한 과목을 튜터링할 수 있습니다.
커리큘럼 개발자는 교육에 대한 열정이 있고 젊은이들의 삶에 변화를 주고 싶어하는 여성을 위한 또 다른 보람 있는 직업 옵션입니다. 학습 방법론과 주제 전문성에 대한 이해를 바탕으로 다양한 학습자에게 관련성 있고 효과적인 매력적인 콘텐츠를 만들 수 있습니다. 이는 2024년에 여성이 할 수 있는 많은 고소득 및 유연한 파트타임 일자리 중 일부에 불과합니다. 더 많은 기회를 탐색하려면 기술과 관심사를 평가하여 목표를 달성할 파트타임 직업을 발견하세요.
베팅 요건이 없는 것은 상금을 걸지 않고 온라인 카지노 게임을 즐길 수 있는 가장 좋은 방법 중 하나입니다. 또한 언제든지 실제 돈 잔액을 인출할 수 있다는 의미이기도 합니다. 그럼에도 불구하고 단점이 없는 것은 아니며 플레이어는 약관을 주의 깊게 읽어 작동 방식을 이해해야 합니다.
베팅 요건은 상금을 인출하기 전에 보너스를 통해 플레이해야 하는 횟수를 알려줍니다. 이는 카지노 프로모션의 중요한 부분이며 카지노는 이를 사용하여 남용을 방지하고 공정한 게임 플레이를 보장합니다. 대부분의 보너스에는 베팅 요건이 있지만 몇 가지 예외도 있습니다.
베팅 요건이 없는 카지노는 플레이스루 조건이 없는 슬롯을 제공하는 웹사이트입니다. 이는 일반적으로 더 작은 보너스이며 종종 무료 스핀의 형태로 제공되지만 다른 유형의 프로모션의 형태일 수도 있습니다.
베팅이 없는 슬롯 사이트를 찾는 방법은 여러 가지가 있지만 신뢰할 수 있는 기관에서 유효한 도박 양보를 받은 라이선스가 있는 사이트만 선택해야 합니다. 이렇게 하면 이러한 카지노가 법을 준수하고 개인 데이터를 보호한다는 것을 확신할 수 있습니다. 또한, 상금을 빠르게 인출할 수 있는 신뢰할 수 있는 은행 옵션이 있는 카지노만 선택해야 합니다.
베팅 요구 사항이 없는 온라인 슬롯
무배팅 입금 보너스를 제공하는 카지노는 꽤 많지만, 자신에게 맞는 카지노를 찾는 것이 중요합니다. 최소 입금 요건이 낮고 업계에서 좋은 평판을 가진 카지노를 찾아야 합니다. 또한, 카지노가 신뢰할 수 있는 관할권에서 규제되고 안전한 암호화를 사용하여 민감한 정보를 보호하는지 확인하세요.
낮은 배팅 요건을 갖춘 무배팅 카지노를 최대한 활용하려면 높은 환급 비율과 많은 스릴을 제공하는 슬롯 게임도 선택해야 합니다. 가장 인기 있는 게임으로는 Book of Dead, Starburst, Gonzo’s Quest가 있습니다. 이들은 캐주얼 플레이어와 진지한 플레이어 모두에게 좋은 선택입니다.
네, 무배팅 슬롯을 제공하는 온라인 슬롯 사이트는 많이 있습니다. “무배팅 슬롯” 또는 “무배팅 슬롯 사이트”로 검색하면 찾을 수 있습니다. 또한 각 사이트의 이용 약관을 확인하여 선호 사항을 충족하는지 확인해야 합니다.
올바른 슬롯 게임을 선택하는 것은 승리를 극대화하고 손실을 줄이는 데 도움이 되기 때문에 중요합니다. 각 슬롯 머신의 규칙을 읽고 작동 방식을 이해하면 됩니다. 게다가, 무료 버전의 게임에서 재미로 플레이하여 기술을 연습할 수도 있습니다. 이렇게 하면 실제 돈을 걸고 플레이하기 전에 규칙을 배우고 전략을 연습할 수 있습니다. 또한, 너무 많이 잃지 않으려면 항상 적당히 플레이해야 합니다. 실제 돈을 걸고 플레이하는 것은 중독성이 있을 수 있고 손실에 대한 한계를 정하는 것이 중요하기 때문입니다.
The Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024 is here with unbeatable discounts on top luggage brands! If you’re planning a trip soon, now is the perfect time to upgrade your travel gear. With up to 85% off on luggage from popular brands like Skybags, Mokobara, American Tourister, and more, you’ll find stylish and durable options at fantastic prices.
Grab a new luggage this Amazon Sale 2024 for your next travel.
During the Amazon Diwali Sale, explore deals on Skybags, known for trendy and sturdy designs, or grab a premium deal on Mokobara luggage for a sleek and modern touch. If you prefer trusted brands like American Tourister, don’t miss out on those too!
The Amazon sale deals this year are offering something for everyone, making it the perfect opportunity to get high-quality luggage at a fraction of the cost. Hurry and make the most of these incredible luggage deals during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024!
Get ready for your next adventure with the Kamiliant by American Tourister Harrier 2 Pc Set in Iron Grey, now available at an incredible 83% discount during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024! This trusted luggage brand offers durability and style, with a boxy shape for maximum volume and 360-degree smooth rolling wheels. The set includes both 55 cm and 68 cm hard-sided spinner bags made from lightweight and sturdy polypropylene, ensuring lasting performance. With retractable handles, a 3-digit fixed combination lock, and cross ribbons for organized packing, it’s perfect for any trip.
Specifications of Kamiliant by American Tourister Harrier 2 Pc Set
Lock type: Combination Lock
Material: Polypropylene
Wheels: 4 spinner wheels
Weight: 5100 grams
Water-resistant
Size: Small (55 cm) & Medium (68 cm)
Travel in style with the American Tourister Liftoff 79 cm Large Check-in Luggage, now available at an impressive 62% discount during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024! This spacious 95.5-litre suitcase is perfect for long trips, featuring a tough polypropylene hard shell that’s impact-resistant and water-resistant. With 360° spinner wheels and an 8-wheel double spinner design, you’ll enjoy smooth and effortless mobility. The fixed 3-digit combination lock ensures added security, while the fully lined interior with tie-down straps keeps your belongings organised.
Specifications of American Tourister Liftoff 79 cm Large Check-in Luggage
Volume: 95.5 litres
Lock type: Combination Lock
Material: Polypropylene
Weight: 3500 grams
Wheels: 8 spinner wheels
Warranty: 3-year global warranty
Upgrade your travel gear with the Safari Thorium Neo 55 cm Cabin Trolley Bag, now available at a massive 77% discount during the Amazon Sale 2024! Made from durable polycarbonate, this lightweight trolley is scratch-resistant and built to last. Its 360-degree wheeling system with 8 wheels ensures smooth manoeuvrability, making travel effortless. The sleek black design with contrast beading gives it a premium look, and the fixed combination lock provides added security. Perfect for carry-on, this suitcase meets most domestic airline size requirements.
Specifications of Safari Thorium Neo 55 cm Cabin Trolley Bag
Material: Polycarbonate
Lock type: Combination Lock
Weight: 3 kg
Wheels: 8 spinner wheels
Dimensions: 55x40x23 cm
Warranty: 5 years
Also read: Amazon Great Indian Festival 2024 is LIVE for Everyone: Don’t miss out—shop now!
Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024: Best deals on luggage from American Tourister
The American Tourister Ivy 68 cm Medium Hardside Suitcase, is available now at a fantastic 67% discount during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024! Crafted from durable polypropylene, this suitcase is dent-resistant, ensuring it withstands rough handling on your journeys. The recessed TSA lock provides secure access for airport inspections without damage. Its chic colour-matched components in vibrant Spring Green add a stylish touch, setting you apart from the crowd. Enjoy worry-free adventures with a 3-year global warranty with this amazing luggage deal in the Amazon Sale 2024!
Specifications of American Tourister Ivy 68 cm Medium Hardside Suitcase
Material: Polypropylene
Lock type: Recessed TSA lock
Weight: 4820 grams
Wheels: 4 spinner wheels
Dimensions: 68x47x26 cm
Warranty: 3 years
Amazon Great Indian festival Sale 2024: Explore deals on luggage like never before.
Travel effortlessly with the Skybags Trooper 55 cm Small Cabin Trolley Bag, now at an amazing 66% discount during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024! This stylish luggage piece is made from durable and scratch-resistant ABS material, ensuring it is both lightweight and waterproof. With a storage volume of 31.3 litres, it features multiple compartments and compression straps for efficient packing. The suitcase is equipped with smooth 360-degree wheels and an adjustable handle for easy manoeuvring. For added security, it includes a 3-digit resettable combination lock.
Specifications of Skybags Trooper 55 cm Small Cabin Trolley Bag
Material: Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS)
Lock type: Combination Lock
Weight: 2450 grams
Wheels: 4 spinner wheels
Dimensions: 55x38x21 cm
Warranty: 5 years
Also read: Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024: From appliances to home decor, here’s what you can gift on Diwali
This lightweight and durable trolley bag features a robust polypropylene outer material, ensuring it withstands the rigours of travel. With a storage volume of 32 litres, it offers ample space with multiple compartments and compression straps for efficient packing. The smooth 360-degree dual wheels and adjustable trolley handle provide easy manoeuvrability. For added security, it comes with a combination lock to keep your belongings safe. Plus, it boasts a 7-year warranty against manufacturer defects, ensuring you can travel worry-free.
Also read: Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale LIVE: Top deals on fitness equipment; shop for treadmills, cycles, walking pads
Best deals on luggage from Mokobara: Amazon Sale 2024
Available for an incredible 80% off during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024, this cabin luggage is both stylish and functional. Crafted from durable, unbreakable polycarbonate, it protects your belongings against bumps and impacts. With a generous storage volume of 40 litres, it features a TSA lock for added security and smooth 360-degree movement thanks to its 8 silent ninja wheels, making airport navigation effortless. The aviation-grade telescope handle ensures easy handling, while the premium gloss finish adds a touch of elegance.
Specifications of MOKOBARA The Transit Luggage German Makrolon Poly-Carbonate
Material: Polycarbonate
Lock Type: TSA Lock
Weight: 3.1 kg
Wheels: 8 silent spinner wheels
Dimensions: 51 x 30 x 74 cm
Warranty: 3 years
The KENNETH COLE Reaction Out of Bounds 20″ Spinner Carry-On Luggage is available for a fantastic 76% off during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024! This carry-on features a sleek Rose Gold finish, perfect for both men and women. With a compact storage volume of 20 litres and lightweight design (weighing just 2.72 kg), it meets airline regulations to help you avoid extra fees. The durable ABS hard-shell exterior offers excellent protection, while the fully lined, tear-resistant interior includes garment restraint straps to keep your clothes secure and a large zipper accessory pocket for added convenience.
Specifications of KENNETH COLE Reaction Out of Bounds
Material: ABS hard-shell
Lock Type: Combination Lock
Weight: 2.72 kg
Dimensions: 21.6 x 36.8 x 55.2 cm
Country of Origin: China
Also read: Amazon Sale 2024: Best deals on power banks and wireless chargers, enjoy up to 86% discount
Travel smart with the Skybags Polyester Soft 57 Cms Luggage-Suitcase, now available for 69% off during the Amazon Sale 2024. This stylish Black suitcase is designed for both men and women, offering an excellent balance of durability and convenience. With a storage volume of 50 litres and a lightweight design (weighing just 3.27 kg), it’s perfect for short trips or weekend getaways. The suitcase features 360-degree rotating wheels for smooth manoeuvrability and a combination lock for added security.
Specifications of Skybags Polyester Soft 57 Cms Luggage- Suitcase
Material: Polyester
Lock type: Combination Lock
Weight: 3.27 kg
Dimensions: 38 x 28 x 57 cm
Item weight: 3270 Grams
Unmissable deals on Skybags luggage: Amazon Sale 2024
Enhance your travel experience with the Skybags Curve Set of 3 Hard Spinner Luggage during the Amazon Sale 2024! Enjoy 53% off on this fashionable luggage set, which includes Cabin (55 cm), Medium (65 cm), and Large (75 cm) sizes, perfect for all your journeys. With its spacious compartments and compression straps, this luggage set allows for organized packing. Travel stylishly and comfortably with this lightweight, unisex luggage set. Don’t miss out on this amazing deal on luggage.
Specifications of Skybags Curve Set of 3 Hard Spinner Luggage
Material: Durable polypropylene
Weight: 9.8 kg
Lock Type: Combination lock
Wheels: 8 smooth 360-degree dual wheels
Warranty: 5-year international warranty
Similar articles you may like
Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024 is LIVE for Prime Members: Hurry! Get up to 85% of trolley bags, duffle bags
Best luggage for international travel: Top 6 picks to help you travel in comfort
Best men’s luggage bags: Discover the top 9 picks for effortless travel, packed with style and functionality
Amazon Great Indian Festival deals on lighting essentials for your home; save big and brighten up every room
Amazon Sale 2024: Deals on luggage
What types of luggage are available during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale 2024?
The sale features a wide range of luggage options, including cabin bags, check-in suitcases, and luggage sets from top brands like Skybags, Aristocrat, and Mokobara.
Are there any discounts on luggage during the sale?
Yes! Customers can enjoy significant savings, with discounts up to 80% on selected luggage items during the Amazon Great Indian Festival Sale.
Is there a warranty on luggage purchased during the sale?
Many luggage products come with a manufacturer’s warranty, typically ranging from 1 to 5 years, ensuring quality and peace of mind with your purchase.
Can I return luggage items bought during the sale?
Yes, most luggage items are returnable within 10 days of delivery, allowing you to shop confidently.
At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, with respect to the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
If you’re a fan of the Persona games, then the rather bizarrely named Metaphor ReFantazio is probably top of your 2024 wishlist. Launching on October 11 for PS4, PS5, Xbox and PC, the new game is directed by Katsura Hashino, whose previous credits include Persona 3, 4 and 5, as well as Shin Megami Tensei III: Nocturne. If the first review is anything to go by, Metaphor ReFantazio shares a lot of similarities with the Persona series, not just in terms of gameplay, but also the overall quality. Indeed, Japanese publication Famitsu awarded the game 37 out of a possible 40 in its Metaphor ReFantazio review.
If you want to purchase the PS5 version at a discounted price, then head over to CD Keys (below) for discounted PlayStation Store credit.
Critics praise the combat system, presentation and overall storytelling, comparing it favourably to the Persona games.
If you’ve played the free demo currently available on PlayStation and Xbox, then you should have a pretty good idea about what to expect.
While the opening section of the demo is somewhat linear, players are given more freedom towards the tail-end of the “Prologue”.
This includes a similar time-management system to Persona, where players have a certain number of days to complete the main mission and side-quests.
While you can tackle the main mission right away, it’s more beneficial to spend some time levelling up, finding new gear and winning the trust of townsfolk.
The risk, however, is that you run out of time to achieve your main goal, which may also take longer than expected.
If you’re a fan of the Persona games, then the rather bizarrely named Metaphor ReFantazio
The game also features an Archetype class system, which dictates the spells and fighting style of each character.
New “Archetypes” can be unlocked by forging bonds with different characters. Likewise, you can change equipped Archetypes to fit the current situation.
The demo, for example, features a side quest where you visit a dungeon to eliminate a monster. However, the monsters in the dungeon react unfavourably to magic wielding characters, making it more beneficial to select warrior-style Archetypes.
Atlus explains more: “From the creative minds behind Persona 3, 4, and 5 comes Metaphor: ReFantazio, a unique fantasy world, where your protagonist will journey alongside his fairy companion, Gallica, to lift the curse from the kingdom’s lost prince.
“Control your destiny, face your fears and awaken magical ‘Archetype’ powers that lie dormant in your heart.
“By awakening to an Archetype, you will unlock the power to channel and combine the abilities of unique job classes. Strengthen your bonds and build your party to take down powerful foes and discover the kingdom’s true nature.”
Mercedes-AMG is reportedly gearing up to reveal a “brand-defining successor to the SLS Electric Drive” later this decade that will fly the flag for the German performance brand in its electric transformation.
As reported by Autocar, this as-yet unnamed high-performance electric halo model was previewed by the retro-looking 2023 Mercedes-Benz Vision One-Eleven concept that itself was inspired by the original 1969 C 111 concept.
The electric AMG supercar will reportedly be the second model underpinned by the forthcoming AMG.EA architecture, following the AMG GT 4 Door successor due next year.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Mercedes-Benz Vision One-Eleven concept
It will also reportedly outperform the Mercedes-AMG One, which has a Formula 1-derived V6 hybrid powertrain good for a 0-100km/h sprint in 2.9 seconds.
Power will reportedly come from axial-flux electric motors sourced from wholly owned subsidiary YASA. Production of these will start as soon as next year at Mercedes’ Berlin-Marienfelde plant.
The company has already supplied axial-flux electric motors for the Ferrari SF90 Stradale and Koenigsegg Regera plug-in hybrids (PHEVs).
The forthcoming AMG supercar’s axial-flux electric motors will reportedly produce more than twice the power of YASA’s existing electric motors from a power-to-weight perspective – up to 364kW of power and 800Nm, with a weight of 24kg.
At this stage it’s unclear how many electric motors this Mercedes-AMG supercar will have.
YASA officials told Autocar its has developed a range of powertrain layouts for AMG.EA-based models. Examples include single-motor front, dual-motor rear, as well as quad-motor with two front and two rear units.
The electric motors will reportedly be fed by a cylindrical-cell lithium-ion battery from US battery specialist Sila. It will feature an 800V electric architecture.
Unlike the Mercedes-Benz SLS Electric Drive, which was limited to just nine examples, the new electric AMG supercar will reportedly have significantly higher production numbers.
“It’s clear that we are going all-electric,” said Mercedes-AMG CEO Michael Schiebe to Autocar. “Customers who came to the brand because of the V8 did not come because they just wanted to have a big engine.
“They came because they loved the technology that we put into the car. So when it comes to electric driving, I’m pretty sure they will jump into that new technology because it will be the latest and greatest that you can get.”
MORE: Mercedes-Benz gullwing concept has retro details, next-gen electric tech
The transaction might value Haldiram’s at nearly $11 billion.
Temasek is holding preliminary talks to buy from 10 per cent to 15 per cent in Haldiram.
Singapore-based Temasek Holdings is in discussions to buy a minority stake in Haldiram Snacks, according to a Bloomberg report citing people familiar with the matter. The transaction might value Haldiram at nearly $11 billion.
Talks are ongoing and may not lead to a transaction, according to Bloomberg.
Temasek is holding preliminary talks to buy from 10 per cent to 15 per cent in Haldiram, the people said, asking not to be identified because the matter is private. The investment may serve as a stepping stone towards a potential initial public offering of the company, according to report citing the people.
Haldiram’s has drawn interest from other prospective bidders, the people added.
Founded by Ganga Bishan Agarwal in the 1930s in north India, Haldiram’s sells a range of foods from sweet and savoury snacks to frozen meals and breads. It also runs 43 restaurants in and around Delhi, according to its website.
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to markets, economy and companies. Having a decade of experi…Read More
The bearish action in the crypto market has led to top projects such as Bitcoin, Ethereum, and others losing momentum. However, FTX has been one cryptocurrency that has gained significant pace within a short period. Further, with a jump of ~30%, it has secured the position of top gainer among the top 100.
Additionally, with the creditor’s repayment plan and auctioning of Worldcoin tokens, investors are curious about the upcoming plan of the FTX exchange. Moreover with this, queries like “Will FTX price rise again?” and “How high will FTT price go?” have gained huge search volume.
FTT Crypto Achieves 7-month High!
By defying all the odds, the FTX token has continued gaining momentum by adding ~28% to its portfolio in the past day with a trading volume of $86.32 million. Moreover, it has jumped 79.33% over the past week, resulting in it achieving the high of March.
TradingView: FTT/USDT
Moreover, the FTT price has jumped ~95% over the past 30 days. This highlights an increase in the bullish sentiment. With a market capitalization of $860.023 million, it has secured the 83rd position in the global cryptocurrency list.
FTX Technical Analysis
The SMA indicator supports the FTT crypto price chart in the 1D time frame. This indicates an increase in the buying-over-selling pressure for the altcoin in the market.
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) continues hovering close to its overbought range. Further, the average trendline supports the price trend. This suggests that the FTX token will continue gaining value in the coming time.
Will FTT Price Rise Again?
Suppose, the bullish sentiment intensifies, in that case, the FTX crypto will prepare to test its resistance level of $2.65 in the coming time. Maintaining the price above that level could set the stage for this crypto to head toward its upper high of $3.25 this month.
On the flip side, if a bearish reversal occurs, the price could retest its support level of $2.10. Moreover, if the bears overpowered the bulls, under such a situation, the FTT coin price could plunge toward its lower support level of $1.58.
Wondering how far could FTX price reach by the end of 2024? Read our FTX Price Prediction for insights!
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands and Connections puzzles.
The New York Times Crossword Puzzle is legendary. But if you don’t have that much time, the Mini Crossword is an entertaining substitute. The Mini Crossword is much easier than the old-school NYT Crossword, and you probably can complete it in a couple of minutes. But if you’re stuck, we’ve got the answers. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is far from alone in the Times’ stable of games. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get at those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
NYT Mini Crossword completed puzzle for Oct. 4, 2024.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: What lanternfish can do, using organs called photophores Answer: GLOW
5A clue: Channel with “Vanderpump Rules” and “Below Deck” Answer: BRAVO
6A clue: Consumed Answer: EATEN
7A clue: Really need a bath Answer: STINK
8A clue: Change for a twenty Answer: TENS
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: Storm drain cover Answer: GRATE
2D clue: “Et tu, Brute?” language Answer: LATIN
3D clue: Bakery fixtures Answer: OVENS
4D clue: Stats or policy nerd Answer: WONK
5D clue: Work email sign-off Answer: BEST
How to play more Mini Crosswords
The New York Times Games section offers a large number of online games, but only some of them are free for all to play. You can play the current day’s Mini Crossword for free, but you’ll need a subscription to the Times Games section to play older puzzles from the archives.
You have reached your maximum number of articles. Log in or create an account FREE of charge to continue reading.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Amid reports of a deadly viral outbreak in Central Africa, researchers are reportedly scrambling to develop treatments and vaccines to combat the Marburg virus.
As of Sept. 30, 2024, the country of Rwanda — which is bordered by Uganda, Tanzania, Burundi and the Democratic Republic of the Congo — has reported 27 cases of the virus and nine subsequent deaths, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).
Most of the cases have affected health care workers at two health facilities in the city of Kigali, the same source stated.
CDC WARNS US PUBLIC HEALTH OFFICIALS OF EBOLA-LIKE DISEASE
The patients are being cared for in hospitals, as noted by the World Health Organization (WHO) on Sept. 29.
The virus is spread by the Egyptian fruit bat (Egyptian rousette bat), which is found in both Equatorial Guinea and Tanzania, per the CDC. (Getty Images)
“Contact tracing is underway, with 300 contacts under follow-up,” WHO stated.
This is the first time the Marburg virus has been reported in Rwanda.
What is the Marburg virus?
Similar to Ebola, Marburg is a “rare but severe hemorrhagic fever” that can cause “serious illness and death,” with a 20% to 90% fatality rate.
There have not been any confirmed cases in the United States, and the CDC says the risk of infection in the country is low.
MARBURG VIRUS ‘WILL NOT BECOME THE NEXT PANDEMIC’ BUT SHOULD BE MONITORED, DOCTOR SAYS
“It is highly fatal in humans and there is no treatment — and unlike Ebola, there is no vaccine,” Dr. Marc Siegel, senior medical analyst for Fox News and clinical professor of medicine at NYU Langone Medical Center, told Fox News Digital.
“It is very similar to Ebola in that it causes hemorrhagic fever,” he added.
Marburg is “difficult to catch,” Siegel noted, as it requires close contact with bodily secretions.
This colorized scanning electron micrograph captured at the NIAID Integrated Research Facility in Fort Detrick, Maryland, shows Marburg virus particles.(Getty Images)
The virus is spread by the Egyptian fruit bat (Egyptian rousette bat), which is found in both Equatorial Guinea and Tanzania, per the CDC.
An infected human can transmit the disease to other humans through exchange of bodily fluids and contaminated objects.
Marburg is a “rare but severe” hemorrhagic fever with a 20% to 90% fatality rate.
Marburg isn’t new — it was first discovered in 1967, when outbreaks happened in labs in Marburg and Frankfurt (both in Germany) and in Serbia (formerly Belgrade, Yugoslavia).
In 2023, there were outbreaks of the virus in Tanzania (resulting in five deaths) and Equatorial Guineau (12 deaths).
Symptoms, treatment and prevention
Initial signs and symptoms of the virus include fever, chills, a rash with flat and raised bumps, muscle aches, headache, sore throat, chest pain, nausea, vomiting and diarrhea, according to the CDC.
Advanced stages of the disease can be marked by delirium, liver failure, shock, hemorrhagic bleeding and organ failure.
Most of the cases have affected health care workers at two health facilities in the city of Kigali, the CDC stated.(iStock)
Symptoms typically emerge within two to 21 days of infection.
“In fatal cases, death occurs most often between eight and nine days after symptom onset, usually preceded by severe blood loss and shock,” WHO stated in its health alert.
TICK-BORNE WETLAND VIRUS, NEWLY DISCOVERED IN CHINA, COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO BRAIN, RESEARCHERS SAY
There are currently no treatments for Marburg other than “supportive care,” the CDC noted.
Patients should be under the care of a doctor who can monitor oxygen status and blood pressure, provide intravenous fluids, and treat any secondary infections, the agency stated.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Rest and hydration are also key to recovery.
To prevent outbreaks, the CDC recommends avoiding contact with blood and bodily fluids of sick people and those who have recovered from the virus until tests confirm the complete absence of the virus.
The Marburg virus, first recognized in 1967, causes a severe type of hemorrhagic fever that affects humans and non-human primates.(BSIP/UIG Via Getty Images)
People should also refrain from touching items that may have been contaminated with an infected person’s bodily fluids, the CDC cautioned.
No vaccine is currently available for Marburg, although “some candidate vaccines are currently under development,” according to WHO.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“There are promising vaccines and therapeutic candidates for MVD, but these must be proven in clinical trials,” the organization added.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“WHO assesses the risk of this outbreak as very high at the national level, high at the regional level, and low at the global level. Investigations are ongoing to determine the full extent of the outbreak and this risk assessment will be updated as more information is received.”
If you are a regular Instagram user, chances are you’ve stumbled upon the beautiful visuals of Cedar Club House, a recently opened restaurant and bar on Tolstoy Lane in Janpath, Delhi. With its Renaissance-inspired architecture and modern culinary flair, Cedar Club House promises an immersive dining experience that pleases both the eyes and the palate.
As I stepped into Cedar, I was immediately taken by the striking contrast of bold black and white patterned flooring paired with a marble fountain, setting an inviting tone. The wrought iron chairs and lush green interiors lend an air of elegance, while the vibrant bar area buzzed with high-energy music. But I had planned for a quieter dinner. Fortunately, Cedar offers two exclusive private dining rooms, ideal for intimate gatherings. Walking along a cosy alley, I sat at the other dining area. As I settled in, I was pleasantly surprised to discover another bar in the dining area.
Cedar’s Cocktails Get A Thumbs Up:
I decided to kick off my culinary journey with a Cedar House Punch-a bourbon cocktail that expertly balanced richness and refreshment. My dining companion opted for Kaffir Lime-Infused Gin & Tonis which quickly became a favourite on the table. We also sampled the Caribbean Long Island Iced Tea, a vibrant blue concoction that was enough to liven up my spirits.
Cedar’s Food Review:
Cedar’s menu is a delightful fusion of global cuisine delicacies. From classic Indian dishes to innovative international flavours, there’s something to satisfy every palate. For dinner, I indulged in the Tandoori Prawns, which were perfectly cooked and had a smoky, spicy flavour. The Chicken Yellow Curry Dimsum was another highlight, with its creamy texture and delicious oyster sauce flavour. The Malabar Coast Fish, paired with coconut curry and rice, was a satisfying and flavorful dish. I also recommend the Angara chicken tikka, which is a unique twist on the classic dish.
While the appetizers and main courses were excellent, the dessert course fell short of expectations. I sampled the Pistachio Tres Leches and Baked Cheesecake, but neither captured my sweet tooth’s affection.
Overall Impression
Cedar Club House is a beautiful restaurant with a unique ambience and good food. However, there is room for improvement in the dessert department and mosquito control. Nevertheless, it stands as a fantastic destination for weeknight dining, merging vibrant music and stunning interiors into a memorable experience. If you’re looking for a high-energy dining experience with delicious food and cocktails, Cedar Club House is definitely worth a visit.
What: Cedar Club House Where: Where: Cedar Clubhouse, 48, ground floor, Tolstoy lane, Janpath, New Delhi When: 12 noon – 1 am Cost: INR 1,800 for two people (approx.) Without alcohol
A total of 1,974 people have been killed, including 127 children, and 9,384 injured since the start of the Israeli attacks on Lebanon over the last year, the country’s Health Minister Firass Abiad said on Thursday.
Clashes between Israel and Hezbollah began on October 8, 2023, when Hezbollah started launching rockets at Israel in solidarity with Hamas in Gaza, triggering retaliatory Israeli artillery fire and air strikes in southeastern Lebanon.
Confrontations between Lebanon and Israel have sharply escalated after the latter announced a shift in military focus from the Gaza Strip to the northern front in mid-September.
Under terms of the deal, Philogen will complete clinical trials for Fibromun, seek approval, and handle manufacturing, with Sun Pharma leading global commercialization.
Home sales in the first nine months of 2024 rose 9 per cent on year to over 2.6 lakh units led by higher priced homes, while office leasing at 53.7 million square feet was 27 per cent higher on year, according to Knight Frank India, which released the data today.
Despite monthly blips, residential demand has been on an upward trajectory, the growth coming mostly from the sale of residences priced above ₹1 crore, while sales of home below that price point has shown a decrease, the data showed.
In the case of the office sector, leasing demand is being led by India-facing businesses, followed by Global Capability Centres.
Residential demand
In the third quarter of 2024, housing sales rose across the board in all seven cities covered by the survey, with the exception of the National Capital Region where there was a fall. On a pan-India basis the growth was 5 per cent at 87,108 units.
Mumbai, which accounts for half of real estate market in the country, saw the highest sales volume during the quarter at 24,222 units, and the highest growth was in Kolkata. Among the larger markets, Bengaluru saw a robust growth of 11 per cent.
Sales of homes above ₹1 crore, saw a 41 per cent growth in the quarter. Around 85 per cent of the homes sold in NCR were in this category and in Bengaluru 64 per cent.
Sales of houses priced up to ₹50 lakh continued its declining trend, an indicator of problems with affordability in that segment. The market share of this segment is now at 24 per cent compared to 29 per cent year ago. The only markets where this segment showed a growth was Mumbai and Kolkata.
At 90,479 units launches rose 6 per cent in the quarter. The Mumbai and Pune markets contributed the most to the overall growth, while Mumbai saw the maximum number of launches. The NCR, Hyderabad, Ahmedabad, and Kolkata saw a fall in launches.
Led by the premium segment prices showed a growth across all markets, with Bengaluru seeing the most growth at 10 per cent.
Overall unsold inventory saw a slight uptick of 3 per cent, led by the premium segment, with the average quarters to sell at 5.8.
Office demand
GCCs accounted for 37 per cent of total leasing, followed by India facing businesses. According to the data, close to half of the space taken up by GCCs were concentrated in Bengaluru.
Rent growth in the quarter ranged from 2-10 per cent, with the most increase being in Chennai on an annual basis. This is the ninth consecutive quarter where rent growth has been stable or positive for all markets. Rents were more or less stable sequentially.
Vacancies on a pan-India basis were at 14.9 per cent.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
NEKI od najseksi parfema sadrže različite mirisne kombinacije koje mnogi žele nositi iznova. Njihova posebna mješavina nota – bilo da su mošusne, gurmanske ili cvjetne – ima nešto opojno što nas prirodno privlači jedne drugima, a parfumeri kažu da je to namjerno osmišljeno.
Iako ono što smatramo najprivlačnijim mirisnim notama može biti subjektivno, nacionalna direktorica ljepote Nordstroma Autumne West kaže da većina kupaca teži zemljanim, drvenastim mirisima za ultimativnu seksualnu privlačnost.
“Primjećujem da kada većina ljudi opisuje miris koji smatraju ‘seksi’, gotovo uvijek spominju naznake vanilije pomiješane s nečim drvenastim, začinskim ili ponekad ružom”, objašnjava Autumne, prenosi Harper’s Bazaar.
“Obično je to ravnoteža između slatkih i intenzivnih nota koja donosi te zavodljive vibracije s dodatnom privlačnošću. Naši kupci općenito vole kombinirati svoje već poznate omiljene parfeme s novom, osvježenom verzijom klasičnih mirisa.”
Urednici Harper’s Bazaara, s parfumerima i drugim poznavateljima u toj kategoriji, sastavili su listu parfema koje smatraju najseksepilnijim. Prenosimo njihov odabir.
Nette The Vanille Eau de Parfum
Ponekad je najzavodljiviji miris onaj koji je jedva primjetan, a upravo takav je ovaj gurmanski parfem. “Note kardamoma, cvijeta magnolije i vanilije stvaraju toplu kombinaciju koja miriše poput vaše kože, ali bolje”, piše Harper’s Bazaar.
Le Labo Santal 33 Eau de Parfum
Privlačnost ovog parfema leži u njegovoj toplini i senzualnosti, dok istovremeno ostaje suptilan.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Valentino Donna Born in Roma Intense Eau de Parfum
Ovaj iznimno popularan parfem često se rasproda u parfumerijama poput Sephore. Njegov cvjetno-amber miris otkriva tamniju, zavodljiviju stranu klasičnih cvjetnih nota, obogaćen jasminom i vanilijom.
Maison Margiela Paris Replica Jazz Club
Drvenasti miris, inspiriran jazz klubovima, obogaćen notama mezcala, tradicionalnog meksičkog pića i cigara, stvara neočekivano senzualan dojam.
Parfums de Marly Herod Eau de Parfum
Herod parfem s notama tonka graha i cimeta donosi mističniji pristup mirisima od vanilije. Kombinacija srednjih nota, poput duhana i tamjana, daje mu dubinu i blagu začinjenost, s toplim, mošusnim završetkom.
Diptyque Orphéon Eau de Parfum
Ovaj parfem miriše poput zavodljivog noćnog izlaska, prema Harper’s Bazaaru. Diptyque je u svom Orphéon parfemu uhvatio atmosferu zadimljenog jazz kluba, inspiriran živahnim noćnim životom pariškog kvarta Saint Germain iz šezdesetih godina.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Creed Aventus
“Ovaj parfem je nevjerojatno opojan, poželjet ćete ga neprestano mirisati na nekome tko ga nosi ili ga nositi sami”, ističe Bazaar.
Ormaie Marque-Page Eau de Parfum
Ovaj mošusno-citrusni parfem brenda Ormaie također se našao na listi. Urednici Bazaara kažu da je savršen kada želite podići svoje samopouzdanje.
Dolce & Gabbana Pour Homme Eau de Toilette
Ovaj parfem miriše luksuzno, zavodljivo i zrelo. Mješavina citrusa, bergamota, lavande i sandalovine pravi je senzualni dragulj.
Byredo Mojave Ghost Eau de Parfum
“Ovaj parfem je poput viralne pjesme koju ne možete izbaciti iz glave”, ističe Bazaar. Njegove drvenaste i cvjetne note ambrete, magnolije, cedrovine i ljubičice nevjerojatno su opojne, a miris je savršen za nošenje tijekom cijele godine.
Armani My Way Eau de Parfum
Još jedan izuzetno zavodljiv miris je My Way od Armani Beautyja. Sadrži vaniliju i bergamot, a njegova svježa slatkoća cvijeta naranče daje mu sočnu notu. Prozračan je i nenametljiv, ali i dalje prepoznatljiv.
Fenty Beauty Eau de Parfum
Rihannin Fenty Eau de Parfum savršena je kombinacija začinskih i slatkih nota. Dovoljan je samo suptilan pritisak da ovaj miris ostavi trajan dojam, čineći ga nezaboravnim. Idealan je za romantične večeri.
Dior J’Adore Eau de Parfum
Urednici Bazzara preporučuju ovaj Diorov parfem za one večeri kada se želite osjećati sjajno u svojoj koži.
Tom Ford Tobacco Vanille Eau de Parfum
Još jedan izvrstan zavodljiv miris je ovaj od Tom Forda, posebno prikladan za nošenje tijekom zimskih mjeseci.
Kilian Paris Love Don’t Be Shy
Love, Don’t Be Shy izuzetno je popularan i mnogima neodoljiv. Note sljeza, vanilije i cvijeta naranče savršeno se stapaju, stvarajući miris koji podsjeća na neodoljiv desert.
Chanel Coco Mademoiselle Eau de Parfum
Chanelov parfem savršen je zavodljivi izbor za svakodnevno nošenje.
Aerin Amber Musk Eau de Parfum
Ovaj parfem je ugodan, jednostavan, lagan i nenametljiv. “Miriše poput zagrljaja na hladan dan s nekim koga volite”, opisuje ga Bazaar.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
D’Angelo Russell, the Lakers’ repentant point guard who has vowed to be more engaged this season, answered some questions Thursday as drama-free as possible.
“The main goal is basketball. I think I do that,” he said. “Obviously a lot of people get distracted from that and everything else matters but basketball. For me, I’m trying to eliminate the distractions that y’all can use against me or say against me. Trying to eliminate it.”
But when the topic turned to the way the Lakers are preparing for the season under JJ Redick, about the mental demands being put on the team, Russell couldn’t hide his excitement.
“Hell yeah. Yeah, it excites me,” he said. “I haven’t really had the opportunity to — and I’m not throwing shots at anybody, obviously, I know it kinda spins like that — but I’ve never really had the opportunity to build a relationship with a coach over a long period of time.”
Russell mentioned spending parts of three seasons with Chris Finch in Minnesota as one example, but otherwise, he’s lived a fairly transient NBA lifestyle.
With Redick, Russell said, he’s found someone willing to challenge the Lakers and himself with intellectual ideas while forcing them to get into the minutia about how and why something as simple as a screen can work.
“For me to see how JJ is trying to bring the play calls and just level of IQ into each practice and each film session, to see how he’s prioritizing that. I’ve always been a guy that wants to prioritize high IQ, high verbiage, high film sessions… like, let’s rise to that,” Russell said. “And he’s obviously doing that. It’s something to look forward to.”
Redick said he’s been working on getting his players acclimated, collaborating with LeBron James, Anthony Davis and other players who were away from the gym in the build to the season.
“I’m confident that given our level of work, and I would call it preliminary install in September, we were in constant communication,” Redick said. “As we were building out languages and our systems, you know, I would update those guys, you know, every 10 days or so with an updated PDF of all the stuff. If they had any questions, we talked about it.”
Russell made news Monday during the team’s media day when he apologized to fans for “a lack of professionalism” during his scrum with reporters. He offered the same apology during a different televised interview.
Thursday, asked about the cause of those apologies, Russell declined.
“I left y’all with what I left y’all with. That’s all I really got,” Russell said.
But when it came to specifics about a play Redick drew up in one of the first Lakers’ practices of the new season, Russell said he made sure to reach out to his coach later in the day to compliment his innovation.
“He drew up a play and I don’t even know if it worked. I think Jaxson did a great job of sniffing the play out. And I was on the golf course and I was thinking about it and I sent JJ a little voice note kinda thanking him for putting that out. I’d never seen it,” Russell said. “I’m not trying to hype it up but I thanked him for showing me that. It didn’t work, but I saw him getting into his bag right there and it’s exciting for players to notice stuff like that.”
Let the games begin
The Lakers open the preseason Friday in Palm Springs against Minnesota before hosting Phoenix on Sunday.
Redick wouldn’t say how much James or Davis would play.
“We have a general idea of what that looks like for all of preseason,” he said. “But just trying to figure out what makes the most sense. Our framework for a plan is based in real-time, based on how these guys feel. I lived this as a player. You can have a three-and-a-half-hour practice where you’re standing around for 45 minutes and people are talking and teaching and we didn’t do that the first two days. It was two hours and five minutes with two water breaks. Today was 60 minutes with no water breaks. One thing to the next. So we gotta see how they feel and we’ll adjust accordingly.”
The team bused to Palm Springs following that tight Thursday practice.
“Today was a ‘tornado,’ that’s what (Redick) said …because we only had a one-hour practice so we were just going to go hard,” Rui Hachimura said. “…We just wanted it high intensity today so that’s what we did and we had a really good practice today, I think. It was a short time. It’s been great.”
Make a pick
Hachimura said he’s in a unique position with the Dodgers and the Padres meeting in the playoffs, with two Japanese countrymen starring for the teams in Shohei Ohtani and Game 2 San Diego starter Yu Darvish.
“Dodgers, yeah. I got to say. You know, actually, Yu Darvish, that’s tough. Yeah, that’s tough. He’s like my mentor, you know. When I got to the league he was always supporting me,” Hachimura said of Darvish. “He was always there. He came to the game too one time. I remember that. He had like the whole [outfit], my jersey, everything. It’s just one of those [things] where I’m just happy to see those Japanese athletes — they’re playing against each other on one of the biggest stages in the world. So, yeah, I’m just happy to see it and I’m so proud of them, those two.”
Google sees India as “a very important market” both from users and research and development perspectives, India MD Roma Datta Chobey said on Thursday asserting that the global tech giant is geared up and fully committed to playing a significant role in India’s digital revolution.
In an interview with PTI, Chobey said Indians are adopting and adapting AI in a big way, and added that the company is sharply focused on leveraging Artificial Intelligence (AI) to democratise information and opportunities and keen to play a significant role in developing a thriving AI ecosystem here.
The Google India top boss also outlined the company’s big bets in the country in areas such as AI, payments and device manufacturing.
To a question on regulatory structures that are taking shape in India, she said that Google believes that AI should be regulated, in a way that ensures user benefits and fosters innovation.
“Google believes in regulations…We believe that technology should be regulated and regulated well, because it is nuanced. We believe AI should be regulated in a way that takes care of the user benefit…At the same time innovation should thrive, so it is a balance that needs to be struck,” she said.
She said that Google is “closely” working with Indian start up ecosystem, and asserted that India has been and will remain an important market for Google.
“India is a very important market for Google both from user perspective and the Reseach and Development,” she said adding that Google is fully committed to playing a significant role in digital revolution in India.
Typhoon Krathon made landfall Thursday in Taiwan’s major port city of Kaohsiung, bringing torrential rains and fierce winds to the island’s south. Trees were brought down by high winds and roads were flooded, prompting the closure of schools and businesses.
Waves crash on the coastline in Kaohsiung, southern Taiwan as Typhoon Krathon approaches to Taiwan. Taiwan travel alert: Southern cities flooded as Typhoon Krathon makes landfall (AP Photo/Chiang Ying-ying)
Krathon made landfall in the industrial Siaogang district of Kaohsiung around 12:40 p.m., the Central Weather Administration said. It packed maximum sustained winds of 126 kph (78 mph) with gusts of 162 kph (101 mph).
The typhoon was forecast to move slowly north and weaken into a tropical depression by Friday before it reaches the capital, Taipei. It was expected to then head across the Taiwan Strait toward the Chinese coast. Winds were strong in Taipei on Thursday, but there was little rain.
Kaohsiung earlier urged its residents to take cover from potentially disastrous winds and rain, which tore down storefronts and flooded car parks but caused no reported loss of life.
The slow-moving typhoon, which approached Taiwan at a speed of about 4 kph (2.5 mph), doused eastern and southern parts of the island over the past five days, forcing thousands to evacuate from mountainous or low-lying areas. Two days of closures are believed to have taken a significant toll on the island’s high-tech economy that relies heavily on foreign trade.
Gusts and heavy rains pelted empty streets in Kaohsiung, while life in Taipei, 350 kilometers (215 miles) to the north, was only slightly disrupted.
Many residents woke up Thursday to mobile phone alerts urging them to take shelter from the potentially dangerous winds. The weather administration posted a Facebook message warning Kaohsiung and Pingtung county residents not to go outside when the eye of the storm passes above their area and the weather calms briefly, because the winds would pick up again afterward.
Weather-related events attributed to Krathon injured at least 123 people around the island, according to Taiwan’s fire department. Two people died — one after driving into fallen rocks on the road in the southeastern Taitung county, and the other while trimming tree branches in the city of Hualien. Two others remained missing.
A fire at a hospital in Pingtung County killed at least nine people early Thursday. The deaths were attributed to smoke and the cause was under investigation. It was not immediately clear whether the blaze was related to the typhoon.
Thousands were evacuated from areas vulnerable to mudslides and landslides. Almost 40,000 troops were on standby to help with rescue efforts.
Mountainous areas in the island’s south have received up to 169 centimeters (5.5 feet) of rain over the past five days.
China’s weather agency said some eastern and southern parts of Taiwan are set to receive extremely heavy rains of up to 40 centimeters (1.3 feet) over the next 24 hours.
Typhoons rarely hit Taiwan’s west coast, affecting instead the mountainous eastern side of the island.
Kaohsiung officials, in urging residents to be vigilant about the weather, recalled the destruction brought by Typhoon Thelma, which in 1977 badly damaged the city and caused 37 deaths.
Earlier in the week, Typhoon Krathon lashed northern Philippine islands, killing four people and displacing at least 5,000, officials said.
While Volkswagen Group bosses in Germany have recently had difficult conversations with workers about cutting costs, the carmaker’s Australian arm is confident the auto giant’s local operations will continue as usual.
In September, Volkswagen Group finance chief Arno Antlitz attended a gathering of 25,000 workers at the company’s Wolfsburg headquarters to say they needed to work with management to cut spending.
“We have been spending more money at the brand than we earn for some time now. That can’t go well in the long term. If we carry on like this, we won’t succeed in the transformation,” he was quoted as saying, which was reportedly met with heckling from the audience.
The transformation in question is Volkswagen’s shift to electric vehicles (EVs), which has been met with difficulties in Europe on account of changes to subsidies – not to mention slowing global demand.
But in Australia, where EVs are not yet the primary cars of choice, cost-cutting in Germany is expected to have little to no impact on Volkswagen’s local operations.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Volkswagen Group Australia corporate communications general manager Paul Pottinger says Australia and Europe present two “completely different” situations for the brand.
“Our situation in Australia is unique in so many respects, not least of which is the fact our relationship with EVs is maturing. It’s not fully fledged or consummated as it is in Europe – we’re a completely different state,” he said.
“I’m often asked ‘is the slowdown of EV sales an issue for Australia?’ – well, no, because we’re 10 years behind Europe. I don’t think our situation is in any way congruent to what’s happening or isn’t happening there.”
Volkswagen Group Australia product and PR communications manager Daniel DeGasperi echoed Mr Pottinger’s remarks while saying a “significant renewal” of the VW brand’s Australian showroom was on the way, which “presents a huge opportunity for the Volkswagen brand”.
ID.5
Volkswagen’s global shift to EVs has been an on-again, off-again affair. Reports from late 2023 suggested the brand was slowing its EV rollout in Europe, with plans to build further dedicated factories delayed.
At the time, Mr Antlitz said European EV orders were down 50 per cent from 300,000 in 2022, to 150,000.
More recently, the brand reportedly delayed the launch of its flagship Trinity EV to make way for the incoming electric Golf, which could debut earlier than 2029 despite suggestions Volkswagen had recently delayed its launch from 2028 by 15 months.
The Trinity was first scheduled for release in 2026 and then 2028, 2030 and reportedly now 2032. The delay was attributed to software-related issues, while Volkswagen planned to build a dedicated factory for the Trinity following a €2 billion (A$3.2 billion) investment.
Those plans were cancelled in October last year, when it was confirmed the Trinity and Golf EV would instead be built at an already established factory in Zwickau.
Q6 e-tron
In Australia, the Volkswagen brand’s EV lineup will consist of the ID.4, ID.5, and ID. Buzz, as well as electric options for the incoming Transporter and Caravelle models, which should all join the range in the next 12 months.
The wider Volkswagen Australia Group also sells EVs like the Cupra Born and, soon, the Tavascan, the Skoda Elroq and Enyaq, and the Audi Q4 e-tron, Q6 e-tron and A6 e-tron. Mr DeGasperi says that despite the situation overseas, Volkswagen Group Australia is looking forward to the incoming models.
“We’ve never had a time where we get an all-new Multivan, an all-new Transporter, a Caravelle, all in such a compact period of time,” he said.
“And certainly not with the sort of drivetrains we’re going to offer, particularly with Transporter and Caravelle – it’s a big renewal.”
MORE: Volkswagen tells angry workers big cuts need to be made, and quickly MORE: Volkswagen’s ‘sluggish’ electric car sales force it to change plans again MORE: The latest on Volkswagen’s delayed electric Golf
The decision will benefit around Rs 12 lakh railway employees. (Representative image)
Railway Employee Bonus 2024: Union Cabinet Approves Productivity-Linked Bonus For Railway Employees
Railway Employee Bonus 2024: The Union Cabinet on Thursday approved payment of a productivity-linked bonus for over 11.72 lakh railway employees, Union Minister Ashwini Vaishnaw said.
In a special meeting, the Union Cabinet also approved a revised productivity-linked reward scheme for major port authorities.
The Cabinet approved a productivity-linked bonus equivalent to 78 days’ wages for railway employees, amounting to Rs 2,029 crore.
The decision will benefit around Rs 12 lakh employees.
Railway employee bonus 2024
The amount will be paid to various categories, of railway staff like track maintainers, loco pilots, train managers (guards), station masters, supervisors, technicians, technician helpers, pointsman, ministerial staff and other group XC staff.
The payment of PLB acts as an incentive to motivate the railway employees for working towards improvement in the performance of the Railways.
Payment of PLB to eligible railway employees is made each year before the Durga Puja/ Dusshera holidays. This year also, PLB amount equivalent to 78 days’ wages is being paid to about 11.72 lakh non-gazetted Railway employees.
The maximum amount payable per eligible railway employee is Rs.17,951 for 78 days.
The performance of railways in the year 2023-2024 was very good. Railways loaded a record cargo of 1588 million tonnes and carried nearly 6.7 billion Passengers.
Many factors contributed to this record performance. These include improvement in infrastructure due to the infusion of record Capex by the government in railways, efficiency in operations and better technology, etc.
PLR for Ports
The Cabinet has also approved a revised productivity-linked reward (PLR) Scheme, aimed at benefiting around 20,704 employees of major port authorities and dock labour boards for the period from 2020-21 to 2025-26. With a total financial outlay of Rs 200 crore, the scheme seeks to boost productivity and recognise the efforts of port and dock workers.
Productivity-linked reward (PLR) is an existing scheme for the employees/workers of major port trusts and dock labour board, wherein financial reward is being granted to employees/workers on yearly basis based on the settlement arrived at between management and the labour federations of the major port authorities.
Namit Singh Sengar
Namit writes on personal finance, economy and brands. Currently contributing to News18.com as a Senior Sub Editor in the business vertical. Prior to t…Read More
Binance, known for its domination in the crypto exchange market since inception, has recently seen a significant slump in its trading activity. The exchange experienced a 20% drop in trading volume during September, compared to the previous month. This decline comes amid rising competition from platforms like Crypto.com, which saw a 40% surge in trading volumes over the same period.
Binance’s Dominance Touches 2020’s Low
According to a report from CCData, Binance’s derivatives trading volume dropped by 21% in September to $1.25 trillion, the lowest level since October 2023. This decline brought Binance’s share of the derivatives market down to 40.7%, its lowest since September 2020.
Spot trading was also hit hard, falling by 22.9% to $344 billion, the lowest since November 2023. This plunged Binance’s spot market share to 27%, the lowest since January 2021.
Overall, Binance’s combined spot and derivatives market share dropped to 36.6%, the lowest since September 2020.
Despite these declines, Binance remains the leading platform for spot trading by volume among centralized exchanges.
Meanwhile, Crypto.com is making notable gains among centralized exchanges. Its spot and derivatives trading volumes increased by 40.2% and 42.8% in September, reaching $134 billion and $149 billion, respectively. With a combined market share of 11% for the month, Crypto.com has become the fourth-largest exchange by volume.
Also read: Binance Founder CZ’s Wealth Doubles During Prison Term, Says Forbes
Despite Crypto.com’s growth, overall trading activity on centralized exchanges followed Binance’s decline. Total combined spot and derivatives volume dropped by 17% to $4.34 trillion, marking the lowest monthly volume since June.
CCData noted that this decrease follows typical seasonal trends, where trading activity tends to slow down in late summer. Spot trading volumes fell by 17.2% to $1.27 trillion, while derivatives trading dropped by 16.9% to $3.07 trillion.
Analysts expect trading activity to pick up in the coming months as the U.S. Federal Reserve increases rate cuts, which is likely to improve liquidity and bring more capital into cryptocurrencies.
Binance’s Decline Tied to Growing Regulatory Pressure
Last month, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) filed an amended complaint against Binance, examining the exchange’s token listing practices. This came after the SEC’s lawsuit in June 2023, which accused Binance of functioning as an unregistered broker, clearinghouse, and trading platform, and for offering unregistered securities. To resolve these issues, Binance agreed to pay $4.3 billion in fines to several U.S. regulators.
Also read: Binance Targets Trillion-Dollar Future Under New Leadership; IPO Soon?
Founder and former CEO Changpeng “CZ” Zhao pleaded guilty to violating the Bank Secrecy Act (BSA) due to inadequate know-your-customer (KYC) systems. However, he was sentenced to four months in prison and was released last week.
These events have impacted Binance’s operational stability and tarnished its reputation among users and investors.
As a result of these challenges, competitors like Coinbase and Bybit have seized the opportunity to chip away at the dominance that Binance once held.
With these rivals continuing to grow and potentially benefiting from Binance’s regulatory troubles, the exchange’s dominance may decline even further.
Reasons abound when you don’t want to do something: “I haven’t the time.” “The team is just me.” “Our audience needs new content.”
But are those the real reasons? Or are they excuses to thwart your fears of the unfamiliar, the unexpected, and the unknown?
If it’s the latter, try some of these techniques to get over the uncomfortable and tackle these five things in your content marketing program:
1. Talk to your ideal customers
Why you fear it: I admit it. This is my fear because it takes time to schedule interviews with members of your target market. Their feedback can be scary, too. Your ideal customers may not say what you expect, but that’s exactly why you should get to know their needs, challenges, and jobs to be done better. Without a detailed and well-researched buyer persona, your content can miss the mark regarding relevance and engagement.
Actionable steps to do it:
Engage the entire marketing team to document a detailed buyer persona that aligns with your content strategy.
Analyze your organization’s existing customer base and market research to understand the ideal customer.
Converse with members of the target market to understand their pain points, learn more about their needs, and explore the jobs they must do. Schedule interviews for detailed conversations or send surveys for quick replies.
Incorporate the research into a comprehensive buyer persona document, which details their pains and challenges, goals and motivations, jobs to be done, preferred channels and content types, and other relevant points of interest.
2. Pause new content and refresh existing content
Why you fear it: Many marketers are concerned about spending less time creating new content and more time editing content they already published. That shift goes against what they have been taught about frequent publishing.
I’ve never had this fear. From my first year in the content space, I refreshed content as often as I got the chance. I wrote two original articles a month and then analyzed past articles and edited them accordingly. This approach improved rankings and reader engagement.
Actionable steps:
Evaluate each content asset’s key metrics, such as traffic, engagement, conversion rates, and search rankings. Identify the top-performing content, which is typically only a handful or so in a large content library.
Use SEO tools to reevaluate your targeted keywords to see if interest has changed or if the term has a new meaning in searches.
Establish criteria for prioritizing which content to refresh (e.g., high potential keywords, evergreen topics, content with outdated information).
Update the content assets by making any necessary changes and enhancing their quality.
TIP: Run these content audits and refreshes regularly. Short on time? Set the expectation of updating one content asset a week whether it’s done internally or outsourced.
3. Ask industry peers for honest feedback
Why you fear it: No one likes to hear negative comments about their work, particularly if it’s harsh. It can be discouraging or damage your confidence. Impostor syndrome, time constraints, or a lack of peers can trouble many marketers. Some worry that seeking feedback could expose their weaknesses or reveal ideas their peers could use.
Actionable steps:
Realize that the content marketing community is vast and supportive.
Build a network of your industry peers. Attend in-person networking events, participate in online forums, and join relevant social media groups on LinkedIn or Facebook.
Talk to the peers you meet. Publish a group message or reach out directly to the people you know. Chat informally or schedule a call to discuss a pressing challenge or something cool you just learned about.
4. Run your content through a plagiarism checker
Why you fear it: You think your ideas and phrasing are unique and don’t want to discover someone who has already published something similar. You don’t want to make the writers, partners, and other internal and external collaborators think you doubt them. But with so much information overload, likely someone’s already thought of what you’re about to publish — maybe even using the exact words.
Checking for plagiarism should be mandatory if you’re working with writers, partners, and other external collaborators. Plagiarized content can severely damage a brand’s reputation, leading to a loss of trust among audiences and potential legal issues. There are also legal implications to keep in mind alongside a potential penalty from Google.
Actionable steps:
Accept that plagiarism is a dangerous possibility that could damage your trust with the audience, get a penalty from Google, or lead to a lawsuit.
Use plagiarism checker tools like Copyscape or Grammarly to ensure that your content is unique. Microsoft built a “similarity” check into Word’s editor tools.
Review the assessment to determine if the text requires rephrasing and new citations or is sufficient because “plagiarism” is really the use of common knowledge phrases, idioms, etc.
TIP: Use plagiarism checkers on your published content to learn if other websites have copied it entirely or published snippets.
5. Turn to internal teams for help
Why you fear it: You don’t want to bother their developers or customer support reps. You think your requests will not be supported or understood. You also may work for an employer where interdepartmental aid isn’t part of the organizational structure.
Actionable steps:
Specify what your needs are and identify which ones require input from internal teams. Do you need technical insights, customer feedback, or creative ideas? Which team members have the expertise relevant to your needs, such as developers, customer support reps, or designers?
Make an articulated request. Explain why it’s important and how their input can make a difference, the latter of which can motivate them to do it.
Make their process easier and communicate deadlines. For example, provide a developer writing an article for your tech blog with a rough outline of the core ideas. Edit their work so they can prioritize getting down their thoughts.
Organize interdepartmental meetings and brainstorming sessions to foster collaboration. Consider projects that require input from various teams so everyone feels valued and involved.
Conquer your fear with new techniques
These strategies might seem daunting, but doing what you’re afraid to do can significantly improve your content marketing. You can ensure that your brand distributes original content that reflects a deep understanding of your audience. You will gain from prioritizing quality over content and reap the value of feedback from industry peers and input from your internal teams.
Which fear will you tackle next?
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Jaro Institute of Technology Management and Research (Jaro Education) has filed a Draft Red Herring Prospectus (DRHP) with the market regulator SEBI for an initial public offering.
The IPO will consist of a fresh issue of up to ₹170 crore and an offer for sale of ₹400 crore by the promoter selling shareholder: Sanjay Namdeo Salunkhe.
The company, in consultation with the book-running lead managers, may consider a Pre-IPO Placement, aggregating up to ₹34 crore, prior to filing of the RHP.
If such placement is completed, the fresh issue size will be reduced, said the company.
Jaro Education proposes to use ₹81 crore from the net proceeds for marketing, brand building and advertising activities and ₹48 crore for payment certain outstanding borrowings.
The institute delivers personalised, technology-driven degree programs and certification programs in collaboration with its partner Institutions to students and C-Suite personnel.
As of last fiscal, Jaro Education has over 22 offices-cum-learning centres across major cities for offline learning, apart from 15 immersive tech studio set-ups in the campuses of various IIMs, and cater to a total of 34 Partner Institutions such as IITs, IIMs and premier global institutions such as Swiss School of Management and Rotman School of Management, University of Toronto.
Its enrolments between FY22 and FY24 have grown at a CAGR of 16.7 per cent and 58.3 per cent respectively.
The career of Andrea Orcel vividly encapsulates the recent history of European banking. At Merrill Lynch, now part of Bank of America, Mr Orcel advised on deals that formed part of the wave of mergers that crested in 2007, when a pan-European troika bought ABN AMRO, a Dutch lender. After the financial crisis of 2007-09, grand cross-border ambitions were ditched. Mr Orcel’s next job was to run the investment-banking arm of UBS, a Swiss champion.
JBL Pulse 5: JBL’s Pulse speaker is now in its fifth generation, and both the sound quality and 360-degree light show have been improved. JBL has “expanded the transparent outer body” so the customizable light show looks more impressive. (There’s a companion app for iOS and Android that allows you to alter the colorful lighting effects.) The speaker is also IP67 dust-proof and waterproof, and it offers up to 12 hours of battery at moderate volume levels. If you’re looking for more information on the newest launch, check out our first look of the JBL Pulse 5.
Tribit StormBox: The StormBox looks like a cross between a UE and a JBL speaker. We suspect that’s not an accident. This fully waterproof speaker costs significantly less than the JBL Flip 5 and Flip 6 and produces a bigger sound. Its rechargeable battery offers up to 20 hours of battery life for playing music and more. Tribit’s XSound speakers are probably a better value, but the StormBox is more stylish.
Bang & Olufsen Beosound A1 (2nd Gen): A couple of years ago, Bang & Olufsen upgraded its dome-shaped aluminum-clad A1 speaker with improved battery life, better speakerphone performance (it now has a three-microphone array) and slightly improved sound. It’s not only the smallest wireless speaker from the Danish company, it’s technically the most affordable. The speaker has some great features for the price that you can learn more about in our Bang & Olufsen Beosound A1 review.
Bose SoundLink Micro: Although a little pricey and due to be upgraded, the Bose SoundLink Micro sounds remarkably decent for its tiny size, delivering more bass than other pocketable speakers. It’s a fully waterproof Bluetooth speaker and is available in three color options, although the blue version appears to be hard to find. Check out our full review of Bose’s SoundLink Micro speaker here.
Anker Soundcore Motion Plus: Anker’s Soundcore Motion Plus came out in 2019, but it remains one of the best-sounding speakers for around $100. It’s larger than many mini Bluetooth speakers, but it’s still compact. It manages to sound quite a bit fuller than much of the competition in its price range, with bigger bass, more volume and better clarity. It’s also fully waterproof (IPX7-rated) and has support for the aptX streaming codec for devices like Samsung’s Galaxy phones that support it. The speaker is packed full of other features that we talk about in our Anker SoundCore Motion Plus review.
Bang & Olufsen Beosound Explore: While it’s a little overpriced for the sound quality it delivers, the Beosound Explore is a very good little speaker that has a sleek, eye-catching design, is fully waterproof and dustproof (IP67 rating), and offers excellent battery life, with up to 27 hours of music listening at moderate volume levels.
Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
An impromptu visit from Captain Jack Sparrow was a surprise treasure for some young cancer patients.
Actor Johnny Depp, who was in Spain for the San Sebastian Film Festival, dressed as the famous character from the popular “Pirates of the Caribbean” film series and dropped into the Osakidetza Donostia University Hospital.
Depp visited the pediatric and oncology wards, where he interacted with the delighted children and their families.
CHILDREN ONCE HELD HOSTAGE STILL WORKING THROUGH TRAUMA: ‘ARE THEY COMING FOR US AGAIN?’
A spokesperson from the hospital described the actor’s visit as “exciting, endearing and unforgettable.”
Depp visited the pediatric and oncology wards, where he interacted with the delighted children and their families.(Osakidetza Donostia University Hospital /TMX)
“Both the children admitted to the hospital and their families and professionals who were working at that time welcomed him with great enthusiasm and affection,” the spokesperson said.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“In a situation of illness, anyone, but especially children, greatly appreciates a distraction of this magnitude. It was a breath of fresh air, a magical moment in which they forgot about their illness and were transported to the magical world of pirates.”
A spokesperson from the hospital described the actor’s visit as “exciting, endearing and unforgettable.”(Osakidetza Donostia University Hospital /TMX)
The entire hospital team, the admitted children and their families are all “enormously grateful” for Depp’s visit, the spokesperson said.
“It has been a pleasure and an honor to have Jack Sparrow with us, a great pirate.”
‘Meaningful impact’
Harpreet Pall, MD, chair of pediatrics at K. Hovnanian Children’s Hospital at Hackensack Meridian Jersey Shore University Medical Center, confirmed that a celebrity role model visiting a children’s hospital can have a “meaningful impact” on the patients’ emotional health.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“Some of the psychological benefits include improved self-esteem and confidence, distraction from illness, improved optimism and a morale boost,” Pall told Fox News Digital.
Actor Johnny Depp arrives for the world premiere of “Pirates of the Caribbean: Dead Men Tell No Tales” in Shanghai on May 11, 2017.(Getty Images)
“A celebrity visit can create excitement and decrease some of the stress of being in the hospital.”
The visit can also increase children’s engagement with their health care team, the doctor said, leading to better adherence to the treatment plan.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Pall added, “In addition, having a positive outlook and social interaction promotes healing for hospitalized children.”
The festival of Navratri is dedicated to worshipping nine incarnations of Goddess Durga and is celebrated over a period of nine days. Each day is devoted to a different form of Durga. During this time, many people keep fast and are allowed to have only specific kinds of ingredients and foods. These fasts, at times, can also take a toll on one’s health as one might have to stay hungry for a long period of time. So, this year, we bring you some Navratri-special recipes to make sure that you are loaded with energy. Check out the recipes below:
Here Are 5 Navratri-Special Recipes To Load You With Energy
1. Shakarkandi Chaat
Sweet potatoes are high in nutrients, including minerals, vitamins, and fibre, which help us maintain our energy levels during the fasting period. You can quickly make this recipe and devour it any time you want to.
2. Sabudana Khichdi
Sabudana khichdi is one popular recipe that everyone eats during Navratri days. This vrat-friendly khichdi makes use of many various ingredients that make it healthful. Plus, sabudana is loaded with carbohydrates that fulfil your hunger.
3. Samak Dosa
This simple dosa dish with a stuffing of potatoes and spices is a nourishing, and tasty vrat-friendly dinner made using a blend of samak ke chawal and singhare ka aata. Try it out today!
4. Banana Lassi
It’s summertime, and what could be better than having some lassi? But to give it a healthy twist, add some bananas to it this time! All you need to do is blend some crushed bananas with your regular lassi and have it chilled. A delicious, nutritious glass will be ready in no time.
5. Paneer Bhurji
Paneer is again one such ingredient that is high in proteins. With this no-onion, no-garlic dish, you can give your favourite ordinary paneer bhurji a Navratri twist! All you have to do is swap out the salt for rock salt, and you’ve got yourself a delicious meal to enjoy. Pair it with kuttu puris!
This year, try out these recipes and let us know which one you enjoyed the most.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-10-02/China-deeply-concerned-about-Lebanon-Israel-Iran-Israel-escalation-1xnhLbc9z4A/img/fe73ed473176453b8434c75d0de1132f/fe73ed473176453b8434c75d0de1132f.png' alt='Smoke rises from the site of an Israeli air strike in Dahiyeh, Beirut, Lebanon, October 2, 2024. /CFP'
China is deeply concerned about the turmoil in the Middle East and calls on the international community, especially major countries with influence, to play a constructive role and avoid further turmoil, said the Chinese Foreign Ministry on Wednesday.
In a statement, the spokesperson for the ministry said China opposes the violation of Lebanon’s sovereignty, security and territorial integrity and opposes moves that fuel antagonism and escalate tensions.
The spokesperson made the remarks in response to a media inquiry about Israel’s launch of a ground offensive in southern Lebanon and Iran’s launch of a military attack against Israel over the past day.
China believes that the protracted fighting in Gaza is the root cause of this round of turmoil in the Middle East and all parties need to work urgently for a comprehensive and lasting ceasefire, the spokesperson said.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
ČINI se da je listopad postao mjesec u kojem mnoge tvrtke najavljuju ili planiraju predstaviti nove telefone.
Vivo X200
Očekuje se da će brend Vivo 14. listopada u Kini predstaviti svoje flagship telefone vivo X200, nakon čega bi trebalo uslijediti globalno lansiranje.
Prema pisanju GSMArene, serija telefona vivo X200 uključivat će osnovni X200, snažniji X200 Pro i kompaktni X200 Pro Mini. Dizajn i određene specifikacije novih uređaja su unaprijed otkriveni na procurjelim fotografijama.
Prema ovim fotografijama, sva tri uređaja trebala bi imati ravne okvire s blago zakrivljenim rubovima. Također, tvrtka će zadržati kružni otok za kamere, slično prethodnoj seriji. Fotografije otkrivaju i da će serija X200 zadržati Zeiss kamere.
Što se tiče boja, telefoni X200 i X200 Pro dolaze sa sjajnom stražnjom stranom u četiri boje: crnoj, bijeloj, plavoj i srebrnoj. X200 Pro Mini ima razigranije boje i mat završnu obradu, s ružičastom i zelenom kao glavnim bojama uz bijelu i crnu opciju.
Xiaomi 15
Navodno bi uskoro trebali biti najavljeni i Xiaomi 15 telefoni, a spekulira se o dva datuma – 20. i 23. listopada. Glasine o ovim telefonima kruže još od srpnja. Prema navodima GSMArene, Xiaomi 15 i 15 Pro bit će prvi pametni telefoni na svijetu koji će koristiti nadolazeći Snapdragon 8 Gen 4 čipset tvrtke Qualcomm.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Prema glasinama, Xiaomi 15 će doći sa 6.36-inčnim 1.5K zaslonom osjetljivim na dodir s osvježavanjem od 120 Hz i svjetlinom od 1400 nita. Telefon će imati do 16 GB RAM-a i do 1 TB prostora za pohranu. Baterija će navodno imati kapacitet od 4800 ili 4900 mAh, s podrškom za 100 W žično i 50 W bežično punjenje.
Imat će IP68 certifikat za otpornost na prašinu i vodu. Na stražnjoj strani navodno će se nalaziti tri kamere s rezolucijom od 50 MP, dok će prednja kamera imati 32 MP.
Xiaomi 15 Pro trebao bi zadržati istu zaštitu od prašine i vode (IP68) kao osnovni model te istu selfie kameru i maksimalne količine RAM-a i prostora za pohranu. Međutim, razlike su u zaslonu i bateriji: Xiaomi 15 Pro će navodno imati veći 6.73-inčni 2K zaslon s osvježavanjem od 120 Hz i svjetlinom od 1400 nita te snažniju bateriju od 5400 mAh s podrškom za 120 W žično i 80 W bežično punjenje.
Imat će glavnu kameru od 50 MP, ultraširokokutnu kameru također od 50 MP te kameru s 3x optičkim zumom od 50 MP s periskopskim telefoto objektivom za bolje zumiranje.
Prema navodima, početna cijena Xiaomija 15 bit će oko 600 eura, dok će najskuplji model navodno koštati oko 720 eura. Pro model će navodno imati početnu cijenu između 690 i 720 eura, a najskuplja verzija dosezat će do 820 odnosno 850 eura. Važno je napomenuti da su ovo okvirne cijene o kojima se zasad nagađa za kinesko tržište.
Honor Magic 7
Honor Magic 7 serija navodno stiže krajem mjeseca, točnije 30. listopada. Za novu seriju Honor telefona zasad nema puno informacija, ali prema navodima Huawei Centrala, vjerojatno će uključivati pet modela – Honor Magic 7, Honor Magic 7 Pro, Honor Magic 7 Pro Satellite, Honor Magic 7 Ultimate i Honor Magic 7 Porsche Design.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Navodi se da će Magic 7 serija biti opremljena Snapdragon 8 Gen 4 čipsetom i vrhunskim kamerama za impresivno iskustvo fotografiranja te da će svih pet telefona podržavati brzo žično punjenje od 100 W. Honor je potvrdio i svog prvog AI asistenta s nekoliko pametnih funkcija za ovu flagship liniju.
Očekuje se da će u narednim danima biti objavljeno više detalja i specifikacija o ovim telefonima.
Oppo Find X8
Šuška se da će Oppo, umjesto početkom iduće godine, nove flagship telefone predstaviti u studenom. Prema GSMAreni, stižu tri modela – Find X8, Find X8 Pro i Find X8 Ultra. Telefoni će navodno koristiti dva čipseta – Dimensity 9400 i Snapdragon 8 Gen 4.
Navodno će Find X8 imati ravan zaslon, dok će Find X8 Pro imati blago zakrivljene rubove. Find X8 Ultra dolazi s još kvalitetnijim zaslonom. Svi modeli navodno će imati vrhunske OLED zaslone s poboljšanom svjetlinom za jasniju sliku, čak i na jakom svjetlu.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Jurickson Profar is often overlooked, but is a key player for the Padres.
(Associated Press)
Even if the Dodgers handle Arráez, Machado, Tatis and Merrill, the Padres have other bats capable of wreaking havoc in their lineup.
Profar, an 11th-year switch-hitter who was part of the Padres’ 2022 team, had a career season as a first-time All-Star, batting .280 with 24 home runs, 85 RBIs and an .800-plus OPS from both sides of the plate, ascending to the No. 3 spot in the batting order.
Solano went from being a minor-league signing to the Padres’ primary first baseman, hitting .286 in 96 games, while another midseason minor-league addition, former Dodgers outfielder David Peralta, hit .286 as a reliable bat off the bench.
Bogaerts, the team’s $280-million signing two offseasons ago, might have had the biggest second-half turnaround, rebounding from a wretched first half — his OPS was under .600 through July 21 — by hitting .291 over his final 59 games.
About the only Padres regular who struggled late in the year was infielder Jake Cronenworth, who hit .215 after the All-Star break. Yet he still drew a team-high 31 walks in that stretch.
As far as injuries go, the only key piece the Padres are missing is Gold Glove utility man Ha-Seong Kim, who is out the rest of the year because of a shoulder injury.
Tech giant Google has decided to expand the availability of Gemini Live to all Android users. Gemini Live, a two-way voice feature for the Gemini AI chatbot, was previously available to only Gemini Advanced users with a Google One AI Premium subscription. This expansion will allow all Android users to engage in voice conversations with the AI.
Notably, only the basic version will be available in the free tier, meaning users won’t have the luxury of 10 different voices offered in the paid version.
Android users with the Gemini app will be able to see a waveform icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to the microphone and camera icons. To use the two-way communication, users need to tap on the icon, which will activate Gemini Live.
Resembling a phone call interface, the full screen includes hold and end buttons, as well as a sound wave pattern. To use the AI, users can press the hold button and ask questions or change the direction of the conversation.
In other developments related to Google Gemini: Google Gemini launched two new tools for Android that were highlighted earlier at Google I/O this year. The feature known as ‘Ask about this screen,” helps users ask queries about whatever is occurring on the screen. Another feature called ‘Ask about this video’ is also compatible with YouTube. The prompt pops up on top of the Gemini window after the user has commanded the AI assistant.
Once the user clicks on this tab a provisional screenshot is taken and then the user can type and ask their query. While the bot’s early reaction is based on the screenshot features, the user can then direct Gemini to use the internet connectivity for more information or even recapitulate a news article.
Taylor Swift’s Eras Tour has smashed records globally, raking in an astonishing $1 billion and solidifying her status as one of history’s most successful artists.
For Swifties who couldn’t snag concert tickets, there is good news: Swift clinched a deal with Disney+, ensuring the entire spectacle is viewable in top-notch quality on the service.
Yet now, another pop sensation, Olivia Rodrigo, is poised to have her tour streamed for fans as well.
Those who missed Rodrigo live are in luck, as her acclaimed GUTS World Tour is set to premiere on Netflix.
The Good 4 U singer’s extraordinary concert special, captured at LA’s Intuit Dome, will hit the streaming behemoth from October 29, offering devotees the chance to bask in the vibe of her packed-out arena tour from home, reports the Mirror.
In a heartfelt announcement, the Drivers Licence hitmaker enthused: “I am so excited to share the GUTS World Tour with my fans.
“For those of you who didn’t get a chance to rock out in-person, now you can have the best seats in the house!
“And to the fans who cheered, screamed, and danced with me, I am so glad we get to do it all over again!”
Following the launch of her sophomore album Guts, which garnered critical acclaim including a five-star review from NME, Rodrigo’s performance at London’s O2 arena also impressed, bagging a four-star write-up with the critic acknowledging: “It’s the songs that pick at the deepest wounds that resonate with tonight’s crowd.
“Vampire’s stunning build from a piano ballad to jaunty clap-back to the people who should know better is one of many howl-along moments.
“The raw regret of Drivers Licence brought her to this venue a few years ago, but now, it’s sung with both the lived experience and confidence that comes only from someone who’s moved on to even bigger and better things; there’s no denying that Rodrigo has certainly done that and will continue to do so.”
Olivia Rodrigo’s GUTS World Tour concert special will be available to stream exclusively on Netflix from October 29.
You can now use your electric Mercedes-Benz’s infotainment system to search and pay for charging instead of having to rely on your smartphone.
The German carmaker has taken its partnership with electric vehicle (EV) charging network Chargefox further as it “fully integrates” its charging services through the Mercedes me Charge service.
What this means is you can now find and navigate to any Chargefox EV charger, start the charging session, then finish and pay for the charging session using either the Mercedes-Benz’s infotainment system, Mercedes me phone app, or the Mercedes me Charge RFID card.
Previously you could navigate to a Chargefox charger using the car’s satellite navigation system, but only use either the Chargefox phone app or RFID card to start and finish the charging sessions.
This integration allows select Mercedes-Benz EV owners “seamless access” to over 2700 Chargefox charging plugs across Australia.
It’s worth noting certain new Mercedes-Benz EVs come with complimentary Chargefox subscriptions when they’re purchased. The maximum duration is up to five years but it varies from model to model.
The Mercedes me Charge service has been available in numerous other markets with other EV charging providers for years, but it’s only launching in Australia with Chargefox now.
Globally Mercedes-Benz offers access to over 1.5 million charging plugs through Mercedes me Charge in conjunction with over 1300 EV charging providers.
“Mercedes me Charge is one of the fastest-growing charging networks,” said Mercedes-Benz Mobility AG CEO Franz Reiner in January 2024.
“In 2023, an average of 40,000 charging points were integrated every month. By doing so, we provide our customers a comprehensive network featuring transparent prices and easy access.
“Mercedes me Charge fulfils essential customer needs for public charging.”
“We are thrilled to collaborate with one of the world’s most prestigious automakers to bring seamless charging solutions to their drivers,” said Chargefox CEO John Sullivan.
“This partnership highlights how an Australian innovator like Chargefox can work hand-in-hand with an industry giant to enhance the electric vehicle ownership and charging experience.”
While many state finance ministers have agreed to the three GST slab structure, states like Kerala, Karnataka and West Bengal are in favour of maintaining the current rates. (Representative/Shutterstock)
While the ministerial committee is not in favour of reducing GST rates from four to three, it may reassign items in the 12% bracket to either the 5% or 18% slabs
The ministerial level committee formed to rationalize GST rates can provide a huge relief to consumers. GST rates of several medicines, insurance and tractors are expected to go down to 5% by next month.
Currently, tractors attract 12% or 28% GST, depending on their classification. The reduced revenue from tractors can be compensated by increasing the GST rate on expensive electric vehicles (EVs).
There is also a possibility of reduction in GST rates on health and term insurance. GST on health insurance can be reduced from 18% to 12%, while term insurance is expected to attract 5% GST.
Though the demand for zero GST on term insurance has been rising for some time, this may lead to loss of input tax credit to insurance companies. Hence, the proposal of 5% GST on term insurance is considered appropriate.
According to a report in the Times of India, the ministerial level committee is not in favor of changing the four rates of GST to three. However, it may reduce the number of items which attract 12% GST. While some items may be placed in 5% slab, others can be shifted to the 18% slab.
The committee will come out with its recommendations by the end of October. A meeting will be held on October 19 to discuss GST rates on insurance. On October 20, another meeting has been scheduled for item-specific discussion on rate rationalization.
While many state finance ministers have agreed to the three slab structure, states like Kerala, Karnataka and West Bengal are in favour of maintaining the current rates.
According to reports, Kerala Finance Minister K N Balagopal is hesitant about reducing the GST rates owing to the state’s weak financial condition.
The global crypto market is facing heavy selling pressure, driven by rising geopolitical tensions and large ETF outflows, just as many were expecting a bullish October. Bitcoin, in particular, has dropped over $5,000 from its recent high of $66,000. However, a key moment is approaching as a crypto analyst points to crucial support levels that could determine whether BTC will see a major breakout or Breakdown.
Bitcoin Price To Drop $52k
Prominent crypto chart analyst Ali Martinez has recently pointed out a potential bearish pattern forming in Bitcoin’s price movement, which could lead to a significant drop.
According to Martinez, Bitcoin might fall as low as $52,000 if the current price action continues to follow the pattern of a descending parallel channel. This pattern, suggests that Bitcoin’s price moves within two downward-sloping parallel lines. Each time the price hits the upper line, it faces resistance and tends to drop toward the lower line, which acts as support.
As long as the price stays within these boundaries, the asset tends to follow a bearish trend. However, if Bitcoin manages to break out of the channel, it could signal a bullish reversal, pushing the price upward instead.
Bitcoin Rally Towards $130K?
On the flip side, another crypto analyst Mags believes that Bitcoin could be on the verge of a significant price surge, potentially pushing its value to an impressive $130,000.
According to Mags, Bitcoin’s price is in the process of forming the right shoulder, which could push it to rally soon. This rally could send Bitcoin’s price toward the $130,000 mark if the pattern is completed successfully.
If Bitcoin follows the trajectory suggested by the inverse H&S pattern, this could be a significant moment for the cryptocurrency, given that Bitcoin has struggled to gain strong upward momentum recently.
If Chinese retail investors had their way they would forgo the seven-day National Day holiday that ends on October 7th. An aggressive stimulus package, announced in Beijing on September 24th, has unleashed the biggest stockmarket rally the country has witnessed in more than 15 years. Major indices have soared more than 25%; the Shanghai stock exchange has suffered glitches under the volume of buying activity. The prospect of halting for a full week has made netizens anxious: “We must keep trading; we must cancel National Day,” one young investor screamed into a video widely shared on WeChat, a social-media platform.
Looking for moreWordle answers? Click here for our daily Wordle hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Connections and Strands puzzles.
There are plenty of other online word games now, but I still play the New York Times Wordle game every day. These days, it’s not only an old friend, it’s also a nice warm-up for Connections, Strands and the rest.
Also, we’ve ranked all the letters in the alphabet by popularity, if you want to use this list to decide on your best start words.
Everyday Wordle tips
I’ve written a lot about Wordle — from covering its 1,000th word to my list of the best starter words to a helpful two-step strategy to news about controversial word changes. I’ve even rounded up what I learned playing the hit online word puzzle for a full year. If you’re rethinking your need for the actual answer, you might try tips from one of those stories.
Still need a starter word? One person told me they just look around and choose a five-letter object that they’ve spotted to use as their starter word — such as COUCH or CHAIR. I tend to stick to starter words that have the most popular letters used in English words. I like TRAIN as a starter, though I have a friend who uses TRAIL. I’ve read that people use the financial term ROATE, but I like to use words I actually know.
What is Wordle?
If you read this far, you know how to play. You have six chances to guess a five-letter word, and the game gives you feedback as to whether the letters you’ve guessed are in the puzzle or not, and if they’re in the same spot where you guessed they are. The New York Times bought the game from creator Josh Wardle for seven figures in 2022. Wardle famously created the game for his partner, and let her narrow down the 12,000 five-letter words in the English language to just 2,500, creating the database of answers. It was convenient, too, that he has a name that plays off “word.”
A Times spokesperson told me it lists the very first Wordle as appearing on June 19, 2021, and the paper celebrated the game’s 1,000th word on March 15. Spoiler: That 1,000th word was ERUPT. As in, “Dad will erupt if the Wordle is so tough he loses his streak.”
Today’s Wordle hints
Before we show you today’s Wordle answer, we’ll give you some hints. If you don’t want a spoiler, look away now.
Wordle hint No. 1: Repeats
Today’s Wordle answer has no repeated letters.
Wordle hint No. 2: Vowels
There are two vowels in today’s Wordle answer.
Wordle hint No. 3: First letter
Today’s Wordle answer begins with the letter W.
Wordle hint No. 4: On Broadway
Today’s Wordle answer is in the title of a Broadway musical that became a movie starring Lee Marvin and Clint Eastwood,
Wordle hint No. 5: Meaning
Today’s Wordle answer can refer to a vehicle used by American settlers and drawn by oxen, horses or mules.
TODAY’S WORDLE ANSWER
Today’s Wordle answer is WAGON.
Yesterday’s Wordle answer
Yesterday’s Wordle answer, Oct. 2, No. 1201, was SHELL.
Gardening could help aging adults stay sharp later in life, according to a recent study published in the Journal of Environmental Psychology.
Researchers at the University of Edinburgh in Scotland found that tending to gardens at an older age is associated with “small but detectable cognitive benefits.”
The long-term study tracked participants who shared details of their lifestyles and completed “frequent assessments” of their thinking skills up to age 90.
ELLEN DEGENERES HAS OSTEOPOROSIS: HERE’S WHAT TO KNOW ABOUT THE PAINFUL BONE CONDITION
The “Lothian Birth Cohort 1921” study followed people who were born in the Edinburgh area, starting at age 11. The participants regularly took an intelligence test known as the Scottish Mental Survey of 1932.
People who gardened frequently or occasionally showed “greater lifetime improvement in cognitive ability,” the results found.(iStock)
Hundreds of participants sat for the same exam at age 79.
Out of 467 participants, 31% had never gardened, while 43% gardened regularly.
The results revealed that the 280 who gardened frequently or occasionally showed “greater lifetime improvement in cognitive ability compared with those who never gardened or rarely did so.”
OZEMPIC PUSH FOR SENIORS? SOME DOCTORS SAY MORE PEOPLE AGE 65 AND OVER SHOULD BE ON IT
Between the ages of 79 and 90, the participants’ cognitive ability — including memory, problem-solving and word fluency — declined in general, but the researchers found that the “earlier advantage of gardeners endured.”
The results revealed that the 280 who gardened frequently or occasionally showed “greater lifetime improvement in cognitive ability compared with those who never gardened or rarely did so.”(iStock)
Study co-author Dr. Janie Corley wrote in a press release how identifying behaviors that “facilitate healthy cognitive aging are of major public interest for the prevention of cognitive decline and dementia.”
For more Health articles, visit foxnews.com/health
“Gardening is a key leisure activity in late adulthood,” she said. “Engaging in gardening projects, learning about plants and general garden upkeep involve complex cognitive processes, such as memory and executive function.”
She continued, “Consistent with the ‘use it or lose it’ framework of cognitive function, more engagement in gardening may be directly associated with a lower risk of cognitive decline.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Dr. Azza Halim, MD, an anti-aging specialist, noted that gardening has been studied as an anti-aging activity for seniors, providing physical, mental and emotional benefits, including for longevity and cognition.
“It is important to engage in physical and social activities to maintain youthfulness,” an expert said.(iStock)
Gardening also counts as “low-impact exercise” that is beneficial for cardiac health and circulation, the physician added.
“It provides mental stimulation to reduce cognitive decline, as well as fostering mental and emotional well-being, relaxation and decreased anxiety,” she said.
“At any age, it is important to engage in physical and social activities to maintain youthfulness — and more so in later years to stave off high blood pressure, depression, weight gain and cognitive decline.”
“Engaging in gardening projects … involves complex cognitive processes.”
The researchers noted that their work cannot prove a direct correlation between gardening and improved cognitive ability, as factors like available greenery and social interactions could have impacted these results.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The study is supported by the Biotechnology and Biological Sciences Research Council and the Chief Scientist Office of the Scottish Executive Health Department.
Fox News Digital reached out to the researchers for comment.
Angelica Stabile is a lifestyle reporter for Fox News Digital.
The air is crisp now, with a festive spirit settling in every passing day. Why? Sharad Navratri 2024 is right around the corner, celebrated by praying to the nine forms of goddess Durga, observing fasts, participating in Garba dances and Pandal hopping. Food is a special element during Navratri festivities, and many people give up eating meat, onion, garlic and alcohol during these nine days. Well, along with the abstinence, comes some delightful pure vegetarian dishes people especially eat this time of the year. If you are looking for a place to enjoy a delicious Navratri thali, look no further. Here is a list of restaurants offering delicious Navratri thalis and meals this Sharad Navratri 2024:
Restaurants You Must Visit This Sharad Navratri 2024 For Delicious Vrat-Friendly Thalis And Special Navratri Menus:
Delhi-NCR
Cross Avenue, Radisson Blu
Photo Credit: Cross Avenue, Radisson Blu
This Navratri, Cross Avenue at Radisson Blu Greater Noida is all set to elevate your festive experience with a specially curated Navratri Thali. Designed to meet the dietary preferences of those observing the sacred Navratri fasts, the special thali by Chef Anuj Kapoor offers a delicious blend of flavours while keeping in line with traditional fasting guidelines.
The delectable thali includes Kesari Lassi, Khatta Meetha Ananaas Phaldhari, Kale chana ka thecha, til mirchi ke safed aloo, Mewe aur Mawe ka paneer, Lauki aur Badam ka halwa. The Navratri Thali features a variety of delicacies, carefully crafted with premium ingredients to ensure that every bite is both delicious and in line with fasting traditions. Each dish has been thoughtfully prepared to balance taste, nutrition, and the festive spirit.
Where: Cross Avenue, Radisson Blu Greater Noida
When: 3rd October to 12th October from 07:30 PM – 11:30 PM
Cost for thali: Rs 999 plus taxes
Yeti – The Himalayan Kitchen
Photo Credit: Yeti – The Himalayan Kitchen
Yeti – The Himalayan Kitchen, the go-to destination for authentic Himalayan cuisine, is delighted to announce the launch of a specially curated Navratri Thali at its Connaught Place outlet, in celebration of the auspicious Navratri festival. The Navratri Thali is a thoughtfully prepared, sattvik meal that adheres to fasting guidelines while delivering the distinct taste and textures that Yeti is known for. The exclusive thali curated by Corporate Chef Anil Bangwal includes kuttu ke atte ki poori, Aloo Rassedar, Sabudana Papad, Roasted Makhana and Sama ki kheer.
Where: Yeti- The Himalayan Kitchen, Connaught Place
When: 3rd October to 12th October 2024
Cost for thali: Rs 655 plus taxes
Sambarpot
Photo Credit: Sambarpot
Come celebrate this Navratri with Sambarpot, with a wide array of lip-smacking entrees. Sambarpot, the iconic South Indian restaurant nestled in the heart of Delhi NCR region celebrates this delightful Occasion with Sambarpot Special Navratri Thali where you enjoy 3 different types of thali.
Where: i-1A, Ground Floor, 2, Road, Central Market, Lajpat Nagar II, Lajpat Nagar, New Delhi, Delhi 110024
Bobachee
Photo:Bobachee
Bobachee Restaurant proudly introduces its specially curated Navratra menu, offering a delightful range of fasting-friendly dishes that blend tradition with contemporary flavours. The menu features refreshing soups like Watermelon Gazpacho and Sago Soup, followed by a selection of delicious starters including Sabudana Cutlet, Sweet Potato Chaat, Roasted Makhana, and Raw Banana Cutlet. Options like Fresh Fruit Chaat and Potato Wafers are also available for those craving something lighter. The main course presents a variety of wholesome dishes such as Sabudana Khichri, Arbi Curry, Satvik Aloo Tamatar Ki Sabji, and Rajgira Kadhi, along with sides like Beetroot Raita and Cucumber Raita. Guests can also enjoy traditional breads like Kuttu Ki Poori and end their meal with indulgent sweets like Sabudana Kheer and Fruit with Ice Cream.
Where: 3rd Floor, D Block, D-14, South Extension II, Delhi, 110049
Westin Sohna Resort & Spa
Photo:Westin Sohna Resort & Spa
This Navratri, Westin Sohna Resort & Spa invites you to indulge in a specially curated Navratri Bhog Thali, offering a delightful blend of authentic and festive flavours. The Navratri Bhog Thali begins with a fresh and flavorful Shakarkand Ki Chaat, setting the stage for an array of delectable dishes. For starters, enjoy the crispy goodness of Sabudana Vada and Kutta Aur Aloo Ke Pakode. The main course features classic Navratri dishes, including Aloo Moongphali, Kaddu Ki Sabzi, and Dahi Wale Singhade. These traditional flavours are complemented by Sabudana Ki Khichdi and Kuttu Ki Poori. Accompaniments such as Kheere Ka Raita, Dahi, and Sabudana Papad add a perfect balance to the thali, while desserts like Badam Ka Halwa and Sabudana Kheer provide a sweet ending to your festive feast. Cut fruits are also available for a light and refreshing touch.
Where: Westin Sohna Resort and Spa
When: 15th October to 23rd October 2024
Cost for thali: Rs 1299 plus taxes per person
Gulati Restaurant
Photo: Gulati Restaurant
Gulati Restaurant, one of those eateries that started the concept of the Navratri food fiesta in Delhi around 33 years back, is making no exception this year. From Navratra Khas Thali to Navratra Khas Platter to Chaat Platter to Shakarkandi Galouti to Sabudana Bhel Puri to Sabudana Tikki to Kuttu ki puri, Malai Kofta Punjabi to Kele ki sabzi to Paneer Makhani to Badam Thandai to Sanwak Kheer, they are serving more than 40 Navratra Delicacies for fasting made without onion and garlic.
Regular Al-a-carte dishes are also available for one to enjoy. Non-vegetarian food is strictly abstained from during this time at both the outlets, so they make it a point that the food served to the customers is completely pure, and so, a day before the commencement of the festival they make sure all the utensils are properly cleaned and their kitchen is completely steered off non-vegetarian food, garlic and onions.
Where: 6, Pandara Road Market, New Delhi – 110003 (Pandara Outlet) and Upper Ground Floor, Mega Mall, Sec 28, Golf Course Road, Gurugram, 122002 (Gurugram Outlet)
When: 3rd October to 11th October
Dana Choga
Dana Choga, a beloved name synonymous with North Indian culinary greatness, is set to make this Navratri even more flavourful with its specially curated Navratri Thali. What makes this thali truly special is the attention to detail in ingredient selection. Sendha Namak (Rock Salt) replaces regular salt, and Singhare ki Poori, made from Singhara Atta (Water Chestnut Flour), shines as a healthier and more flavourful alternative to the commonly used Kuttu Atta (Buckwheat Flour). This wholesome dish is paired perfectly with Aloo Paneer Cutlets, Paneer Tamatri, Jeera Aloo, Pineapple Raita, and the delightful Kesari Coconut Laddoo for a satisfying end to the meal.
Beyond the traditional thali, Dana Choga offers a few extras for those looking to relish further. The menu features fan favourites like Paneer Tikka Makhmali and a second helping of Singhare Pooris. This ensures that every guest can discover something to enjoy during their Navratri celebrations.
Where: Across all Dana Choga outlets in Delhi and NCR
When: 3rd to 11th October, 2024
Cost for thali: Rs 425
Andaz Delhi, by Hyatt
This Navratri, indulge in an authentic experience like no other at AnnaMaya, the modern food hall at Andaz Delhi. This year’s Navratri thali is a testament to tradition and innovation. The highlights of the thali are ‘Falahari Shakarkandi Ki Chaat’, a refreshing blend of sweet potatoes with creamy yoghurt, ‘Kacche Kele Ki Shammi’, a delectable mix of raw banana, paired with potato, cardamom and green chilli, ‘Pethe Ki Khati Meethi Sabzi’, a tangy and sweet pumpkin preparation with tamarind and ghee, ‘Makhana Moongphali Ki Kadhi’, fox nuts and peanuts simmered in a lightly spiced yellow curry, and ‘Samak Chawal’, which is nothing but Barnyard millet cooked to perfection. The chefs have also curated divine Satvik desserts that perfectly conclude the meal, such as ‘Makhana Kheer’ and ‘Badam Gulab Ki Barfi’, a rich almond barfi infused with rose petals and milk. To complement the meal, guests can pair their Thali with refreshing beverages like Lassi or Chach.
Where: AnnaMaya, Andaz Delhi
When: 3rd October to 12th October 2024, the Thali is served during both lunch and dinner.
Cost for thali: Rs 2000 plus taxes per person
Mumbai
ITC Maratha’s Peshwa Pavilion
As the city lights up with the vibrant hues of Navratri, ITC Maratha’s Peshwa Pavilion invites you on a celestial culinary journey with its divine Navratri Thali. The Navratri Thali offers an array of fasting-friendly dishes, perfect for celebrating the festival with flavour. Imagine savouring the comforting embrace of Kaddu ki sabzi, the delightful crunch of Kuttu ki poori, Samak ke Chawal and the velvety richness of dahi wali aloo. Treat your tastebuds with Rajgira Laddoo or Shakarkandi chaat.
This Navratri, Sofitel Mumbai BKC, the elegant luxury hotel in Mumbai’s Bandra Kurla Complex, invites guests to embark on a culinary journey of traditional flavours with its specially curated Navratri Thali. Available at Tuskers, the hotel’s speciality vegetarian restaurant, this thali promises a delightful experience for your palate and soul. The Navratri Thali features Sabudana Vada, Kuttu Ke Pakode, and Farali Pattice for starters. The main course includes flavorful dishes like Aloo Peanut Bhaji, Suran Ka Bhaji, Rajgiri Kadhi, Sama Ka Khichdi, and Sabudana Khichdi. Accompaniments include Dahiwala Arvi, Indian breads like Singada Ka Poori and Kuttu Ki Roti, along with refreshing salads of mixed cut fruits, sweet curd, and Khajur ka Chutney. For a sweet ending, guests can savour desserts like Paneer Makhana Kheer and Shakarkand Ka Halwa.
Where: Tuskers, Sofitel Mumbai BKC, C 57, G Block BKC, Bandra Kurla Complex, Bandra East, Mumbai – 400051
When: October 3rd to 12th, 2024, 12 pm – 3:00 pm
Cost for thali: Rs 2750++ per person
Bengaluru
Renaissance Bengaluru Race Course Hotel
Photo Credit: Renaissance Bengaluru Race Course Hotel
Invite the blessings of Goddess Durga and celebrate this Navratri with a hearty thali-style feast at Renaissance Bengaluru Race Course Hotel. The specially crafted delicacies Paneer Makhana, Kaju Makhana, Kuttu Puri, Sabudana Wada, Makhana Payasam honour authenticity and promise a wholesome meal. Every dish tells the story of age-old customs while every bite is a burst of flavors that delight your palate. Gather your loved ones and head over to Lush for an unforgettable Navratri.
Where: Lush, Renaissance Bengaluru Race Course Hotel
When: October 3rd – October 12th, 7:00 PM-11:00 PM
Price: INR 1200 + per person
Salt Indian Restaurant
Photo Credit: Salt Indian Restaurant
Salt Indian Restaurant proudly presents a meticulously curated Navratri Special Menu. The special vegetarian menu, designed without onion and garlic, ensures that guests can celebrate the festival while enjoying an exquisite dining experience. Begin the journey with refreshing Tokri Chaat, a chaat basket filled with sweet potato, papdi, peanut, chutneys, and yogurt, or savour the delicate Beetroot Galouti Kebab, a melt-in-the-mouth treat with a beetroot and cheese filling. Other starters include the crispy Lotus Stem Bezule and the hearty Warm Barley & Avocado Salad.
For the main course, guests can have flavourful curries such as the indulgent Palak Corn Kofta Curry or the Aloo Kale Chane Rasedar served with fluffy pooris. Other highlights include the Navratri Subzi Korma and the festive favourite Foxtail Millet and Lentil Khichdi, topped with grilled paneer tikka. To complete the experience, the dessert section features Chironji Aur Makhane Ki Kheer and Malpua with Rabdi, served with vanilla ice cream.
Where: Salt Indian Restaurant
When: 4th October to 13th October 2024
Radisson Blu
Photo:Radisson Blu
Radisson Blu, Bengaluru Outer Ring Road invites guests to elevate their fasting experience this Navratri with the specially curated Upvas Thali at its renowned North Indian restaurant, Saffron. The thali includes a refreshing Papaya aur Kele ki Lassi as a welcome drink, followed by an assortment of Navratra condiments, Sabudana Papad, Aloo Tikki, Paneer Aloo Roll, Sabudana Khichdi, Kadhu ki Subzi, Plain Dahi or Cucumber Raita, Kuttu ki Poori or Kuttu ka Chila, and Sawang ke Chawal ka Pulao. The meal is beautifully rounded off with a fresh Fruit Salad and indulgent Apple Kheer.
Where: Radisson Blu, Bengaluru, Outer Ring Road, 90/4, Outer Ring Road, Marathahalli Village, Marathahalli, Bengaluru, Karnataka 560037
When: October 3rd to 12th
Cost for thali: Rs 1250 + taxes per person
Multiple Cities
Punjab Grill
Photo:Punjab Grill
As the nine-day festival of Navratri unfolds across India, many embrace the joy of satvik cuisine, opting for pure, wholesome foods that nourish the body and soul. For those fasting or seeking to indulge in a pure, nourishing spread, Punjab Grill’s Navratri Thali offers the perfect choice, offering a delectable and satisfying feast. The thali features an array of delectable dishes such as Khoya Paneer Makahana, Anari Shahi Jeera Aloo, Khatta Meetha Kaddu, and Chironji Ki Dal. The light and fluffy Samak Rice, a fasting staple, pairs perfectly with these dishes, accompanied by crispy and delicate Sabudana Papad for added crunch. For dessert, the thali offers the indulgent Dudh Halwa and the fragrant Kesari Rasmalai. In addition to the Navratri Thali, Punjab Grill is offering an exclusive pure vegetarian menu* during the festival at its restaurants in Kanpur, Indore, Lucknow and Ahmedabad.
*All vegetarian menu is available only in select restaurants at these cities.
Where: Punjab Grill in cities including Delhi, Gurgaon, Faridabad, Noida, Ghaziabad, Ludhiana, Mohali, Chandigarh, Lucknow, Kanpur, Mumbai, Pune, Ahmedabad
When: 3rd October to 12th October
Cost for Thali: Rs 999+ taxes
Rajdhani – The Vegetarian Thali Restaurant
Photo:Rajdhani – The Vegetarian Thali Restaurant
This Navratri, experience the festival like never before as Rajdhani, the iconic vegetarian dining destination, brings you the ultimate feast for your fasts! Rajdhani’s Upwas Thali is a grand spread of fasting-friendly dishes that rotate daily, ensuring each visit is a delightful surprise. Expect crispy Sabudana Vada, flavorful Farali Pattice, Samo Rice with Tomato Dal, Kele ki Sabji, and sweet endings like Fruit Shrikhand and Sabudana Kheer. Every bite is a celebration of Navratri!
Where: Available at all Rajdhani outlets across India – Mumbai, Pune, Bangalore, Chennai
When: 3rd October to 12th October 2024
Cost for thali: Rs. 699 (taxes extra)
Cafe Delhi Heights
Photo:Cafe Delhi Heights
Cafe Delhi Heights is thrilled to announce the launch of its exclusive Navratri menu. The highlight of the offering is the Navratri Thali. The thali includes signature items such as Sabudana Khichdi, a delicious take on the traditional pulao; Makhanwala Paneer, prepared in a creamy gravy of tomatoes and spices; and Chatpata Aloo Chaat, a spicy and flavorful potato dish balanced with cumin seeds. Other delicacies include Kuttu Ki Roti, Seb aur Anar Ka Raita, and the decadent Phalahari Kheer.
To complement the thali, Cafe Delhi Heights also offers a variety of a la carte options, such as the rich and sweet Kesari Malai Mawa Lassi, and the refreshing Phalahaar.
Where: All outlets Pan India
When: October 3rd to 12th
Cost for thali: Rs 595+ taxes
Enjoy tasty Navratri foods this Sharad Navratri and immerse yourselves in the festive spirit. Happy Navratri 2024!
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-10-02/news-1xnmC6Im59K/img/5ce07d1dbd044d49b8816994a46615c2/5ce07d1dbd044d49b8816994a46615c2.png' alt='An Israeli air strike hits an area in southern Lebanon as seen from northern Israel, October 2, 2024. /CFP'
An Israeli soldier was killed in combat in Lebanon, the Israel Defense Forces (IDF) said on Wednesday, following an incursion by the Israel army across the border earlier this week to target Hezbollah positions.
Twenty-two-year-old Captain Eitan Itzhak Oster “fell during a battle with Hezbollah operatives in a village in southern Lebanon,” the IDF said in a statement.
The captain is the first fatality of Israel’s ground operation in Lebanon.
Paris Fashion Week has been full of notable runway looks, striking faces and scenic backdrops. Here are some of the best things our photographer has seen so far.
Marketed as a biosimilar to Stelara, approval of Otulfi was based on clinical data demonstrating comparable efficacy in treating inflammatory conditions such as Crohn disease, ulcerative colitis, moderate to severe plaque psoriasis, and active psoriatic arthritis.
Even the name Jellicle cat can spark that childlike curiosity. What on earth is a Jellicle cat and where can I get one? Unfortunately, you can only get one in your dreams or in your own imagination when reading literature—these cats are a human-crafted concept by the poet T.S. Eliot.
In this article, we will explain all you want to know about the Jellicle cat so you can brush up on your English history.
Where Was the Term “Jellicle Cat” Used?
In 1933, Jellicle cats were mentioned by T.S. Eliot in his poem “Five-Finger Exercises.” It was a short excerpt leaving readers to wonder more about what exactly a Jellicle cat is. It was later revisited when Eliot went further in the poem, “The Song of the Jellicles.”
So, T.S. Eliot gave birth to the idea that has lived on through the ages, becoming a classic of mass proportions.
Image Credit: ANURAK PONGPATIMET, Shutterstock
“The Song of the Jellicles” Poem by T.S. Eliot
Jellicle Cats come out tonight, Jellicle Cats come one come all: The Jellicle Moon is shining bright— Jellicles come to the Jellicle Ball.
Jellicle Cats are black and white, Jellicle Cats are rather small; Jellicle Cats are merry and bright, And pleasant to hear when they caterwaul. Jellicle Cats have cheerful faces, Jellicle Cats have bright black eyes; They like to practise their airs and graces And wait for the Jellicle Moon to rise.
Jellicle Cats develop slowly, Jellicle Cats are not too big; Jellicle Cats are roly-poly, They know how to dance a gavotte and a jig. Until the Jellicle Moon appears They make their toilette and take their repose: Jellicles wash behind their ears, Jellicles dry between their toes.
Jellicle Cats are white and black, Jellicle Cats are of moderate size; Jellicle Cats jump like a jumping-jack, Jellicle Cats have moonlit eyes. They’re quiet enough in the morning hours, They’re quiet enough in the afternoon, Reserving their terpsichorean powers To dance by the light of the Jellicle Moon.
Jellicle Cats are black and white, Jellicle Cats (as I said) are small; If it happens to be a stormy night They will practise a caper or two in the hall. If it happens the sun is shining bright You would say they had nothing to do at all: They are resting and saving themselves to be right For the Jellicle Moon and the Jellicle Ball.
Other Mentions of Jellicle Cats Throughout History
Jellicle cats were originally mentioned in the 1933 poem “Five-Finger Exercises.” In this, they were described as being black and white, scruffy, and friendly. The poem doesn’t leave out canines, either, with the mention of Pollicle Dogs.
Pollicle dogs are a play on “poor little dogs” and Jellicle cats are “dear little cats.”
Jellicle Cats might have originally come from T.S. Eliot’s imagination. However, they were adopted by the 1981 production of the musical Cats written by Andrew Lloyd Webber. In this production, they veer away from the traditional black and white and instead carry a variety of coat colors and personalities.
In 1986, the movie Logan’s Run features the purchase of Jellicle cats, interestingly enough.
Moving on to 2017, there was a published picture book by Faber and Faber featuring the “Song of the Jellicles” with the standalone poem therein.
Madame Tussauds New York features wax representations of Jellicle cats since 2019, including Grizabella—the theme song performer in Cats.
So, you can see how impactful the concept of Jellicle cats has been on pop culture.
The Jellicle Cat Rescue Foundation
There is a rescue foundation named after the infamous fictional Jellicle cats. Jellicle Cats Rescue Foundation is a 501c3 non-profit organization in Long Beach, California.
They perform TNR, which stands for trap, neuter, and release to cut down on the reproduction of homeless cats. They spread awareness about responsible pet ownership to cut down on the homelessness epidemic that is rampant in their county and across the world.
You can also adopt cats through this program. If you can’t, you can always gather resources and other information from the foundation.
There Is No Jellicle Cat Breed
Unfortunately, no cat breed has ever been named after the infamous Jellicle cat. It’s possible that one day in the future, a breed could develop adapting this name in memory of T.S. Eliot’s works. However, you can’t own a Jellicle cat for yourself in the present day.
Conclusion
Now you know more about these fictional historical cats. It really is a wonder how our domestic pets have inspired such creativity in human consciousness. Jellicle cats will live on through the writings, productions, teachings, and memories of folks familiar with the old works.
One thing is for sure—every cat lover wishes they could have their very own fictional Jellicle cat.
See Also:
Featured Image Credit: Impact Photography, Shutterstock
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
NEW Balance udružio se s Jackom Harlowom 2022., kad je američki reper postao ambasador brenda. Tek sada, odnosno dvije godine kasnije, došlo je do prve suradnje. Prvi dizajn kojim se pozabavio Jack Harlow bit će predstavljen modelom New Balance 1906R.
Nadahnute ružama i romantikom
Tenisice će biti dostupne u novoj kombinaciji boja naziva Rose Runner. Model je nadahnut ružama te je uz roza i zelene tonove ukrašen cvjetnim motivima. Ulošci imaju nacrtane mušku i žensku osobu koje vjerojatno predstavljaju ljubavni par. Reper je tenisice predstavio na svojem Instagramu kroz dvije objave.
“Dobre su”, “Trebam ih”, “Kao crveni kupus”, “Jedva čekam kupiti svoj par”, “Prošla su 523 dana, Jack”, “Obožavam ih”, glase neki od komentara na njegove objave.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Iako je Harlow tek nedavno objavio fotografije tenisica, one su viđene na Instagramu Fkz sneakers još u svibnju te su naišle na pozitivne reakcije. Mnoge je zanimalo kad će biti dostupne u prodaji: “Bolesno”, “Kad stižu?”, “Trebam datum lansiranja”, “Tako su lijepe”, “Recite nam kad.”
Cijena tenisica još uvijek nije poznata, a bit će dostupne za prodaju preko New Balance stranice i kod odabranih trgovaca od 4. listopada.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Three days after the Angels concluded the worst season in franchise history, their fans faced a new and urgent concern: Would they be able to watch their team on television next season?
The answer appears to be yes, and probably in the same way they did this season. On Wednesday, however, the parent company of Bally Sports indicated that it was prepared to step away from broadcasting games of the Angels and all but one other team.
A federal bankruptcy court has the final say, so nothing is definitive for now, and the Angels and Major League Baseball declined to comment. Here are questions and answers about what we do know.
What is happening in court, and what is happening with the Angels?
Bally filed for bankruptcy 19 months ago. Its latest plan to get out of bankruptcy could involve walking away from contracts for all teams besides the Atlanta Braves. It does not preclude other teams from negotiating new contracts that would save Bally millions in rights fees.
For the Angels, that is Plan A. The team is in discussion with Bally to restructure its current deal. The Angels would surrender some guaranteed revenue in order to avoid the financial uncertainty of a streaming-first future.
If the Angels do not reach a restructured deal with Bally, would I be able to watch the Angels on television next year?
Almost certainly. MLB could deliver the games as it now does for the San Diego Padres, Arizona Diamondbacks and Colorado Rockies: offering a streaming option while cutting deals with cable and satellite companies. As an example, the Padres’ monthly streaming price this year was $19.99.
Could the Angels explore other options?
They could. The Ducks, for instance, are offering a free streaming option as well as 65 free, over-the-air games on Channel 11 or Channel 13. The Ducks are one of several NBA and NHL teams sacrificing revenue — at least in the short term — in exchange for the ability to reach any fan in their local market.
Where does MLB stand?
Unlike the NBA and NHL, MLB has urged its teams not to take a new Bally’s deal at a significant discount.
MLB long has hoped to launch a national streaming package, provided the league could secure streaming rights for a critical mass of its 30 teams.
The Bally strategy could push MLB in that direction. The plan unveiled Wednesday would free 11 teams from any ties to Bally.
With three other MLB teams recently dropped by another broadcast company, that could give the league the opportunity to market streaming rights to roughly half its teams at once.
One party that might be interested in those rights: ESPN, for its ESPN+ service. ESPN reportedly is thinking about whether to renew or renegotiate its national MLB package — highlighted by Sunday Night Baseball, the Home Run Derby and wild-card games — and streaming rights could be a lure to retain ESPN.
If the Angels and other teams return to Bally or go elsewhere, that could complicate the MLB plans, depending on the terms of those deals. Generally, regional sports networks only offer streaming rights to subscribers. Last season, five MLB teams — not including the Angels — had granted Bally the rights to stream their games to non-subscribers.
Would the Dodgers be part of a national streaming package?
Almost certainly not. The Dodgers’ record $8.35-billion contract with SportsNet LA extends through 2038.
The Dodgers and other large-market teams that own local cable channels — including the New York Yankees (YES), the Boston Red Sox (NESN) and Chicago Cubs (Marquee) — stand to make much more money on their own. It is unlikely that small-market clubs would agree to pay the billions it would take to buy out the big-bucks teams, even if those teams agreed to entertain a buyout offer.
What is the Angels’ current television deal?
In 2011, what was then called Fox Sports had lost the Lakers to Time Warner Cable, and the Dodgers’ television rights were about to hit the market. Angels owner Arte Moreno brilliantly leveraged that situation, opting out of a Fox Sports contract worth $500 million and signing a new one worth $3 billion.
That contract, inherited by Bally, remains in effect at the moment. The Angels were owed $112 million in rights fees from Bally in 2023, according to Moreno. The team generated an estimated $407 million in total revenue that year, according to Sportico.
The uncertainty over what might happen to about 28% of the team’s revenue could dampen the amount Moreno might approve in player spending over the coming winter.
What has commissioner Rob Manfred said about teams that have lost their regional sports network?
“We think that reach is a really important change,” Manfred said at the All-Star Game in July.
“San Diego is kind of the leader in the clubhouse there, approaching 40,000 subscribers, which is a really good number. Having said that, from a revenue perspective, it is not generating what the RSNs did. The RSNs were a great business. Lots of people paid for programming they didn’t necessarily want, and it’s hard to replicate that kind of revenue.”
In 2023, the league guaranteed that any team losing its local television deal would retain at least 80% of the revenue from that deal, with MLB making up any shortfall. Is that guarantee still in effect?
Super Plastronics Pvt Ltd (SPPL) has invested Rs 50 crore to set up a new manufacturing unit at its existing Noida plant. According to Avneet Singh Marwah, CEO of Super Plastronics Pvt Ltd (SPPL), an exclusive brand licensee of Thomson in India, the company will produce half a million units in a year. Marwah also said that SPPL along with the brand Thomson, is now eyeing to capture 8 per cent market share in the smart TV segment in the coming 2 years.
Here are the edited experts of the interview.
What are some of the latest trends in the smart TV segment?
The Indian smart TV market is undergoing a dynamic transformation, characterized by several notable trends. Consumers are increasingly gravitating towards high-resolution displays, with 4K TVs becoming standard and an emerging interest in 8K models. Advanced features like AI integration and voice assistants such as Google Assistant are enhancing user interactions and smart home connectivity. Affordable smart TV options are expanding, driven by intense competition among brands, making advanced technologies more accessible. Additionally, improvements in display technologies like OLED and QLED, along with the integration of popular streaming services and content partnerships, are elevating the viewing experience. The market is also witnessing a rise in features tailored for gaming and sports, reflecting shifting consumer preferences. Furthermore, there is a growing emphasis on sustainability, with manufacturers adopting eco-friendly practices and energy-efficient technologies. These trends collectively illustrate a vibrant and rapidly evolving smart TV landscape in India.
Thomson is quite an old company. Please tell us something about its market share in India.
Thomson’s presence in India dates back three decades. It first entered the market as a CRT brand four decades ago and quickly established itself as one of the top three brands in the country. We reintroduced Thomson in 2017-18, and right from the start, we saw a significant increase in demand. Our current goal is to capture approximately 6 per cent of the market share in India.
What are the targets in terms of market share and how the company is planning to achieve them?
SPPL along with brand Thomson, is now eyeing to capture 8 per cent market share in the smart TV segment in the coming 2 years. SPPL plans to expand its product lineup, offering a range of smart TVs with advanced features such as 4K resolutions, AI integration, and enhanced connectivity options. We are focused on delivering high-quality smart TVs at competitive prices. This involves optimizing manufacturing processes and cost management to offer affordable options without compromising on features. SPPL is committed to enhancing customer satisfaction through superior after-sales service, robust warranty policies, and a user-friendly interface. This emphasis on customer support helps in building brand loyalty and positive word-of-mouth.
Which is one thing that you think makes Thomson stand out from the crowd?
One notable aspect of Thomson TVs is their focus on delivering high-quality, feature-packed products at competitive prices. This emphasis on value for money sets Thomson apart from many competitors. They successfully incorporate advanced technologies such as 4K resolution, smart TV features, and stylish designs while keeping their prices affordable. This combination of cost-efficiency and advanced features makes Thomson TVs a compelling choice for consumers seeking top performance without a high price tag. Moreover, Thomson’s strategic alliances with streaming services and attention to local market preferences further bolster its appeal in India.
Ahead of the festive season, what big Thomson is planning?
This festive season is crucial for Thomson TVs, as the emphasis has shifted from HD and FHD models to QLEDs. We will concentrate on offering QLEDs in sizes ranging from 32 to 65 inches, with the 65-inch QLEDs currently being the largest size in Thomson. To capitalize on this, we’ve decided to offer some of the best prices of the year on all our QLED TVs during the festive season.
Mouni Roy celebrated her 39th birthday with her husband, Suraj Nambiar, and friends in the Maldives. She took to Instagram to share glimpses of her birthday bash, which looked like a memorable summer vacay.
Mouni Roy had a great time in Maldives, calling her birthday bash in Maldives ‘unforgettable’. (Pexels)
Maldives is indeed a gorgeous tropical haven. The clear turquoise waters, white sands, and bright sun, along with the wooden water villas with thatched roofs atop the ocean create an idyllic scene. It’s nature’s masterpiece, with the skies turning into a colourful canvas at sunset. This is how you celebrate your birthday—lounging in pure bliss. Sometimes, to truly enjoy life, you need to slow down and savor the moment. Here are 5 reasons why you need to celebrate your next birthday in Maldives.
Gratefulness with unparalleled sunset views
Recreate magical moments with your friends against the backdrop of mesmerising sunset views. The riot of colors is so breathtaking, that you’ll feel like you’ve discovered shades the human eye was never meant to see. The horizon by the clear water almost feels surreal. Be it witnessing the magical wonder with friends or alone, or swinging in a hammock, the sunset feels surreal and instills feelings of gratefulness.
ALSO READ: Planning a trip to Singapore? From best times to visit to must-see attractions, here is your complete guide
Candlelight party at bioluminescent beach
Who said only pulsating neon lights and loud, blaring music define a party? Maldives is like the all-rounder star kid from your class, it has both stunning day and night views. Celebrate the night with candlelight, savoring local delicacies. Maldives has several beaches that exude a mythical charm, looking like glowing stardust on the shore. This is due to a natural phenomenon called bioluminescence, a glowing light emitted by phytoplankton floating in the water. Vaadhoo Island has a bioluminescent beach known as the Sea of Stars that lights up at night.
Water activities
Maldives is home to vibrant underwater life, featuring exotic corals and marine animals. Water sports like scuba diving, jet skiing, paddleboarding, surfing, and snorkeling will thrill adrenaline junkies, guaranteeing a birthday celebration filled with off-the-chart excitement and no hint of boredom or awkward small talk.
Island hopping
Maldives is a collection of coral atolls, often referred to as “islands.” Many of these islands are uninhabited. To awaken the adventurer in you and your friends, venture to the different islands. Discover hidden beaches and Instagram-worthy spots for group pics. Each island offers a unique experience. Thulusdhoo has good surfing spots, while Dhigurah is known for its beautiful white, sand beaches.
Spa
Relax and let go of tension, and enjoy the invigorating spa treatments, with gorgeous ocean views. Many spa treatments use local ingredients like coconut oil and seaweed. Even the warm sand is used in an age-old native spa treatment, called Maldivian sand bundle massage. It reduces inflammation and body pain, relaxing muscles and joints.
ALSO READ: Golden Week 2024 travel trend: Chinese tourists are skipping Tokyo for these visa-free destinations
There were two moments in this new production of Tchaikovsky’s Eugene Onegin which gave me cause for concern. On thinking about them, however, I came to realise that the American director Ted Huffman had in both cases done something profound that increased the intensity of the story.
The first surprise came when the curtain opened on a stage in which the only scenery was a couple of nondescript chairs and a small table. I feared we were in for an avant-garde piece of bemusing directorial self-indulgence, but as the story developed, I increasingly understood and appreciated what he was doing.
Pushkin’s Eugene Onegin is a dramatic tale of romance gone wrong, contrasting the arrogance of Onegin with the naivety of the young Tatyana, who falls in love with him. When she sends him a letter declaring her love, his rejection of her is gentle but self-centred and insensitive, appearing almost cruel. This stark story is about deep human emotions which do not need the distraction of scenery. Pushkin’s original verse-novel, of course, relied on words rather than scenery to convey the emotions and the development of the characters. Tchaikovsky added gloriously emotional music to Pushkin’s words and that is what we see and hear in Huffman’s production. The lack of scenery and the stark design were a little confusing at the start: it is difficult to set a scene without scenery of course, but once the main characters had entered, all became plain.
The second directorial shock came in the duel between Onegin and his former best friend Lensky. I shall not give any spoilers, but it indicated a dramatic and perfectly credible change in Onegin’s personality that gave added depth to the story. I am usually appalled when directors make drastic changes in the plot of an opera, but in this case I not only forgive but applaud Huffman’s brave intuition. His version is – dare I say it – an improvement on Pushkin’s narrative.
Canadian bass-baritone Gordon Bintner and Armenian tenor Liparit Avetisyan were excellent as Onegin and Lensky, but the real star of the performance was Russian soprano Kristina Mkhitaryan who sang and acted the role of Tatyana superbly. Her vocal range was faultless and her emotional expressiveness through changes in volume and intensity were gripping.
Two of the small parts also deserve to be mentioned: American soprano Avery Amereau was excellent as Tatyana’s older and more sophisticated sister Olga and the duets between them were a treat, while British bass Brindley Sherratt, although included as a last minute replacement when an original cast member fell ill, gave an excellent performance as Prince Gremin. The Royal Opera House Orchestra gave a fine performance under conductor Henrik Nanasi, keeping a good balance with the singers throughout.
Eugene Onegin is playing at the Royal Opera House until 14 October.
The Toyota Corolla Cross is for those who want a smartly sized, decently priced and family-friendly small SUV.
Note: This article is based off our most recent review of the Corolla Cross Hybrid, as specification has seen no major changes since publication bar the discontinuation of non-hybrid models.
We have updated key details such as pricing and specifications with the most up to date information available, and added imagery of the latest model where applicable.
Read the latest price and specs article here for all the details.
With an expansive range of models and variants, we’ve sampled the top-spec Atmos and the base version GX in petrol form. This was our first chance to have a go in the GX Hybrid, which we’d previously suggested would be the pick of the entry-level versions.
Is it? You bet – with supreme real-world efficiency and usability, the hybrid powertrain makes the Corolla Cross move from a car that you should consider, to one that you should probably just go ahead and order.
But the GX trim? Hmmm. Maybe fork out a bit more and get the GXL. You’ll find out why if you keep reading…
How does the Toyota Corolla Cross compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Toyota Corolla Cross against similarly sized vehicles.
Toyota
Corolla Cross
How much does the Toyota Corolla Cross Hybrid cost?
With the removal of the cheaper petrol versions, the price of entry for the Corolla Cross has risen by nearly $3000.
Model
Price before on-road costs
Toyota Corolla Cross GX Hybrid 2WD
$36,480
Toyota Corolla Cross GXL Hybrid 2WD
$40,230
Toyota Corolla Cross GXL Hybrid AWD
$43,230
Toyota Corolla Cross Atmos Hybrid 2WD
$47,030
Toyota Corolla Cross Atmos Hybrid AWD
$50,030
To see how the Corolla Cross lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What is the Toyota Corolla Cross GX 2WD Hybrid like on the inside?
It doesn’t feel like a special experience in the cabin, but it does do basic very well.
I don’t love the fact that it’s got a dark headliner. It makes it feel a little bit hemmed in. That, in combination with the dense array of greyscale plastics throughout the cabin, do make it feel a little bit dark.
The storage on offer is pretty good – cupholders between the seats, a covered centre console bin with a 12-volt plug and USB-C port, a storage section in front of the shifter (with a USB-A nearby for connecting to the media system, which you will need to use if you have an Android phone) bottle holders in the doors with additional sleeves for extra items.
What isn’t lovely is the entry-level polyurethane steering wheel and shifter – not the most enjoyable material to hang onto for long periods of time.
At least it has single-zone climate-control air-conditioning, a decent 8.0-inch touchscreen media system with wireless Apple CarPlay and sat-nav, and other convenient things like push-button start, keyless entry, a 7.0-inch digital instrument display, and all of the controls are very very easy to get used to.
It’s definitely a ‘built-to-a-cost’ style interior, just like it is in an entry-level Corolla hatch or sedan.
In the back seat, with the driver’s seat set to my position (I’m 182cm/6’0), I had enough knee room, toe room, head room and shoulder room to be comfortable.
It is a spacious back row, but not the most spacious. If you want more back-seat room, a Haval Jolion or Nissan Qashqai will be more suitable. Or an S-Class…
A plus is that there are directional events (you don’t get those in the Corolla Sedan), but there are no door pockets aside from a bottle holder on each door.
There’s only one map pocket (on the back of the front passenger seat), and in the GX there is no centre armrest with cup holders.
Parents will be happy with the fact that there are ISOFIX anchors and three-tether points, and it’s possible to fit a rearward-facing baby capsule in with enough space ahead for a front-seat passenger.
The annoying thing for parents is that loading in a child or a child seat can be a bit of a tedious process, because the doors don’t open very wide. If you want a really wide opening backdoor SUV, look at a Nissan Qashqai.
Boot space is exceptionally good, easily large enough to fit a pram and some luggage. Toyota has – believe it or not – five different claimed boot capacity figures. But the one for the GX 2WD Hybrid is 425 litres, which is large for the class.
Just note, if you’re planning a trip to IKEA or Bunnings and you do need to fold down the seats to store a larger item, there is no flat load through space – it has a huge hump in the way.
Corolla Cross Hybrid 2WD
Corolla Cross Hybrid AWD
Length
4460mm
4460mm
Width
1825mm
1825mm
Height
1620mm
1620mm
Wheelbase
2640mm
2640mm
Boot space (rear seats up)
414-425L
380-390L
To see how the Corolla Cross lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What’s under the bonnet?
Specifications
Corolla Cross Hybrid 2WD
Corolla Cross Hybrid AWD
Engine
2.0L 4cyl petrol-electric hybrid
2.0L 4cyl petrol-electric hybrid
Engine power
112kW
112kW
Engine torque
190Nm
190Nm
Front electric motor power
83kW
83kW
Front electric motor torque
206Nm
206Nm
Rear electric motor power
N/A
30kW
Battery
4.08Ahr lithium-ion
4.08Ahr lithium-ion
Total system power
146kW
146kW
Transmission
e-CVT
e-CVT
Driven wheels
Front-wheel drive
All-wheel drive
Combined fuel economy
4.3L/100km
4.4L/100km
CO2 emissions
97g/km
101g/km
Fuel octane rating
91 RON
91 RON
Fuel tank size
36 litres
43 litres
To see how the Corolla Cross lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
How does the Toyota Corolla Cross Hybrid drive?
I really enjoyed the drive experience of the Corolla Cross – it’s just like a Corolla Hatch, only bigger.
That is to say that it has very enjoyable dynamics – the ride is comfortable, and yet, it still has a nice level of handling capability.
The steering is light but accurate, easy to point the car wherever you need to go – whether you are pushing it a bit through a twisty corner, or parking at the shops. The reversing camera is basic but fine, but if you want a surround-view camera, you need to step up to the GXL.
The only issue really with the handling side of things is that the tyres aren’t fantastic, but that’s an easy fix.
The hybrid powertrain – as expected – is a highlight, with ample pulling power and easy acceleration from a standstill.
I reckon this could out-sprint a few of its contemporaries from 0-50km/h. That’s the benefit of a battery backing the petrol engine up.
It’s also super duper efficient, as you’ll see in the ownership section below.
The way it dips between EV power and petrol power, or a combination of the two, is very impressive.
However, my partner also drove this car and she said she thought that the transmission was a bit wacky – in that it “seems to always make the car rev really hard”. She’s bang on, it does take some getting used to.
But once you get used to it (I am, having driven a bunch of hybrid Toyota models), it’s fine.
The noisiest element of the drive experience is when that petrol engine is revving hard, but thankfully, there’s not too much road or when noise to contend with. All told, this is a very impressive small SUV to drive.
What do you get?
The Corolla Cross GX is the base grade in a three-strong trim lineup.
Corolla Cross GX standard equipment:
LED headlights
Halogen daytime running lights
17-inch alloy wheels
Space-saver spare wheel
Power folding, heated side mirrors
Embossed fabric seats
Manual front seat adjustment
Rear seats with tilt function
Urethane steering wheel
Electric park brake
2 x front, 2 x rear cupholders
Retractable luggage cover
60:40-split rear seats
Automatic climate control
7.0-inch driver’s instrument display
Proximity entry with push-button start
12V power socket, front
USB-C port in centre console
Power windows
Door pockets with bottle holders
8.0-inch touchscreen infotainment system
6-speaker sound system
AM/FM/DAB+ radio
Wireless Apple CarPlay
Wired Android Auto
Toyota Connected Services (12-month subscription)
Corolla Cross GXL adds:
Tyre repair kit (Hybrid AWD)
Front fog lights
High-grade LED headlights
Sequential turn signals
Rear privacy glass
Roof rails
10.5-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Satellite navigation
Dual-zone climate control
USB-C rear charge ports
Auto-dimming rear-view mirror
Leather-accented shift knob
Leather-accented steering wheel
Leather-accented/fabric upholstery
Corolla Cross Atmos adds:
18-inch alloy wheels
Panoramic glass sunroof
Hands-free power tailgate
Rain-sensing wipers
12.3-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Wireless phone charger
Illuminated entry system
Rear cupholders
Rear armrest
Heated steering wheel
Leather-accented upholstery
8-way power driver’s seat
Advanced Park Assist
Is the Toyota Corolla Cross Hybrid safe?
The Toyota Corolla Cross range was awarded the maximum five-star ANCAP safety rating against 2022 criteria, with pretty strong scores across the board.
It managed 85 per cent for adult occupant safety, 88 per cent for child occupants, 87 per cent for vulnerable road users, and 83 per cent for safety assist tech.
One thing to note, though, is that the GX misses out on a potentially life-saving safety technology – Backover AEB, which can auto-brake for pedestrians detected when you’re reversing. This tech is offered in GXL and Atmos, and it really should be standard range-wide.
Otherwise, the tech offering is pretty democratic, including eight airbags (dual front, driver’s knee, front-centre, front side and full-length curtain), and a host of other assistance features.
Standard safety features include:
Toyota Safety Sense
AEB with Pedestrian, Cyclist detection
Adaptive cruise control incl. curve speed reduction
Auto high-beam
Lane departure warning
Lane keep assist
Lane Trace Assist (centring)
Lane change assist (NEW)
Speed sign assist
Blind-spot monitoring incl. safe exit assist
Rear cross-traffic alert
Reversing camera
8 airbags incl. front-centre airbag
GXL adds:
Parking support brake incl. vehicle, object detection
‘Simple’ panoramic view monitor (360 cameras)
Atmos Hybrid adds:
Enhanced panoramic view monitor (360 cameras with see-through view)
Advanced Park Assist
Parking support brake incl. pedestrian detection
How much does the Toyota Corolla Cross Hybrid cost to run?
There’s a five-year, unlimited kilometre warranty, and if you service your car on time against the logbook requirements that extends to seven years for the powertrain.
Running costs
Toyota Corolla Cross Hybrid
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres
Service intervals
12 months or 15,000 kilometres
Capped-price servicing
5 years
Total capped-price service cost
$1250
Further to that, if you maintain your car with Toyota annually, and have a hybrid system checkup done on schedule, the battery warranty is 10 years/unlimited kilometres. That’s an excellent long-term ownership prospect.
The fuel costs are going to be low in this thing, because it has serious real-world efficiency on its side.
Official combined cycle fuel consumption for the GX Hybrid is just 4.3 litres per 100 kilometres, and over several hundred kays of mixed driving, my real world return was just a smidge over that at 4.6L/100km. Very impressive.
And, it can run on 91 RON regular unleaded. Fuel tank capacity is small, though, at 36 litres. I guess that doesn’t matter that much if you get the fuel use I saw, but you’re still looking at over 780km per tank.
As for longer-term costs, the brand offers a capped-price servicing plan for the Corolla Cross, which is $250 per visit for the first five years/75,000km. Impressive.
CarExpert’s Take on the Toyota Corolla Cross Hybrid
If you want a no-frills car that will save you on petrol bills, yet still manages to offer some exceptional safety gear, in-car technology, as well as a suitably sized cabin for the family, this is a walk-up start for you.
I was thoroughly impressed by a lot of things about the Corolla Cross GX Hybrid.
I’d definitely spend the extra for a GXL and get a few more niceties, but if your budget isn’t that pliable, this is going to be a smart solution.
Interested in buying a Toyota Corolla Cross? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
Amid an intense debate in India Inc about high stress at workplaces, Zoho CEO and Co-founder Sridhar Vembu has said companies that push workers “very hard” will not be able to sustain the pace and advocated that a “different” mindset is needed to build long-term and sustainable organisations.
In an interview to PTI, the billionaire businessman and social entrepreneur said burnout, loneliness post-migration to big cities, long-commutes and stressful work conditions are throwing people into “a very big pressure cooker” like environment.
Vembu also spoke at length on why he believes big-tech companies must be regulated, and emphasised the importance of ‘standards’ in preventing the creation and rise of digital monopolies.
A case in point is messaging services which operate in silos, he said and questioned “(when) email is not a monopoly, why should messaging be a monopoly”.
On the issue of workplace stress, Vembu said, while he has put-in 27-28 years and is raring to work another 28 years if possible, he is certainly not in favour of reckless pace of work that leads to burnout, either for himself or his employees.
“I have been around 27-28 years, and I want to work another 28 years, if possible, but that means I cannot burn myself out. I don’t want any of our people to burn themselves out,” he added.
His comment assumes significance in the backdrop of the tragic death of a young employee at one of the prominent consultancy firm that led to social media outcry and triggered intense debate in corporate India about high-stress at workplaces.
That and other incidents over the last few weeks have brought into spotlight the issue of social and mental wellbeing of workers, and the importance of work-life balance.
Vembu said that depression and burnout are real issues, and emphasised the need for a “balance”. Any company pushing employees very hard cannot sustain its pace in the long-term, according to him.
“And then there is a second factor. We are bringing young people from various places, smaller towns into big cities. And the first problem is, of course, loneliness. They come into the workforce, lonely. And we see this problem ourselves… We have encountered this. The second thing is, of course, commuting, and 1-2 hour commute is now becoming increasingly the norm in our cities, Bengaluru being a classic example,” he said.
As loneliness, long commutes, stressful work conditions take a toll, excessive workloads just makes matters worse.
“… So you already have loneliness, long-commutes, stressful work condition… So, you are throwing people into a very big pressure cooker, and very tragically, some people break, other people are broken,” he said advocating the need for companies to diversify and create a presence in smaller towns and cities.
“I believe that is why we have to diversify geographically. Every activity should not be at one place and we have to think differently about how we build long-term companies,” said Vembu, who is known for his zeal for rural India, and whose technology company Zoho works on the philosophy that world-class products can be built anywhere.
On India’s Digital Public Infrastructure or DPI, Vembu termed it a “shining success story”.
“India has emerged as a very strong player in this area. In fact, we are a global leader in this. I don’t believe any other country has this much DPI investment going on, and these many standards coming out… be it ONDC, the health stack, and all of that. And in this, we are leapfrogging much of the developed world,” he said.
DPIs are also critical in preventing formation of monopolies, as it controls standards.
“As an example, of where a standard is not yet there… messaging platforms don’t interoperate with others. On the other hand, emails interoperate.
“Technically, it is possible to interoperate, but it is right now under ‘lock and key’ by proprietary players. The government could force this open by mandating it… that you want to operate in India, we want messaging standards. I would strongly support it, because there is no reason for monopolies in these,” he said.
He further noted that “So standards are very important. DPI is playing a vital role. We are very happy to play our part in that.”
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – PTI)
Bitwise Asset Management recently submitted a filing for an XRP Exchange Traded Product (ETP) amid growing anticipation for regulatory approval. This filing, submitted to the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), has the potential to reshape XRP’s market trajectory if approved. Bitwise submitted the Form S-1 on September 30, laying the groundwork for a possible trust entity that could serve as the foundation for an XRP ETF.
However, much of this depends on the SEC’s next move in its legal battle with Ripple. The SEC has until October 7, 2024, to decide whether to appeal the court’s ruling in the Ripple case regarding programmatic sales of XRP. In July 2023, the court ruled that these sales do not violate securities laws, a decision that provided a boost to XRP’s price at the time.
Alex Thorn, Head of Research at Galaxy Digital, responded to the news of Bitwise’s XRP ETF filing, noting that the SEC has until October 7 to appeal Judge Torres’ July 2023 ruling, which determined that secondary sales of XRP through exchanges are not considered securities.
Near zero if Harris wins I agree. Trump victory and anything is poss on this front IMO.
Thorn expressed skepticism about the ETF’s chances, stating that the likelihood of approval would “drop to near zero” if the SEC decides to appeal. He added, “I’ll be very surprised if they don’t appeal.” Senior ETF analyst Eric Balchunas echoed this sentiment. He said, “Near zero if Harris wins I agree. Trump victory and anything is poss on this front IMO.”
Bitwise’s XRP ETP application could boost demand, potentially driving the price toward $1 if approved. At the time of writing, XRP is trading in red and has dipped below the crucial $1 mark. The outcome of the SEC’s decision regarding an appeal remains a critical factor for XRP investors. If the SEC appeals, XRP prices could fall as low as $0.40. However, if no appeal is made, XRP may rally toward the $1 mark.
Almost three years ago, Micky Onvural made a surprising move. She left her role as CEO of a B2C fashion brand, Bonobos, to become CMO of TIAA, a century-old B2B brand focused on retirement plans.
“This was a whole new ball of wax for me,” says Micky, who has also held marketing-related roles at B2C brands eBay and L’Oréal.
That fresh perspective is just what TIAA wanted. Micky was hired as its chief marketing and communications officer shortly after CEO Thashunda Brown Duckett took the helm.
TIAA knew it needed to break free of the perception it was a “stuffy, old, white man’s brand” because of its heritage in higher education and not-for-profit insurance. Instead, it wanted to be known for its modern, fast-moving, and dynamic work.
TIAA CMO Micky Onvural 2024 B2B Content Marketer of the Year
A rebrand like that is already a big goal, but another big hurdle compounded it. TIAA had never really had a marketing strategy. For its first 95 or so years, its market dominance was enough. When Micky joined, TIAA needed to raise awareness and cut through a crowded market in a way that would get people’s attention.
“I’ve been incredibly fortunate to get somewhat of a blank slate,” Micky says.
To tell a new TIAA story, Micky and the team turned to two staples of B2B content marketing: an event and a publication, both called TMRW.
In 2024, TMRW (the publication) won Best B2B Branded Content Campaign at the Content Marketing Awards. And Micky, who championed and led the work, won the 2024 B2B Content Marketer of the Year title.
An event that’s the offspring of TED and Coachella
The TIAA reinvention started with an existing annual conference for its core customer base — retirement plan sponsors. Traditionally, attendees would spend a day and a half earning their industry’s continuing education credits as TIAA promoted its products.
Micky wanted to transform the event into something she conceived as the child of TED and Coachella. Her team leaned into the idea.
They named the “baby” TIAA TMRW and planned content to help retirement plan sponsors do their jobs better and get smarter about the retirement-related challenges employees face in the higher education industry.
The transformation worked. “We have seen people’s perception of the brand change dramatically and quickly,” Micky says. “I think it’s because of things that I call ‘symbols of reevaluation.’ There are moments where you go, ‘Oh, that wasn’t what I was expecting to see.’”
Evaluations showed that more than 80% of people at their first TIAA TMRW event positively shifted their perception of the brand. “It has become a want-to-go-to event because who doesn’t want to get better at their job and engage with their community,” Micky says.
The incredibly successful event prompted the TIAA team to expand the educationally focused marketing strategy to include a full-blown content brand.
Expanding the TMRW content brand
TMRW now encompasses a digital content hub and a print publication in addition to the event.
The editorial team, led by former journalist Beverly Goodman, tackles dense topics (like the retirement crisis and financial literacy) without the jargon typically associated with corporate thought leadership in the financial services sphere.
Using conversational language and a human element, TMRW breaks down complex concepts into relatable terms.
TIAA launched TMRW online in June 2023 and followed with the first edition of a 30-page print magazine. The second edition in October 2023 totaled 34 pages and was mailed as an insert in PLANSPONSOR magazine.
The team created more than 300 digital assets to support the first issues, including webinars, social media posts, promotion on online trade publications, and internal automated marketing sequences.
TMRW articles are also cataloged in TIAA’s content library (on the Seismic platform). Sales and distribution teams, some of whom provide feedback at editorial planning meetings, can “shop” for the content they need.
TMRW’s results exceeded every benchmark TIAA set to increase awareness and improve the perception of TIAA as a thought leader.
In the digital arena, in less than three months, TIAA received 764 online subscription lead records (a 2.6% subscription rate). Of those, 625 were new leads, resulting in a 2.1% lead generation, which was better than expected.
The second edition produced even better results. An added 365 subscribers helped to spur a 176% increase in web traffic.
TIAA also added TMRW webinars to the content distribution model, which produced more lead generation.
While they showed TIAA TMRW was good for business, the metrics also helped guide the editorial planning. Page views, average time-on-page, email messaging, and A/B testing across social media and digital advertising provide essential feedback. For example, the team had theorized that clients wanted more regulatory news, but legislative updates received the least engagement.
More proof the future of TIAA TMRW is strong: A trade publication picked up one of its articles. And relationship managers (sales team members) continue receiving positive feedback.
One client even took the time to write, saying, “Thank you for sharing this new publication with the Retiree Roundtable! I’ve subscribed and look forward to reading each of the segments.”
Committing to print
Print (yes, print) is essential to the TMRW strategy. TIAA treats readers to beautifully designed issues that look and feel like a high-end consumer magazine.
Designed by agency partner Transport, TMRW is a literal manifestation of TIAA’s reinvention.
“I don’t think our first edition would’ve achieved that same sit-up-and-pay-attention impact without the physicality of a print edition,” Micky says. “(It’s) quite unexpected for us as a brand and for the [financial services] industry.”
TIAA publishes two issues of TMRW a year — a February/March issue targeted to plan sponsors and an October issue focused on consultants. Though the issues differ slightly in content and tone, Micky says they both build the TMRW franchise and “the perception of who we are as a more forward-leaning organization.”
Print also allows the TIAA team to offer a plethora of content with different insights and points of view — internal and external — into a single package. TIAA reps teams bring copies of the magazine to the events where they host or exhibit and to client and prospect meetings.
Micky says print magazines usually don’t work well in B2C marketing. However, they can work well for B2B brands with finite audiences. And TIAA has that in its institutional plan sponsors and financial consultants.
Print also has the “passable” factor, as Micky calls it. A chief human resource officer will hand it over to the CFO at their institution and say, “You should take a look at this.”
Looking to TMRW’s future
The TIAA team isn’t resting on TMRW’s laurels. Micky says they plan to evolve the digital experience to include more video and other elements. “We’ve been playing with some of that on a smaller scale, and we will continue to work on that through 2025.”
Continuing to prove TMRW’s impact is critical to its sustainability. But the results involve more than numbers.
“What’s been exciting is to see people engaging with us differently because they see us differently,” Micky explains.
Employees, including those who distribute the magazine at events and client meetings, have more positive experiences because they are involved with something new and exciting at the 116-year-old brand.
And now, TMRW’s stories fill Micky’s once-blank slate.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Before anything else, you’ll want to figure out how much you’re willing to spend on new wireless headset. The quality of value-priced headsets continues to improve, so you can find good affordable headsets and headphones for less than $100. But the premium models, which offer better build quality and performance, tend to cost $200 or more — sometimes much more.
Boom microphone or not?
When a headphone has boom microphone, that’s when it technically becomes what we describe as a “headset.” While many consumer headphones work well for making calls, having an extended microphone that sits closer to your mouth can improve how well your voice gets picked, making it sound clearer. When retracted, some boom microphones will mute the headset so people can’t hear you. And some boom mics now feature mute buttons on them. This is an important feature for video calls where you want to easily mute and unmute yourself. The downside to having the boom microphone is that it makes you look like you’re wearing a headset instead of headphones. That’s a bit of factor if you plan on wearing whatever you buy outside your home or office.
Fit, aka comfort
It’s key that the headset or headphones you buy fit your head well. They should offer a comfortable fit that’s snug yet not too snug. Ideally, you want a headset of headphones you can wear over the course of a day with minimal breaks.
Durability
You want headset that hold up well over time, so look for models that we note have sturdy build quality.
Return policy
It’s critical to buy your headphones at a retailer that has a good return policy, in case you have buyer’s remorse. Some people who are having trouble deciding between two models sometimes buy both, try them out for a few days, and then return one.
You have reached your maximum number of articles. Log in or create an account FREE of charge to continue reading.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
While some cancers are driven by genetics, studies have shown that up to half of all cases are caused by behavioral risk factors — which means they’re preventable.
Doctors recommend some common lifestyle changes to prevent cancer, such as not smoking, eating nutritious foods, wearing sun protection and limiting exposure to carcinogens — but each person’s means of reducing risk can look different.
Researchers at Mass General Brigham have compiled four specific, research-backed strategies for reducing risk.
BREAST CANCER DIAGNOSES SPIKING AMONG WOMEN UNDER 50, NEW REPORT REVEALS
1. Stay on top of preventive screenings
Procrastination is one of the top reasons for missed cancer screenings, research has shown.
Researchers at Mass General Brigham have compiled four specific, research-backed strategies for reducing risk.(iStock)
For example, colon cancer is the second leading cause of cancer death in Black individuals in the U.S., but many do not get the recommended screenings.
A study by Dr. Adjoa Anyane-Yeboa, a gastroenterologist at Massachusetts General Hospital (MGH), found that “self-reported procrastination” was the primary reason for the skipped screenings, fueled by “financial concerns, COVID-19 concerns and fear of both the test and bowel preparation.”
DRINKING ALCOHOL IS LINKED TO SIX TYPES OF CANCER, EXPERTS SAY: ‘IT’S TOXIC’
“The key takeaway from this study is that all providers should discuss colorectal cancer screening at regular intervals with all of their patients, because early detection through screening saves lives,” Anyane-Yeboa told Fox News Digital.
“To reduce their cancer risk, all people should be screened starting at age 45 and talk to their families about their family history to figure out if they need to be screened earlier.”
Screening guidelines for other types of cancers can be found on the American Cancer Society website.(iStock)
“Colorectal cancer is preventable with screening, and screening really does save lives.”
Screening guidelines for other types of cancers can be found on the American Cancer Society website.
2. Improve your sleep health
Insufficient or poor-quality sleep has been linked to a higher risk of developing cancers.
Heming Wang, PhD, assistant professor of medicine at Brigham and Women’s Hospital (BWH), led a research team that examined the impact of insomnia on ovarian cancer risk.
OVARIAN CANCER SIGNS, SYMPTOMS, DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT OPTIONS
“Insomnia is a common sleep disorder among ovarian cancer patients,” Wang told Fox News Digital.
“Our research revealed that insomnia increases the risk of a specific subtype of ovarian cancer and is associated with reduced survival in patients,” he went on.
Insufficient or poor-quality sleep has been linked to a higher risk of developing cancers.(iStock)
“These findings highlight the importance of addressing insomnia in the prevention and management of ovarian cancer.”
Based on these findings, seeking treatment for insomnia can help reduce the risk of certain types of ovarian cancer, according to the researchers.
3. Know the risks and benefits of daily aspirin use
Research has shown that regularly taking aspirin or another non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug (NSAID) can reduce the risk of developing colorectal cancer — but it can also lead to dangerous side effects, such as bleeding and inflammation.
“It is important to know if you are more likely to benefit from daily aspirin use,” according to MGH.
LEUKEMIA PATIENT RECEIVES FIRST-EVER BONE MARROW TRANSPLANT FROM DECEASED ORGAN DONOR
Daniel Sikavi, MD, and Andrew Chan, MD, of MGH, led a study that explored the link between aspirin and colon cancer risk.
“Our results suggested that people with a less healthy lifestyle — higher body mass index, more smoking, greater alcohol use, less physical activity and poorer diet quality — had a greater absolute benefit from aspirin use in reducing their risk of colorectal cancer,” Sikavi told Fox News Digital.
Research has shown that regularly taking aspirin can reduce the risk of developing colorectal cancer — but it can also lead to dangerous side effects.(iStock)
People with a healthier lifestyle had a lower overall risk of colon cancer, the researchers found, but regular aspirin use didn’t have the same protective effects for that group.
“This work is an important example of a more personalized approach to cancer prevention by targeting effective prevention strategies to populations that are the most likely to benefit,” Sikavi noted.
4. Cut down on sugar-sweetened beverages
More than half of the U.S. population consumes sugar-sweetened beverages (SSBs) on any given day, studies have shown.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Research by the American Cancer Society (ACS) found that men and women who drank two or more servings of SSBs per day had a 5% higher risk of dying from an obesity-related cancer.
“Despite their sweet taste, sugary drinks pose significant health risks,” Longgang Zhao, PhD, a researcher at Brigham and Women’s Hospital, told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“Researchers have already linked the beverages to obesity, diabetes and heart disease.”
Zhao recently led a study that investigated the link between sugar-sweetened beverages and liver cancer risk among postmenopausal women.
Research has found that men and women who drank two or more servings of sugar-sweetened beverages per day had a 5% higher risk of dying from an obesity-related cancer.(iStock)
“In our current study using data from the Women’s Health Initiative prospective cohort, we found that postmenopausal women who drank one or more sugar-sweetened beverages per day had a higher risk of developing liver cancer and dying of chronic liver disease than those who drank less than three or fewer sugar-sweetened beverages per month,” he said.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“If a causal link is established between sugary drinks and liver disease, the broader implications for global public health initiatives are substantial.”
Who doesn’t want a sharp mind and a stellar memory? Functional foods – those that offer health benefits beyond basic nutrition – are gaining popularity for their potential to boost brainpower and delay cognitive decline. Packed with bioactive compounds like omega-3 fatty acids, antioxidants, flavonoids, and polyphenols, these foods can enhance your mental acuity. Let’s dive into some delicious brain-boosting foods and explore fun and tasty ways to incorporate them into your diet. Bioactive compounds in functional foods play a crucial role in supporting brain health. Omega-3 fatty acids, found in fatty fish like salmon and mackerel, are essential for brain development and function. These fats contribute to the structural integrity of brain cells and possess anti-inflammatory properties that protect against cognitive decline. Studies have shown that regular consumption of omega-3 fatty acids can improve memory and reduce the risk of Alzheimer’s disease. Also Read: Want To Reduce Risk Of Cognitive Decline? Eat Mushrooms, Says Study
Photo Credit: iStock
Antioxidants, present in fruits, vegetables, and nuts, protect brain cells from oxidative stress, a key factor in aging and neurodegenerative diseases. Flavonoids, a type of antioxidant found in berries, tea, and dark chocolate, have been shown to enhance cognitive performance by improving blood flow to the brain and reducing inflammation. Polyphenols, found in foods like apples, onions, and red wine, also offer neuroprotective benefits.
Functional Foods For Brain Health:
1. Fatty Fish
Think of fatty fish like salmon, trout, and sardines as your brain’s best friend. High in omega-3 content, these fish can keep your brain sharp and focused. Aim to include fatty fish in your meals at least twice a week for a significant cognitive boost.
Photo Credit: iStock
2. Berries
Berries like blueberries, strawberries, and blackberries are not only delicious but also packed with antioxidants and flavonoids. These compounds improve memory and delay brain aging. Toss a handful of berries into your breakfast cereal, smoothies, or salads for a tasty brain boost.
3. Nuts And Seeds
Nuts and seeds, such as almonds, walnuts, flaxseeds, and chia seeds, are excellent sources of omega-3 fatty acids and antioxidants. Snacking on a mix of nuts and seeds or adding them to yoghurt and oatmeal can support brain health.
Photo Credit: iStock
4. Dark Chocolate
Yes, chocolate can be good for you! Dark chocolate, with at least 70% cocoa content, contains flavonoids, caffeine, and antioxidants that can enhance brain function by increasing blood flow to the brain. Enjoying dark chocolate in moderation can provide cognitive benefits.
5. Leafy Greens
Leafy greens like spinach, kale, and broccoli are packed with antioxidants, vitamins, and minerals that support brain health. Including leafy greens in salads, smoothies, and side dishes can help protect against cognitive decline.
Photo Credit: Unsplash
Practical Dietary Tips:
Incorporating functional foods into your diet can be a fun and flavorful adventure. Start your day with a smoothie made from kefir, banana, spinach, flaxseeds, and a handful of berries for a brain-boosting breakfast. For lunch, a salad with mixed greens, walnuts, and grilled salmon offers a balanced meal rich in omega-3 fatty acids and antioxidants. Snacks can also be nutritious and beneficial for cognitive health. Dark chocolate squares, a handful of almonds, or a yogurt parfait with mixed berries are excellent choices. For dinner, consider a salmon fillet with a side of steamed broccoli and quinoa to ensure a nutrient-dense meal that supports brain function. Also Read: Beware! Extreme Low-Carb Diets May Speed Up Ageing And Lead To Cognitive Decline Functional foods play a significant role in enhancing cognitive health and preventing neurodegenerative diseases. By incorporating foods rich in omega-3 fatty acids, antioxidants, flavonoids, and polyphenols into your diet, you can support brain health and improve cognitive performance. Embracing these dietary recommendations can lead to a sharper mind, better memory, and a reduced risk of cognitive decline, promoting overall well-being and a higher quality of life. So, let’s toast to brain health with a delicious dark chocolate treat and enjoy the journey to a healthier mind!
About The Author: Manvi Lohia is a registered dietitian and Head of Holistic Health and International Business, at Ekaanta.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-10-01/China-embraces-National-Day-holiday-with-travel-rush-colorful-events-1xlv07PVJpS/img/258a9e3294e14551bf87959f588dbcf5/258a9e3294e14551bf87959f588dbcf5.png' alt='Tourists celebrate National Day at Mt. Taishan in Tai'an City, east China's Shandong Province, October 1, 2024. /CFP'
Tuesday marks the first day of China’s National Day “golden week” holiday, which will end on October 7 this year. China’s railway network is expected to handle 175 million passenger trips during the holiday travel rush, according to data from the national railway operator.
The country’s railway sector is expected to handle 21 million passenger trips on Tuesday, according to China State Railway Group Co., Ltd.
China also plans to schedule an additional 1,476 passenger trains on Tuesday to meet the rising travel demand. During the holiday period, an average of more than 12,000 passenger trains are scheduled to be operated daily.
Travel rush
According to data from Ctrip, China’s leading online travel agency, tickets for many domestic scenic spots were sold out on the first day of the holiday, and the orders of domestic scenic spot tickets increased by 37 percent year on year.
Meanwhile, data also showed that the number of outbound travel orders on the first day increased by nearly 40 percent year on year.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-10-01/China-embraces-National-Day-holiday-with-travel-rush-colorful-events-1xlv07PVJpS/img/c3b5105a1d394905a699e6f67fce7b58/c3b5105a1d394905a699e6f67fce7b58.jpeg' alt='Crowds at Shanghai Hongqiao Railway Station in east China's Shanghai, October 1, 2024. /CFP '
Driven by multiple factors such as long holiday travel, family visits and cross-city trips, the popularity of this year’s National Day holiday is expected to hit a new high.
In terms of destinations, nearly half of tourists chose long-distance travel on the first day, and the proportion of long-distance travel showed a year-on-year increase of six percent.
This year, Beijing, Shanghai, Chengdu, Hangzhou are among the most popular destinations for tourists on the first day of the holiday, according to Fliggy, one of the country’s leading travel platforms.
The number of car rental orders for travel on the first day increased by more than 40 percent year on year. One month ahead of the holiday, the booking volume of international cruises increased by more than 130 percent compared with the same period in 2019, said Fliggy.
Box office bookings for the holiday have already exceeded 200 million yuan ($28.52 million), according to online box office tracking platform Maoyan. Historical war film “The Volunteers: The Battle of Life and Death,” science fiction adventure “Bureau 749,” and an action crime film “Tiger Wolf Rabbit” lead the chart.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-10-01/China-embraces-National-Day-holiday-with-travel-rush-colorful-events-1xlv07PVJpS/img/4501bf5a5f884df592354a104055c6bf/4501bf5a5f884df592354a104055c6bf.jpeg' alt='Tourists enjoy a folk cultural performance in Guangzhou, south China's Guangdong Province, October 1, 2024. /CFP'
Colorful events
Across the country, National Day is celebrated with a variety of activities, from festive events and exhibition visits to travel.
In Fuzhou City, southeast China’s Fujian Province, the city has collaborated with various counties and urban districts to carry out 232 cultural activities, including 95 holiday theme activities, and 137 cultural exhibitions and artistic performances.
In Beijing, focusing on themes including the National Day and guochao, a trend of a surge in interest in domestic brands and products that incorporate Chinese traditional style and culture, nearly 400 special activities have been provided.
In east China’s Zhejiang Province, the rippling green waters and picturesque mountains of Yanglou Village in the city of Huzhou are captivating visitors.
“The visitor’s impression is the result of Huzhou’s consistent focus on ecological preservation for over a decade,” said Pan Ming, director of the ecological environment bureau in Huzhou.
A series of “country walk” activities were held in southwest China’s Guizhou Province, covering parent-child interaction, folk customs, farm entertainment and rural markets.
The province has also offered a variety of sports activities to tourists, including paragliding, jumping rope on a paddle board, fencing and table tennis, aiming to provide a diversified and joyful experience to tourists.
When Courtenay was alone with her boyfriend, Jason, the body shame that had always plagued her vanished. But when they left the house, it was different.
Large cats like lions are beautiful, but let’s face it, having a lion as a pet would be a terrible idea (and illegal). However, if you’re a fan of large felines, you can find domesticated kitties resembling the large cats you love. In particular, several cat breeds have a bit of a mane like a lion, so if lions are your thing, you’ll likely adore these breeds!
Which cat breeds have manes like a lion? Here are 11 cat breeds that resemble lions. All of them are adorable, and all of them would make excellent pets.
The 11 Cat Breeds With Manes Like a Lion
1. Himalayan
Image Credit: Animation and GD artist, Shutterstock
Origin:
United States
Lifespan:
9 to 15 years
Height:
10 to 11 inches
As snuggly as the Birman may be, if you’re looking for the ultimate cuddly buddy, the Himalayan is just that. These fabulous felines look like fluffy Siamese with a gorgeous mane and were created by mixing Siamese and Persian cats. This breed loves to lay around in their loved ones’ laps, so you can’t get much cuddlier than them! The Himalayan is also an interesting mix of laid-back and playful due to their parentage.
2. LaPerm
Image Credit: Linn Currie, Shutterstock
Origin:
United States
Lifespan:
10 to 15 years
Height:
6 to 10 inches
The LaPerm is one of the more fascinating breeds on this list as they were a natural occurrence and not the result of crossbreeding. They also have gorgeous curly coats that make the fur around their faces mane-like. This breed is known for being loyal, loving, affectionate, and friendly. They adore spending time with their preferred humans, especially when their people play with them. Because these kitties are intelligent and energetic, they love games and learning new tricks!
3. Maine Coon
Image Credit: Olga Korvinuss, Shutterstock
Origin:
Maine, United States
Lifespan:
12 to 15 years
Height:
10 to 16 inches
Maine Coons are one of the fluffiest felines around, so it should come as no surprise part of that fluff forms a lion’s mane. They’re also one of the larger cat breeds out there. These kitties make fantastic pets, as their hearts are as large as they are. Known for being playful, gentle, and affectionate, the breed is equally known for their “dog-like” behavior wherein they enjoy playing fetch and splashing in water. If you’ve been searching for a friendly, loving cat, the Maine Coon is a wonderful choice!
4. Norwegian Forest Cat
Image Credit: mariusz13, Shutterstock
Origin:
Norway
Lifespan:
15 to 20 years
Height:
9 to 11 inches
If you want a hardy feline who’s a little chonky and larger than life and has one of the loveliest manes around, we recommend the Norwegian Forest Cat. This breed is an ancient one and an absolute delight to have around. Because of their past as forest kitties, this breed loves to climb, so you’ll often find them in the highest places of your home, observing the world as it goes by. They won’t spend all their time hanging out up high, though; these felines have a playful, affectionate nature and are always up for adventure!
5. Persian
Image Credit: Krzysztof Niewolny, Pixabay
Origin:
Possibly Mesopotamia (later known as Persia, now known as Iran)
Lifespan:
10 to 13 years
Height:
10 to 15 inches
If you’ve seen a Persian cat, you know exactly how floofy these felines are, and all that floof makes for a fabulous mane! These felines have been around for eons (their likeness has even been found in hieroglyphics!), and the breed is one of the most popular worldwide. That popularity isn’t surprising; these cats are stunning, gentle, laid-back, and enjoy lounging around with their people, enjoying the quiet atmosphere. Persians also aren’t particularly demanding, which makes them an easy cat breed to care for.
6. Ragamuffin
Image Credit: Benjamin B, Shutterstock
Origin:
California, United States
Lifespan:
12 to 17 years
Height:
10 to 15 inches
Ragamuffins are named as such because they very much resemble raggedy muffins. They’re muffin-shaped and incredibly fluffy, giving them a fabulous lion-like mane. They can be on the larger side and are well-known for being “Velcro” kitties. So, expect to never be alone again with one of these cats around! Their sweet, chill personality has made them quite popular, as these felines love to curl up with you anywhere and anytime. Despite their Velcro-ness and laid-back personalities, the breed is fine being on their own during the day and loves to play!
7. Ragdoll
Image Credit: cristofordraghici, Shutterstock
Origin:
California, United States
Lifespan:
12 to 15 years
Height:
9 to 11 inches
It seems there’s a correlation between having a mane like a lion and being cuddly because the Ragdoll, like other felines on this list, is both of those things. These kitties are named after their tendency to simply melt into a flop when picked up and have fantastically gentle and docile personalities. They love to cuddle, and they love to follow their people every single place they go. These cats want to be doing whatever you’re doing, no matter what!
8. Siberian
Image Credit: fantom_rd, Shutterstock
Origin:
Russia
Lifespan:
11 to 18 years
Height:
17 to 25 inches
Siberian cats may be the largest breed on our list. These giant felines hail from Russia and are covered in fur, which is used to protect them from the cold. This means they sport an excellent mane like a lion. The breed is highly intelligent and excellent at solving problems, so you can keep them mentally stimulated by hiding treats and letting them figure out how to get to them. They’re also sweet, loyal, and affectionate, with a love of playing games.
9. Somali
Image Credit: Nataliya Kuznetsova, Shutterstock
Origin:
Unknown
Lifespan:
9 to 16 years
Height:
7 to 11 inches
You may be surprised to see the Somali on this list, but as long-haired felines, they can acquire a nice lion-like mane! A cousin to the Abyssinian, this cat isn’t suitable for those looking for a cuddle buddy. These felines are energetic, playful, inquisitive, and tons of fun to have around. They’re also the equivalent of having an actual child in your home. There will be no whiling away the hours napping on the sofa with the Somali. Instead, you can expect them to follow you around, seeking attention and getting into everything they can get their paws on. This feline breed isn’t right for everyone, but they make fantastic pets for the right people.
10. Turkish Angora
Image Credit: engin akyurt, Pixabay
Origin:
Turkey
Lifespan:
15 to 20 years
Height:
9 to 14 inches
These pretty kitties may be less familiar to you than others on our list, but you should get familiar with them and their lovely lion manes! These friendly, intelligent felines have unlimited energy, so they do best in active households. A sweet and affectionate breed, the Turkish Angora bonds closely with their people and doesn’t enjoy being left on their own for long periods. With their love of socializing and playing, they’re a perfect breed for homes with lots of people around.
11. Birman
Image Credit: Patrik Slezak, Shutterstock
Origin:
Burma (now Myanmar)
Lifespan:
12 to 16 years
Height:
8 to 10 inches
These cute kitties may be best known for their distinctive coat color, called Mink, and unique color points that make them somewhat resemble the Siamese cat. However, they also have beautiful, floofy manes around their face, making them look like lions. The Birman is also well-known for having a “dog-like” nature, which simply means this breed is incredibly social and affectionate. With one of these felines in your home, you’ll never walk alone because they will follow you wherever you go! If you’re seeking a cuddly mini-lion of your own, this is the breed for you!
Conclusion
You may not be able to own an actual lion, but you can certainly own a domesticated feline with a mane like a lion, and that’s pretty good. All the cats on this list make wonderful pets, as they’re all sweet and friendly. Many of them are extra cuddly if that’s what you’re looking for, but you can find a more active and playful lion-maned cat if that’s what you want. Whichever breed you choose, your home is sure to be brightened by any of these gorgeous felines!
Featured Image Credit: ANURAK PONGPATIMET, Shutterstock
Institutional investments in real estate grew 45 per cent to nearly $1.15 billion in July-September with investors looking to encash the strong demand for premium homes and offices, according to Colliers.
Consultant Colliers India data showed that the institutional investments in real estate during July-September stood at $1,148.7 million as against $793.4 million in the year-ago period.
Among different assets class in the overall real estate market, the consultant noted that office segment attracted $616.3 million during the third quarter of this calendar year, a more than seven-fold jump from $79.1 million in the year-ago period.
The consultant data showed that Chennai and Mumbai together accounted for about 57 per cent of the total inflows during Q3 2024 backed by key acquisitions in office segment.
The residential segment, which has seen a significant surge in demand post Covid-19 pandemic, saw a 40 per cent growth in investments to $384.8 million from $274.6 million.
Industrial & warehousing segment witnessed a fall of 72 per cent in fund inflow to $95.2 million from $340.3 million.
Also read: Mumbai property sales in September fall due to ‘shraadh’ period
Investments in mixed use projects almost doubled to $52.4 million from $27.2 million.
Alternate assets, which include data centres, life sciences, senior housing, holiday homes, student housing, and schools, among others, did not receive any funding in July-September as against $72.2 million in the year-ago period.
Overall, Colliers said that domestic investments remained robust at $0.5 billion, contributing 44 per cent of the total inflows during the July-September quarter.
“Institutional flows in Indian realty remain consistent, indicating sustained investor confidence. The investors are well diversified between global and domestic capital. While office assets remain a key focus, industrial & warehousing and residential segments are gaining significant momentum,” said Piyush Gupta, Managing Director, Capital Markets & Investment Services at Colliers India.
Multi-city deals accounted for 30 per cent share in the total institutional investment in real estate during July-September 2024.
Gurugram-based realty firm 4S Developers Managing Director Sanju Bhadana said, “India’s demographic advantage coupled with healthy domestic consumption, favourable policy environment, massive infrastructure development and a robust economy is attracting investment in the real estate sector from both domestic and global investors.”
“The regional diversity of this investment points not just to the overall growth and development of Indian cities but also the potential and evolution of each segment of the real estate sector,” Bhadana added.
Also read: RInfra to raise $350 million from Varde Partners via FCCB
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
AKO tražite novi par tenisica ili želite dodati nešto cool u svoj ormar, danas je odlična prilika. Buzz trgovina nudi popuste na razne artikle, a ovo je šansa da uštedite. Samo danas možete dobiti 20% popusta na nesnižene artikle, dok na već snižene dobivate dodatnih 10%.
Buzz ima široku ponudu popularnih brendova kao što su New Balance, adidas, Nike i Converse. Ovi brendovi imaju klasike koji nikad ne izlaze iz mode, pa sigurno možete pronaći nešto što vam odgovara. Da vam olakšamo izbor, izdvojili smo nekoliko hit-modela, a cijelu ponudu možete vidjeti ovdje.
Ženska kolekcija
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Muška kolekcija
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
In a highly anticipated duel of the Southland’s top quarterbacks, Makena Cook threw three touchdown passes to keep the Orange Lutheran flag football team unbeaten with a 20-13 victory over Trinity League rival Santa Margarita on Tuesday night.
Cook completed nine of 11 throws in the first half, including touchdowns of 21 and 53 yards to receiver Julia Oberholtzer — the second on a slant over the middle to put the Lancers (18-0, 2-0) up 13-7 with just over two minutes left before intermission.
“Makena and I have practiced that play over and over and we were locked in tonight,” said Oberholtzer, who also plays lacrosse. “I was getting open, she was finding me.”
Cook and the offense won the game, but the Lancers’ defense saved it by picking off three passes by Santa Margarita quarterback Madi Lam, the last by cornerback Josie Anderson in the end zone for a touchback with 33 seconds left.
“It was a stressful game on defense,” Anderson said. “I was nervous because I knew how good Santa Margarita was. On that final play I saw both their inside and outside receivers go long so I knew I had to play in the middle. The throw wasn’t as much of a line drive as it could’ve been, I broke on the ball and it was perfect timing.”
Cook connected on five of six passes on Orange Lutheran’s first drive of the second half and after a five-yard scoring toss she found Brooklyn Vanderkallen for a crucial one-point conversion to give the Lancers a seven-point lead with 19 minutes left.
The Eagles (11-3, 1-1) gained two first downs on the ensuing drive before Anderson intercepted an underthrown ball at the one-yard line.
Lam completed four straight passes to receiver Mackenzie Young and two more to Megan Zimmerman to move the ball to the Orange Lutheran five-yard line, but linebacker AJ Hendrix intercepted a pass at the goal line to keep the Lancers, ranked No. 1 in the Southern Section and state rankings, ahead with 4:50 remaining.
Orange Lutheran went for it on fourth and three at its own 37 with 1:16 left to ice the game, but Cook got pressured and Young intercepted a pass and returned it to the Lancers’ 26. Lam ran for six yards on the Eagles’ first play, setting up Anderson’s game-sealing takeaway.
Lam found Fiona Agius over the middle on fourth and goal from the 10 to put Santa Margarita on top 7-0 and scrambled to her right to throw a dart to Avery Finneran in the corner of the end zone from five yards out to make it 13-13 with four seconds left in the first half.
“Both sides played really well and we’ll face them again at home so hopefully we can win that one,” Young said. “Madi is really good on her feet, she can extend plays and when she came to us she took the time to get to know all of her receivers.”
Santa Margarita receiver Fiona Agius celebrates a touchdown catch in the first half against Orange Lutheran.
(Steve Galluzzo / For the Times)
As a sophomore sensation at Esperanza last fall, Lam handed Cook and the Lancers an overtime defeat in their final contest — a loss that has fueled Orange Lutheran’s bid for perfection this season. Lam transferred to Santa Margarita on Aug. 20 and made her debut in the Eagles’ fifth game Sept. 16 versus Tesoro. In her first seven games at her new school she passed for 26 touchdowns with only one interception, however on Saturday, Santa Margarita suffered back-to-back losses to Corona del Mar and Huntington Beach at the El Toro Tournament to drop to No. 8 in the section and 10th in California.
Santa Margarita hosts JSerra on Thursday; Orange Lutheran travels to Mater Dei.
“Our flag-pulling tonight wasn’t great but I was proud of the way the girls stepped up when they needed to,” Orange Lutheran coach Kristen Sherman said. “It was bend but don’t break. Our league has greatly improved this year; that’s a good team with a good quarterback and they made us better.”
The Chinese smartphone manufacturer OnePlus is expected to launch its next flagship smartphone, the OnePlus 13, next month. Reports have surfaced, shedding light on the probable specifications and the design of the device. It is being speculated that the OnePlus 13 is likely to be the first smartphone to be powered by the Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 4 chipset. The device is also anticipated to witness significant camera upgrades, along with some design changes.
Leaked images on social media show the rumoured OnePlus 13 in a protective case. It is expected to sport a redesigned camera layout. Additionally, the device is also rumoured to include an upgraded periscope camera, which will elevate its camera capabilities.
The camera setup is expected to encompass a 50MP primary camera, featuring a Sony LYT- 808 sensor, a 50MP Ultra-Wide camera, and a 50MP periscope Telephoto lens.
Some social media users also revealed that the OnePlus 13 will use the same image processing algorithm as the Oppo Find X8 series, which is also set to be launched next month in China.
However, the company has not yet officially revealed whether the OnePlus 13 will have a circular rear camera, similar to its predecessors.
In other developments related to OnePlus: OnePlus has announced a series of Diwali offers on its wide range of products. These offers will pan across its popular smartphones, tablets and audio products to make the signature OnePlus experience more accessible to consumers. The list includes devices like the OnePlus 12, OnePlus Watch 2, OnePlus Pad 2, and the OnePlus Buds Pro 3.
With the festive season approaching, customers get the option to purchase the OnePlus 12 from September 26 and enjoy exciting offers, including a complimentary pair of OnePlus Buds Pro 2 across all sales channels. Additionally, buyers can avail an instant bank discount of up to Rs 7,000 and opt for no-cost EMI for up to 6 months with select bank cards.
Himachal: Efforts to clear National Highway 5 are underway however, debris rolling down the mountains is obstructing the work. Here’s what tourists need to know
Kinnaur district of Himachal Pradesh was cut off from the state capital Shimla after a massive landslide hit National Highway 5 (Hindustan-Tibet road) in Negulsari early Tuesday morning, officials said.
A landslide in Himachal’s Kinnaur blocked the NH 5. Himachal Pradesh travel alert: Landslide blocks highway, cuts off Kinnaur from Shimla(Photo by HT_PRINT)
No one was injured in the landslide, they said.
Due to the landslide, a large number of tourist vehicles and apple-laden trucks were stranded on both sides of the highway.
Efforts to clear the highway are underway. However, debris rolling down the mountains is obstructing the work, the officials said.
After a landslide at Negulsari last year, alternate arrangements were made for transporting cash crops, including apples and ensuring that farmers’ produce reaches the market on time but moving apples through the ropeway is a tough and time-consuming task.
The ropeway was set up between Krampa in Negulsari and Dhumti on the Chaura-Rupi link road.
The weather in Himachal Pradesh has been dry for the last 24 hours and conditions are favourable for the further withdrawal of southwest monsoon from more parts of the state during the next two-three days, the local Met office said.
According to officials, 186 people have died in rain-related incidents in Himachal Pradesh since the onset of monsoon in the hill state on June 27 while 28 are missing. The state has suffered losses to the tune of ₹1,360 crore due to the rains.
Catch every big hit,…
See more
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
News / Lifestyle / Travel / Himachal Pradesh travel alert: Landslide blocks highway, cuts off Kinnaur from Shimla
This story has been published from a wire agency feed without modifications to the text. Only the headline has been changed.
With the Nintendo Switch 2 expected to launch in 2025, and with Black Friday shoppers planning their next big purchase, now seems like a good time to look back at the top 10 Nintendo Switch games based on their Metacritic scores.
Despite topping the Switch retail charts with sales of more than 60 million units, it may shock to you to find out that Mario Kart 8 Deluxe isn’t even close to making it into the top 10 Nintendo Switch games. In fact, Mario Kart 8 Deluxe only just makes it into the top 20, despite its massive 92% rating. (It’s 19th, for the record.)
Indeed, when it comes to the top 10 Nintendo Switch games, the competition is fierce! The top two games both have scores of 97%, which is higher than anything in the list of the ten best PS5 games.
Can anything topple The Legend of Zelda? How many times will Mario appear in the top 10? And why is a visual novel so high on the list? Read on to find out.
10. Divinity Original Sin 2 Definitive Edition
While Baldur’s Gate 3 is unlikely to ever appear on the Nintendo Switch, Divinity Original Sin 2 Definitive Edition (which is also developed by Larian Studios) is a pretty decent substitute, scoring an impressive 93% on Metacritic.
It’s not as complex as Baldur’s Gate 3 and doesn’t provide as much freedom, but Divinity Original Sin 2 is a deep and rewarding role-playing game nonetheless. Indeed, while the medieval fantasy world of Rivellon is a dangerous place, there are more ways to navigate the land and overcome danger than through turn-based combat alone.
(Image: LARIAN)
9. Hades
Hades is an enormously addictive roguelike game where the aim is to escape the Underworld by defeating monsters, earning gold and collecting power-ups. Unlike other games in the genre, however, the writing, setting and characters make Hades feel like a much tighter, more hand-crafted experience, even though no two runs are the same.
Also, thanks to an addictive gameplay loop in which you unlock permanent upgrades and potentially grow stronger with every run, Hades arguably feels more suited to the handheld play of the Nintendo Switch than any other platform.
(Image: SUPERMASSIVE)
8. Persona 5 Royal
Persona 5 is a stylish role-playing game set in modern day Tokyo. Similar to other games in the series, players will attend school, work part time jobs and hang out with friends during the day, before going on surreal dungeon-crawling adventures at night.
Persona 5 Royal takes the beloved RPG and adds 40 items of DLC, including additional characters and story content. If you’re ever stuck for something to play and want to get value for money, then this 100 hour role-playing game should be near the top of your list.
(Image: ATLUS)
7. Metroid Prime Remastered
Much like Mario’s first foray into the third dimension with Super Mario 64, Nintendo effortlessly took an established 2D franchise in Metroid and made it work in 3D. In fact, Metroid Prime doesn’t just work as a first-person action game, it absolutely excels, retaining everything that makes the series so special, just with a new gameplay style.
The fact that Metroid Prime Remastered makes visual and quality of life improvements to what was already a near-perfect game tells you why it features so high on the list of best Nintendo Switch releases.
(Image: Nintendo)
6. Tetris Effect Connected
Another top ten list, another appearance for Tetris Effect Connected, which makes the classic block-based puzzle game feel like an almost spiritual experience.
The perfect marriage between visuals, sound and action, Tetris Effect Connected adds new multiplayer content to the superb solo action.
GWM has slashed prices across its Australian model range for the remainder of 2024 as part of a new clearance campaign.
The brand has launched its ‘GWM Plate Clearance’ campaign, bringing discounts on the drive-away pricing for selected models until December 31, 2024.
Additionally, GWM has rolled out discounts of up to $1500 for ABN holders. The latest discounts are in addition to offers that have been made available for specific models in recent months, which means big savings on some models.
Buyers are encouraged to visit GWM’s website or their nearest GWM dealer for more information.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
New drive-away pricing is detailed below. The total discount figure is based on the price reduction from each model’s original drive-away price, as some have already seen considerable discounts.
GWM Haval Jolion
Two Haval Jolion Hybrid variants have received discounts of $1000, with no previous discounts available.
GWM Haval Jolion
Drive-away price until Dec. 31
Total discount
2024 GWM Haval Jolion Lux Hybrid
$34,990
$1000
2024 GWM Haval Jolion Ultra Hybrid
$37,990
$1000
MORE: Everything GWM Haval Jolion
GWM Haval H6
The Haval H6 Ultra and H6 GT Ultra variants have received additional discounts of $1000 each, equating to total reductions of $4000 and $4500 respectively from their standard drive-away prices.
GWM Haval H6
Drive-away price until Dec. 31
Total discount
2024 GWM Haval H6 Ultra 2WD
$35,990
$4000
2024 GWM Haval H6 GT Ultra AWD
$41,990
$4500
MORE: Everything GWM Haval H6
GWM Cannon Alpha
Three Cannon Alpha variants have received discounts of $2000, with no previous discounts available.
GWM Cannon Alpha
Drive-away price until Dec. 31
Total discount
2024 GWM Cannon Alpha Lux
$49,990
$2000
2024 GWM Cannon Alpha Ultra
$55,990
$2000
2024 GWM Cannon Alpha Ultra Hybrid
$62,990
$2000
MORE: Everything GWM Cannon Alpha
GWM Tank 300
The Tank 300’s Lux and Ultra variants have received additional discounts of $1000 each, equating to total reductions of $2000 each from their standard drive-away prices.
GWM Tank 300
Drive-away price until Dec. 31
Total discount
2024 GWM Tank 300 Lux
$45,990
$2000
2024 GWM Tank 300 Ultra
$49,990
$2000
MORE: Everything GWM Tank 300
GWM Ora
The Ora’s Extended Range and GT variants have received additional discounts of $2000 each, equating to total reductions of $6000 and $5000 respectively from their standard drive-away prices.
The filing of DRHPs by numerous companies with SEBI suggests that the IPO frenzy is unlikely to subside anytime soon. According to market experts, a record 15 mainboard IPO DRHPs were filed in just one day (September 30). This marks the highest number of DRHP filings in a single day.
“The surge in DRHP (Draft Red Herring Prospectus) filings on September 30 is also because audited financials for the quarter ending March 31 are valid only until September 30,” said Dharmesh Mehta, MD & CEO of DAM Capital.
The previous monthly record for Draft Red Herring Prospectus (DRHP) filings was in September 2010, when 34 companies submitted their documents, according to data from the Prime Database. In August 2021, 27 companies filed, while September 2007 saw 26 filings. There were two other instances – March 2010 and September 2021 – when 22 companies filed for IPO drafts in a month.
The rush among companies to tap the IPO market is on account of the buoyant secondary markets and strong investor demand.
“Fund flows from domestic institutions and retail investors into primary markets remain strong, while foreign institutional investors, though moderate in the secondary market, have been aggressive in the primary market,” said Mehta.
The 15 companies that filed on September 30 include Sambhv Steel Tubes, Jaro Institute of Technology, Viney Corporation, Scoda Tubes, Dev Accelerator, Globe Civil Projects, Ajax Engineering, Rahee Infratech, VMS TMT, Prostarm Info Systems, All Time Plastics, Vikran Engineering, Varindera Constructions, and Aditya Infotech.
A total of 120 companies have filed DRHPs in the first nine months of 2024, compared to 112 in 2023, 89 in 2022 and 126 in 2021.
Investment banker Ravi Sardana said Indian corporates are optimistic about growth and are looking to expand capacity or engage in strategic acquisitions.
“The combination of strong business prospects, a healthy equity capital market outlook, sustained domestic liquidity, and improved foreign inflows is driving many companies to reassess their IPO plans and timing,” he said.
So far in 2024, 62 companies have raised Rs 64,485 crore through IPOs, compared to Rs 49,436 crore raised by 57 companies in 2023, according to primedatabase.com.
Upcoming IPOs
All Time Plastics IPO
All Time Plastics intends to raise capital via a mix of new issue of equity shares worth up to Rs 350 crore and an offer-for-sale (OFS) of a maximum of 5,250,000 equity shares.
The company plans to use the net proceeds raised for (i) repaying a portion or all of the specific outstanding borrowings totalling Rs 120 crore, (ii) acquiring equipment and machinery for the upcoming Manekpur Facility, with an allocation of Rs 133.73 crore, (iii) and the remaining amount for general corporate purposes.
As of fiscal 2023, All Time Plastics is the second biggest B2B player in India’s plastic consumerware sector in terms of revenue. According to the Technopak Report, the company has more than 13 years of experience in producing plastic consumer items intended for everyday home use. With time, the business has developed a speciality in white-label manufacturing, creating premium goods for clients to sell under its brands. Under the exclusive brand “All Time Branded Products,” it also advertises its own line.
The issue’s book-running lead managers are DAM Capital Advisors Ltd and Intensive Fiscal Services Private Ltd.
Scoda Tubes IPO
Scoda Tubes plans to issue new equity shares worth up to Rs 275 crore. The company intends to use the funds raised from the fresh issue for expanding the production capacity of seamless and welded tubes and pipes, meeting the additional working capital needs, and general corporate purposes.
The firm is an Indian maker of stainless steel pipes and tubes with more than 14 years of expertise. Under five product lines, namely: (i) stainless steel seamless pipes; (ii) stainless steel seamless tubes; (iii) stainless steel seamless “U” tubes; (iv) stainless steel instrumentation tubes; and (v) stainless steel welded tubes and “U” tubes, the products are broadly categorised into: (i) seamless tubes/pipes; and (ii) welded tubes and pipes.
The company’s promoters, Samarth Patel, Jagrutkumar Patel, Ravi Patel, Saurabh Patel, and Vipulkumar Patel, have years of expertise in the seamless and welded stainless steel tube and pipe sector.
The issue’s lone book-running lead manager is Monarch Networth Capital.
Dev Accelerator IPO
Dev Accelerator is looking to raise funds by issuing up to 24,700,000 equity shares with a face value of Rs 2 each.
The company intends to use the proceeds to finance various objectives, including capital expenditure for outfitting new centres and for security deposits of the new centres; full or partial repayment of certain borrowings, including the redemption of non-convertible debentures issued by the company; and for general corporate purposes.
According to a JLL report, DevX is among the biggest flex space operators in Tier-2 cities in terms of operational flex stock. The company has a presence in 15 Tier-1 and Tier-2 submarkets in India and specialises in providing businesses with comprehensive built-to-suit managed office solutions. From locating office spaces to creating premises, sourcing designs, designing technological solutions, and offering full asset management, the organisation offers comprehensive services. With 25 centres spread across 11 Indian cities, the organisation served over 230 clients as of August 31, 2024.
The issue’s sole book-running lead manager is Pantomath Capital Advisors Private Ltd.
Disclaimer:Disclaimer: The views and investment tips by experts in this News18.com report are their own and not those of the website or its management. Users are advised to check with certified experts before taking any investment decisions.
P V S R N Sarma, working as a post-doctoral fellow in Department of Plant Sciences at University of Hyderabad (UoH), has been conferred with the Dr RK Nigam and Meera Nigam Medal for the best Ph.D thesis in Plant Sciences at the 24th Convocation of University of Hyderabad (uoH) on Tuesday.
Also read: University of Hyderabad faculty members awarded with Har Gobind Khorana Fellowship
The medal was presented to by Dr T G Sitaram, Chairman, AICTE, who participated as the chief guest in the convocation. Sarma worked under the guidance of senior professor and former VC of UoH Appa Rao Podile. He worked on the bioprocess for production of chitooligosaccharides and tested these products in inducing immunity in plants in comparison with the polymeric chitin and chitosan. The field experiments were conducted at the experimental farms of Nuziveedu Seeds. Results obtained by Sarma were published in high impact journals and also resulted in a patent, according to a release.
Not great for back or stomach sleepers unless you’re under 150 pounds
The Puffy Lux mattress combines plush memory foam with hybrid support, making it a great option for side sleepers who prefer a soft, cloud-like feel. With its medium-soft firmness, the mattress cradles the body, providing pressure relief while still offering support with its pocketed coils. If you enjoy sinking into a comfortable, airy foam mattress, the Puffy Lux might be a perfect fit.
Of course, people have varying preferences, so not everyone will like a soft mattress. As such, the Puffy Lux isn’t for everyone. It’s the right pick for the cozy mattress lover who loves a good memory foam feel they can nestle into. Below is my full Puffy Lux mattress review and the lowdown on whether I think it’s worth the money.
Read more: How CNET tests mattresses: We do the work so you don’t have to
Puffy
First impressions of the Puffy Lux mattress
The Puffy logo is a cloud, and clouds are scattered across the cover of the Puffy Lux mattress, so it’s safe to say I had high expectations for the softness of this mattress. I soon found out it not only talks the talk, but it walks the walk too. This mattress is like one big marshmallow. It’s very obviously a memory foam mattress, but it’s not super dense. It feels soft and gently presses against your body, cradling your curves. You can also tell it’s a hybrid mattress (the inner springs are in the bottom layer) because of how sturdy and supportive it feels. My back does sag a little bit into the bed when I’m on my back or stomach, so I feel most comfortable when I’m on my side.
Video: Puffy Lux Mattress Review
Watch CNET video producer Owen Poole review the Puffy Lux mattress.
Puffy Lux firmness and feel
How firm is the Puffy Lux mattress?
After testing and lying on this mattress, I would consider it a little softer than a medium; in between medium and medium-soft or a 4 out of 10 on the firmness scale. You sink into the mattress more than you sit on top of it, and it relieves pressure around your curves and joints. It’s not the best at keeping my back from dropping into the mattress, but it would feel more supportive for somebody who weighs under 150 pounds.
How does the Puffy Lux mattress feel?
Puffy was not shy with the memory foam in this mattress and it’s very prevalent, but it’s more light and airy than it is dense. Some memory foams take a few seconds to nestle around your body and even feel firm at first, but that’s not the case with the Puffy Lux. The soft memory foam molds around my body immediately and I slowly sink into the bed’s comfort layer. It really gives you that “ahhhh” feeling, kind of like you’re being hugged by a teddy bear.
A look at the inside of the Puffy Lux Hybrid (the pocketed coils are hiding behind the thick foam encasing, which is meant to improve edge support).
My Slumber Yard
Puffy Lux mattress construction
If you were to cut open this mattress, you’d see four different layers inside stacked on top of each other. Since I don’t suggest you ruin your mattress to peek inside, I’ll give you a breakdown of the bed’s 12-inch construction:
1. A 7-inch system of pocketed coils Puffy calls Contour Adapt coils. It’s surrounded by dense foam along the perimeter to reinforce the edges so they feel strong and sturdy if you sleep on the edge of your bed.
2. Climate Comfort foam acts as a transition layer to form a barrier in between the coils and the different foams above. It gets its name from its humidity-resistant capabilities as it wicks moisture away.
3. Plush Dual Cloud foam is comfortable foam that helps give the bed its cozy cloud feel.
4. Cooling Cloud foam helps give the mattress its soft memory foam feel that hugs your curves.
5. A hypoallergenic cover Puffy calls stain-resistant. I wouldn’t go out of your way to test this claim, but it is machine-washable in case you need to clean something up.
Puffy Lux mattress performance
Motion isolation
Even though the Puffy Lux is a hybrid mattress made with coils, it’s really good at deadening movement across the mattress. I give the credit to the several layers of memory foam stacked on the top, which absorb motion like a pro. If you share a mattress with a partner, this will help prevent you from being disturbed when they move around in the middle of the night.
Edge support
Not only does the Puffy Lux contain steel coils that help maintain the integrity of the bed’s support system, but they’re backed with dense, firm foam as a double reinforcement. If you’re forced to the edge of your mattress because your partner is a kicker or a bed hog, you won’t feel like you’re going to roll off the side.
Temperature
Don’t be fooled by the name of this bed’s Cooling Cloud foam. It’s not going to feel very cool. On the flip side, it’s not going to warm up either. Instead, I find the Puffy Lux sleeps temperature-neutral; the temperature of your room, your pajamas, the region you live in and whether or not you sleep with a partner will probably play a bigger role in how warm you get while you sleep.
Who will like the Puffy Lux mattress?
A soft firmness level is more accommodating to certain sleeping positions than others, and it’s important to pay attention to your most dominant position to determine if a mattress is going to be right for you. Your body type also plays a role in how suitable a mattress is going to be.
Position
The Puffy Lux mattress is perfectly soft and plush to relieve the hip and shoulder joints of a side sleeper.
Zooey Liao/CNET
Soft mattresses are best for side sleepers because they allow enough give for your shoulders and hips to push into the layers, for more pressure relief and comfort. Beds that feel plush may not be supportive enough to keep a stomach or back sleeper’s spine in a straight alignment, which can lead to back pain when you wake up in the morning. Unless you weigh under 150 pounds, back and stomach sleepers will want to look into a firm mattress.
Combination sleepers, on the other hand, should be just fine on this mattress as long as your primary positions aren’t your back and stomach.
Body type
Hybrid mattresses like Puffy makes are accommodating for all body types, it just depends on the level of support you’re looking for.
People who weigh over 150 pounds will appreciate the support the Puffy Lux provides with its 7-inch pocketed coil system, while petite body types can accept or pass on a hybrid depending on whether or not they want that additional support. I also see it being worth the money for somebody who strictly sleeps on their side and wants a truly plush mattress.
Puffy Lux Pricing
Size
Measurements (inches)
Price
Twin
38 x 75 inches
$2,249
Twin XL
38 x 80 inches
$2,399
Full
54 x 74 inches
$2,649
Queen
60 x 80 inches
$2,849
King
76 x 80 inches
$3,049
Cal king
72 x 84 inches
$3,049
Split king
76 x 80 inches
$3,448
I have good news and bad news. The bad news: At MSRP, the Puffy Lux mattress is a little expensive; a queen size retails for $2,849. The good news is that Puffy often offers a discount so you can walk away with a good deal. If you shop today, you can benefit from an extended Presidents Day sale happening right now.
Trial, warranty, shipping
You won’t find Puffy anywhere in stores, so you’ll have to purchase Puffy mattresses from the company’s website. Puffy does try to sweeten the deal with a nice trial period, a generous warranty policy and free shipping.
You’ll receive free shipping to your doorstep, and your mattress will arrive rolled up inside of a cardboard box. It will be a little smelly, like a new car, right when you unbox it. The smell will dissipate after a day or two.
You’ll have 101 nights to test your bed, and a lifetime warranty to back it if you decide to keep your Puffy Lux. This is pretty impressive and it shows that Puffy is confident about the integrity of its product.
Final verdict
As a stomach sleeper, for me, the Puffy Lux is a little too soft to keep my back in a proper alignment. If you’re a side sleeper or a combination sleeper who enjoys side sleeping, this mattress was made for you. Its soft, airy and fluffy foams slowly hug your body and your curves, and it’s really pleasant if you’re a sleeper who can’t get enough of memory foam. It’s a little expensive, so I might not recommend it to budget shoppers, but it’s a good pick for people who have the extra income to spend on a new bed.
You might like the Puffy Lux because:
A lifetime warranty for a mattress is impressive and showcases its quality construction.
Its soft feel is perfect for side and combination sleepers.
Its hybrid construction accommodates all body types.
Extra foam reinforcements around the edge make the sides sturdier (a plus for couples).
It boasts a comforting memory foam feel that’s light and airy.
You want an easy-to-clean mattress with a machine-washable cover.
You might not like the Puffy Lux if:
You want a firm mattress (for example, you suffer from back pain, or sleep on your back or stomach).
You dislike the feel of memory foam.
You’re on a budget.
Other mattresses from Puffy
Puffy Royal Hybrid: The Royal Hybrid mattress is one of the most luxurious offerings from Puffy. It has a responsive memory foam feel that has a nice balance between the sink-in quality of foam without being too dense. It sits between a medium and a medium-soft on our firmness scale, making it the best option for side sleepers.
How does the Puffy Lux mattress compare to other mattress?
Brooklyn Bedding Signature vs Puffy Lux: The Brooklyn Bedding Signature is another popular hybrid mattress. Instead of having a single firmness level, the Brooklyn Bedding Signature is available at three firmness levels. The softest option is around medium-soft, which is slightly softer than the Puffy Lux.
Helix Sunset Luxe vs Puffy Lux: The Helix Sunset Luxe mattress is another soft bed we’ve tested. It’s also extremely soft and great for side sleepers, although the main difference is how the mattress feels. Instead of the memory foam feel you get from Puffy, the Helix Sunset Luxe has a pillow-top feel.
The Puffy Lux mattress is a hybrid mattress with durable pocketed coils and several layers of memory foam.
We rate the Puffy Lux mattress as a medium-soft or three on our firmness scale. That means it’s best for strict-side sleepers who need a soft mattress with a lot of pressure relief. Back and stomach sleepers may find this mattress too soft for their needs.
The average lifespan of a mattress is around eight years. Although how you take care of your bed will influence how much life you get from it. Puffy backs its mattresses with a lifetime warranty.
Although breast cancer deaths have been declining for decades in the U.S., diagnoses have been on the uptick among women 50 and younger.
That’s according to a new report from the American Cancer Society (ACS) — Breast Cancer Statistics, 2024.
The good news is that since 1989, breast cancer mortality has declined overall by 44% — but diagnoses of the disease have been rising by 1% each year between 2012 and 2021.
BREAST CANCER SCREENINGS MAY DECLINE FOR WOMEN WHO RECEIVE FALSE-POSITIVE TEST RESULTS, SAYS STUDY
The biggest spike was seen among women younger than 50 (1.4% per year) and Asian-American/Pacific-Islander women (up to 2.7% per year), the report revealed.
The findings were published in CA: A Cancer Journal for Clinicians.
Although breast cancer deaths have been declining for decades in the U.S., diagnoses have been on the uptick among women 50 and younger.(iStock)
“Although the breast cancer death rate has declined by 44% thanks to advances in early detection and treatment, the continued increase in breast cancer incidence may slow progress in the future,” lead author Angela Giaquinto, associate scientist in cancer surveillance research at the ACS, told Fox News Digital.
That is especially the case among women younger than 50, she said, whose rates are increasing by 1.4% per year compared to 0.7% per year in older women.
THESE 17 CANCER TYPES ARE MORE COMMON IN GEN X AND MILLENNIALS, AS STUDY NOTES ‘ALARMING TREND’
Dr. William Dahut, chief scientific officer at the ACS, noted that women are “a lot less likely” to die from breast cancer, but that “alarming disparities” still remain — particularly for Asian-American, Pacific Islander, Native American and Black women.
“These gaps need to be rectified through systematic efforts to ensure access to high-quality screening and treatment for every woman,” he said in the release.
Women are “a lot less likely” to die from breast cancer, but that “alarming disparities” still remain — particularly for Asian-American, Pacific Islander, Native American and Black women, a researcher noted.(iStock)
The report compiled cancer data from the National Cancer Institute’s Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) program, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention’s National Program of Cancer Registries (NPCR), and the National Center for Health Statistics.
Second only to skin cancer, breast cancer is the most prevalent cancer among women.
“The reasons for the increased prevalence in breast cancer in younger patients is complicated, multifaceted and still being studied.”
This year, approximately 310,720 women will be diagnosed with invasive breast cancer and around 42,250 will die from the disease, according to the ACS.
“The increased prevalence of breast cancer is not only an issue in the U.S. — we are seeing similar trends in other countries as well,” Dr. Christopher McGreevy, associate chief of breast surgery at Hackensack University Medical Center in New Jersey, told Fox News Digital.
Potential reasons for the younger trend
“The reasons for the increased prevalence of breast cancer in younger patients are complicated, multifaceted and still being studied,” said McGreevy, who was not involved in the report.
SENIORS AND BREAST CANCER: WHY AREN’T OLDER WOMEN TOLD TO GET MAMMOGRAMS?
One reason for early-onset breast cancer is that more patients are obese, the doctor noted.
“Excess weight, particularly after menopause, fuels estrogen production, a key driver of certain breast cancers,” he said.
The best means of prevention is to talk to your doctor about getting screened, according to researchers.(iStock)
Delayed childbearing can also increase the onset of the disease, McGreevy noted, as pregnancy reduces women’s breast cancer risk.
“Environmental toxins, lurking in everything from plastics to pesticides, are also suspected contributors,” he said.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“These endocrine disruptors mimic estrogen in the body, potentially triggering abnormal cell growth.”
Genetics could also factor into the uptick, according to the doctor.
The rise among younger women could also be a consequence of the COVID-19 pandemic, fueled by delayed diagnoses due to interruptions in screening, according to the researchers.(iStock)
“Certain gene mutations, like BRCA1 and BRCA2, significantly elevate the risk of breast cancer, even at a young age,” he said.
The rise among younger women could also be a consequence of the COVID-19 pandemic, fueled by delayed diagnoses due to interruptions in screening, according to the researchers.
Potential limitations
There were some limitations associated with the study, the researchers acknowledged.
“The risk and trends in the study are for all women and are not able to account for individual patient characteristics, such as comorbidities or treatment received, or control for social determinants of health, such as insurance status,” Giaquinto told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“We also present statistics for the broadly defined racial and ethnic groups, which mask substantial differences within these populations.”
Prevention tips
The best means of prevention is to talk to your doctor about getting screened, according to Giaquinto.
“Early detection of breast cancer is one of the best tools we have for improving survival,” she told Fox News Digital.
“Women can also reduce their risk of breast cancer by moderating alcohol consumption if they drink, maintaining a healthy body weight and being physically active,” the researcher advised.(iStock)
“All women should keep up to date with their recommended breast cancer screenings. This is especially relevant for younger women, as the recommended age of the United States Preventive Services Task Force was recently dropped to age 40.”
Women should also be aware of their family history and personal risk factors, Giaquinto added.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“Women can also reduce their risk of breast cancer by moderating alcohol consumption if they drink, maintaining a healthy body weight and being physically active,” the researcher advised.
“About 30% of all breast cancers are attributed to these lifestyle factors.”
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Navratri 2024: India is a land of festivals, and one of the most eagerly awaited celebrations is the nine-day extravaganza of Sharad Navratri. Commencing on October 3, 2024, and concluding on October 12, Navratri 2024 promises to be a vibrant and spiritually significant event. This festivity, dedicated to the nine forms of the goddess, marks a time when devotees across India fast, pray and follow a strict vegetarian diet, also known as Vrat foods. In many households, this diet excludes onions and garlic, emphasizing pure and satvik cuisine.
Navratri Fasting and Food:
During Navratri fasting, followers consume a variety of ingredients, including fruits, potatoes, sago, water chestnut flour, buckwheat flour, milk, curd, paneer, and milk products. Rock salt replaces regular salt in these dishes. Despite the limited ingredients, traditional Indian recipes can be prepared to ensure that fasting doesn’t leave you hungry.
Also Read: Make Palak Toovar Dal, But Dhaba-Style! Check How
Let’s explore a Navratri special thali that offers a delectable array of Vrat foods, reminiscent of everyday Indian dishes but with a satvik twist, free from grains and pulses.
Navratri Thali – 7 Traditional Indian Recipes That You Must Try
1. Kuttu Puri:
Kuttu Puri, a crispy delight, is made from buckwheat flour, mashed boiled potatoes, and a blend of aromatic spices. It pairs wonderfully with potato curry or can be made with Rajgira (water chestnut flour) for variation. Click here for the recipe
2. Rajgira Kadhi:
A beloved North Indian favourite, Kadhi, gets a fasting-friendly makeover with Rajgira flour, curd, ginger, green chilli, cumin, and a hint of sugar. Unlike regular Kadhi, turmeric is omitted in this version. Click here for the recipe
3. Vrat Wale Aloo Rasedar:
This traditional Indian potato curry is a Navratri staple. Made with cumin, curd, ginger, and rock salt, it’s perfect for lunch or dinner, best enjoyed with kuttu ki puri or roti. Click here for the recipe
4. Sabudana Khichdi:
Hailing from Western India, especially Maharashtra, Gujarat, and Rajasthan, Sabudana Khichdi is a light and flavorful dish made from sago pearls, blended with mild spices, and can be served with curd. Click here for the recipe
5. Vrat-Friendly Kaddu Ki Sabzi:
Add variety to your fasting meals with this pumpkin-based dish. Mix pumpkin pieces with a tantalizing spice blend and savour this flavorful recipe for lunch or dinner during Navratri fasting. Click here for the recipe
6. Kebab e Kela:
These Vrat-special kebabs crafted from raw bananas offer a delectable taste experience. They’re prepared by mixing raw bananas with buckwheat flour, green chillies, red chillies, ginger, and rock salt. Click here for the recipe
7. Vratwale Paneer Roll:
Paneer, a rich source of protein, takes centre stage in this Vrat Paneer Roll. Prepare these rolls by mixing grated paneer with potatoes, rock salt, and spices, then pan-fry or deep-fry for a filling and tasty snack. Click here for the recipe
Embrace the spirit of Navratri 2024 by savouring these delightful traditional Indian recipes crafted for your Navratri fasting days. Share your favourite Indian recipe with us in the comments below, and enjoy the festivities with delicious, satvik flavours. Happy Sharad Navratri 2024!
Fifteen years ago, operations at Piraeus Port in Greece were devastated by the global financial crisis, and the port was on the brink of bankruptcy.
Despite an international lack of confidence, a Chinese company invested.
In 2010, Piraeus Container Terminal, a subsidiary of China’s COSCO Shipping, took over the management of terminals II and III of the port, and six years later, COSCO Shipping acquired a majority stake in Piraeus Port Authority (PPA).
“For China, Piraeus Port is a bet. For Greek people, the growth of Piraeus Port is also a bet,” Savvas Sanozidis, secretary of the board of directors for Piraeus Port, told CGTN.
The result of the twin bets has been win-win, and Piraeus Port has become an important driver in the Sino-Greek efforts to develop the China-proposed Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).
Today, Piraeus Port is one of the biggest container terminals, ferry ports, and railway or car terminal premises in Europe. The PPA announced record-high turnover and profits in 2023, with total revenues of 219.8 million euros ($237.13 million).
The success of the port has had a knock-on effect for the development of local businesses, communities and the Greek economy. About 4,300 direct jobs have been created, and almost 45 percent of the people who work for PPA come from nearby communities. In 2022, the company’s tax and social security contributions surpassed 70 million euros, over 1.56 percent of Greece’s GDP.
Sanozidis, who has worked for PPA for 17 years, believes the secret behind the port’s success lies in learning and sharing between two civilizations. “Chinese people are very methodological, the Greeks are very flexible, somehow, together, the results are great.”
For George Papandreou, who was prime minister of Greece when the Sino-Greek cooperation project at Piraeus Port started in 2009, harmonious cooperation towards common goals is of great importance.
“I believe in our civilizations, both the Chinese civilization and Greek civilization, the ancient Greek civilization, we have concepts which provide us with guidelines to (achieve) more harmonious cooperation in our world,” Papandreou said.
More than trade
Chinese President Xi Jinping has repeatedly called for respect for the diversity of civilizations and highlighted the importance of mutual learning between different civilizations.
“Without achieving the good of 100 various schools, the uniqueness of one individual cannot be achieved,” Xi once said, citing an ancient Chinese saying to make his point.
“No civilization in the world is superior to others; every civilization is special and unique to its own region. Civilizations can achieve harmony, only through communication, and can make progress only through harmonization,” Xi added.
The ancient Silk Road was a route for trade in goods, but a byproduct was the stimulation of diverse civilization exchanges between the East and the West. Passing on the tradition of the Silk Road, one of the goals of the BRI is to promote mutual understanding, respect and admiration among different civilizations.
Over the decade since the BRI was put forward in 2013, diverse cultural exchanges among partner countries have flourished. According to a white paper on Belt and Road cooperation issued by China’s State Council, by the end of June 2023, China had signed cultural and tourism cooperation documents with 144 BRI partners.
China released the Education Action Plan for the Belt and Road Initiative in 2016 to promote international education exchanges and cooperation. By the end of June 2023, China had signed agreements with 45 participating countries on the mutual recognition of higher education degrees.
China has also set up the Silk Road Scholarship for 10,000 students from Belt and Road partner countries to study in China each year.
At last year’s third Belt and Road Forum for International Cooperation, China announced a series of new measures to further promote cultural and people-to-people exchanges, including hosting a special forum to enhance civilization dialogue with BRI partner countries, launching the International Tourism Alliance of Silk Road Cities, and continuing with the Chinese government scholarship Silk Road Program.
When visiting Greece in 2019, President Xi was given a special tour of Piraeus Port. “Seeing is believing,” Xi said when witnessing the new lease of life at the port. “The BRI is not a slogan or tale, but a successful practice and brilliant reality.”
CN201 is currently being evaluated in Phase I and Phase Ib/II clinical trials for relapsed or refractory non-Hodgkin lymphoma and B-cell acute lymphocytic leukemia.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PROIZVOĐAČ Nokia mobitela HMD Global počeo je lansirati mobitele koji nose upravo ime tvrtke, a pretežito su to lako priuštivi uređaji nižeg i srednjeg cjenovnog ranga. No tvrtka se trenutno sprema lansirati snažniji flagship mobitel nešto više cijene.
Plodna godina za HMD Global
Prema informacijama koje su procurile na X-u (bivšem Twitteru), prvi flagship uređaj koji će biti dostupan bit će HMD Moon Knight. Moon Knight trebao bi imati P-OLED ekran s FHD+ rezolucijom i osvježavanjem od 144 Hz.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Uređaj će, prema glasinama, pokretati Qualcomm Snapdragon 8s Gen 3 čip. Mobitel bi trebao imati četiri kamere i stereo zvučnike. Dodatne informacije o kameri u ovom trenutku nisu poznate. Konačno, mobitel će podržavati 5G.
Ranije ove godine HMD GLobal je predstavio prvu vlastitu seriju pametnih telefona naziva Pulse, a poseban su naglasak stavili na jednostavno popravljanje uređaja. HMD je također osvježio klasične Nokia mobitele dodajući im suvremene značajke poput USB-C punjenja. Ovog je ljeta brend posebnu pozornost privukao Barbie mobitelom koji je prilagođena verzija Nokije 2660 Flip.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
How well have the Dodgers gotten to know Shohei Ohtani this year?
Well enough for several of his new teammates to draw a similar conclusion about the superstar’s personality, noticing an unexpected dichotomy at the heart of the 30-year-old’s success.
“[He can] be goofy and playful and look like he’s really having fun playing the game,” said veteran utilityman Chris Taylor. “But then also at the same time be super focused and locked in.”
“He’s pretty serious,” catcher Austin Barnes echoed. “But he can joke and mess around, too. He makes me laugh.”
“He does a great job of having a childlike joy toward the game,” added reliever Blake Treinen, “but playing it like a grown man.”
“He’s almost like a little kid, trapped in a giant body,” Kiké Hernández explained. “He doesn’t necessarily always show it. But I was surprised by how much personality he has.”
Indeed, for as much as Ohtani has surpassed expectations on the field this season — he’s all but to certain to win a third career most valuable player award with 54 home runs, 59 stolen bases, a .310 batting average and 130 RBIs on a first-place Dodgers team that begins its postseason on Saturday — his acclimation behind the scenes has been equally noteworthy to people around the team.
He doesn’t exactly crack jokes. Or demand attention with showy off-field antics. But, in the first season of the 10-year, $700-million contract he signed last December, he developed a reputation as one of the more jovial characters among this year’s cast of players.
“He’s still a very private guy, but I think he just really wants to be looked at as just one of the guys,” manager Dave Roberts said. “Every day, every interaction, he’s very present and engaged.”
On the morning of the Dodgers’ regular-season finale last week, for example, Ohtani’s laughter rose about the din of morning chatter in a sleepy pregame clubhouse.
In the corner of the room, he and Teoscar Hernández were cracking up at their lockers. At one point, Ohtani snapped his head back with a high-pitched cackle, giggling with a wide smile planted on his face.
“He’s awesome,” Hernández said of Ohtani’s sense of humor. “And, he’s not that quiet.”
Minutes later, though, Ohtani’s attention shifted to pregame preparation. Sitting alongside first base coach Clayton McCullough, he stoically studied an iPad with the scouting report for that day’s pitcher, formulating his daily plan of attack to try to steal a base.
“Everybody says he’s kind of a private guy, but within the clubhouse and within our guys, he’s been awesome,” pitcher Clayton Kershaw said. “You can obviously see how much he cares about winning.”
The Dodgers’ Freddie Freeman celebrates his home run against the Diamondbacks with teammates, including Mookie Betts, right, and Shohei Ohtani, second from right, during a game last month.
(Ross D. Franklin / Associated Press)
It was the epitome of what Dodgers players have come to appreciate about Ohtani this season.
A lighthearted presence one moment. “He’s always got a great attitude, and he’s got a sneaky personality that’s kind of funny,” Treinen said.
Then, single-minded focus the next.
“It’s a special talent to be able to do,” Taylor said. “Being super focused and locked in and having the work ethic he has.”
While Ohtani has long been known for the latter during his MLB career, his open disposition wasn’t evident early in his Dodgers tenure, when he arrived with a notorious reputation for privacy.
Accompanied by his longtime interpreter, Ippei Mizuhara, at the start of spring training, there was initially a “buffer” between Ohtani and the rest of the club, as Roberts later described it. Many of Ohtani’s early interactions with teammates were limited to on-field workouts, with the slugger seemingly at a distance in the clubhouse. Mizuhara was even known to text fellow players on Ohtani’s behalf, while Ohtani himself rarely engaged in a roster-wide group message.
“It was difficult,” Roberts said of the Dodgers’ initial communication process with Ohtani when Mizuhara was still around.
But then the Dodgers went to South Korea for their season-opening series in late March. Mizuhara’s theft and gambling plot was uncovered after their opening day game. And by the time the team returned home, a new dynamic was taking shape between Ohtani and the rest of the roster — which rallied around their new star while never casting doubt about his innocence in the scandal.
“I don’t know if the situation helped him just kind of have no choice but to feel like he’s part of the group, or [if it was] him appreciating how much we had his back, and how much we were supporting him through the probably worst times of his life, of his career,” Kiké Hernández said. “But what I’ve seen from him since — and maybe he was gonna show that regardless — but I’m just surprised by his personality and all that. He’s one of us. He’s one of the boys. And I’m glad to have him in the group.”
Teoscar Hernández, a fellow free-agent signing in his first year with the Dodgers, was among the first to develop a bond with Ohtani, giving him rudimentary lessons in his primary language, Spanish, while Ohtani taught him some basic Japanese.
“It’s been great,” said Hernández, who noted that while their language “classes” have become more infrequent over the season, their friendship has only grown tighter with time. “We try to be really close.”
An early-season rain delay at Wrigley Field offered another peek at the lighter side of Ohtani’s persona, as he toyed around with a cricket bat in the batting cages to the amusement of his teammates.
“This guy’s vibrant, playful, jokes a lot,” strength and conditioning coach Travis Smith said. “Some guys are just always focused. That’s all they do. So [it’s unique] being able to see a guy be lighthearted and play around, and then once he hits the field, it’s go time.”
Reliever Alex Vesia, who often occupies a seat near Ohtani at the back of the team’s plane, laughed as he recounted how the famously heavy sleeper will usually sprawl out across an empty row, leaving some of his 6-foot-4 frame occasionally dangling in the aisle.
“He’s the most down-to-earth, normal human ever,” Vesia said.
Ohtani’s love of Japanese anime has become another point of fascination for his Dodgers teammates. Even on the night he eclipsed the 50-homer, 50-steal threshold with a historic six-hit game in Miami, “we go on the bus and talk about anime shows,” reliever Joe Kelly said.
“For being not only good at baseball, but being a worldwide known face … I don’t ever see him stressed out or anything,” Kelly said. “That’s probably the craziest thing about it.”
That doesn’t mean the celebrity circus that Ohtani attracts — reluctantly — has been without drawbacks for the Dodgers this season.
When Roberts jokingly suggested in spring training that the since-released Jason Heyward serve as Ohtani’s unofficial spokesman for the media horde tasked to cover him, dozens of reporters descended upon the veteran outfielder the following day.
Heyward took it in stride, but also noted: “Shohei is the guy to talk about Shohei” — something that has happened less and less this year as Ohtani cut off pregame media sessions midseason.
There was also the Dodgers’ home opener in March, when several players visibly expressed frustration at a clogged up clubhouse, wondering aloud how the presence of so many reporters would affect their new daily reality.
In the six months since, many players and coaches have done more Ohtani-related interviews than they can count, from local L.A. press to international scribes to multicamera sitdowns for TV specials airing in Japan.
Whatever nuisance that has created, however, has been more than compensated by Ohtani’s on-field production and off-field temperament.
When fellow superstar Mookie Betts was asked during the Dodgers’ final homestand if it felt like Ohtani was carrying the team, he answered, “That’s pretty obvious. … That’s why he got $700 million, to carry us, and we just have to support him.”
A few days before that, in the team’s first home game after Ohtani eclipsed the 50-50 mark, Kershaw led an impromptu dugout ovation before Ohtani’s first at-bat.
“He really, really wants to [win] and gets excited about the possibility of postseason stuff, which is awesome,” Kershaw said. “[We] kind of feed off the energy, for sure, with our club.”
Those moments all trace back to Ohtani’s ability to ingratiate himself with his new teammates this year.
He has razzed them in conversation, with English that those around the club have repeatedly complimented as better than they anticipated, offered encouragement in the dugout, and, with an easygoing outlook belied by his laser focus on the field, been present in the daily rhythms of the season, bridging the gap that once existed between him and his new team.
“I think we’ve gotten to know him enough to know what he’s all about,” Kiké Hernández said. “I’m just glad we’re seeing who Shohei is, and that we can all have a good time.”
Tech giant Google is set to unveil a feature for Google Earth, dubbed ‘Time Machine’, which will allow users to view imagery dating back as early as the 1930s. This launch will enable users to explore aerial and satellite images from the past 80 years.
Presently, Google Earth already has the functionality to allow users to view images that date back to several decades. However, the latest update will ensure access to images spanning up to 8 decades. This feature will encompass several historical cities, like Paris, London, Warsaw, San Fransisco, and more, giving users a glimpse of how these cities appeared in the 1930s.
The new feature will enable users to compare historical images with the current view of the locations, offering a deeper understanding of how landscapes across various locations have changed over time.
In a demonstration, Google showed the comparison of San Fransisco’s images from 1938 and 2024, underscoring how the city’s ports have changed over time, with cruise ships and restaurants replacing the old shipping hubs.
Users will be able to access this feature both on mobile and web platforms, as the company is set to unveil this feature in just a few weeks.
The current update will also include an expansion of the Street View Feature, which will be available in approximately 80 countries, further improving the visual exploration experience.
Google also seeks to integrate Artificial Intelligence (AI) to enhance the quality of images on both Google Earth and Google Maps. This AI integration will ensure clearer and sharper images, enhancing users’ overall experience.
More Chinese are headed to Europe and other far-flung hotspots during the Golden Week holiday that sees hundreds of millions in the country on the move, in the most robust signs of a travel rebound since the country re-opened its borders.
Golden Week 2024 travel trend: Chinese tourists are skipping Tokyo for these visa-free destinations (File Photo by Olympia DE MAISMONT/AFP)
Bookings for overseas flights and hotels have spiked from last year’s holiday week, with international flight reservations doubling and Europe showing some of the the biggest growth, according to Qunar and Trip.com, among the biggest online travel agencies in China. Overseas car rental bookings have surged by more than 150% from 2023, while cruise vacations have spiked seven-fold, according to Fliggy, Alibaba Group Holding Ltd.’s travel unit.
Asian destinations from Japan to Malaysia are favored during the week-long holiday that starts Oct. 1, while some of the fastest-growing bookings are to long-haul spots including Belgium, Croatia, Nordic countries as well as the United Arab Emirates.
“We expect an October Golden Week that will come closer than any previous Chinese holiday period since the country’s reopening to meeting pre-pandemic levels,” according to a report by Dragon Trail International, which tracks travel sentiment and trends in the country.
Visa-Free Boost
The recovery of overseas tourism from China is a critical metric for the global travel industry. Chinese holidaymakers, known for outspending tourists from most other countries before the pandemic, made 170 million trips abroad in 2019 and spent almost 1.7 trillion yuan ($242 billion) — making up 14% of global tourism spending, according to World Travel and Tourism Council data.
While international travel from China hasn’t fully recovered, airlines have allocated about 1.6 million seats on overseas flights from the mainland for Oct. 1 through Oct. 7 — about 20% below pre-pandemic levels, according to a Bloomberg analysis of Cirium flight data. Meanwhile, air ticket data from flight analytics firm ForwardKeys shows an even smaller gap for flight demand compared to 2019. Growth to some overseas destinations, particularly those with visa-free policies, is particularly striking, said Nan Dai, China market analyst at ForwardKeys.
Malaysia’s capital city of Kuala Lumpur has seen a 142% increase in visitors compared to pre-pandemic levels, as well as double-digit growth to Hong Kong, Macau and Singapore where visa-free initiatives have boosted tourism, according to ForwardKeys.
Travel Shifts
With over-tourism a challenge in many hotspot locales, Chinese tourists are shifting from big group tours to solo or couple trips to less-trafficked locations during this holiday. Japanese cities including Yokohama, Takayama and Ito — less popular than the Tokyo-Osaka-Kyoto circuit — have shown triple-digit booking growth, according to Trip.com. Nature and wellness holidays are also on the rise, with Phu Quoc island in Vietnam as well as the hot spring town of Higashizu in Japan seeing a surge in demand.
Still, most of the travel will be on the mainland, where domestic tourism has rebounded strongly. Shuozhou in the northern province of Shanxi, as well as other cities in the province, have become hot destinations after the hit video game Black Myth: Wukong featured the region’s stunning scenery, pagodas and temples.
China expects domestic trips and tourist spending in the first nine months of 2024 to rise 16.8% and 17.1% on-year, respectively, inching closer to full-year 2019 level, according to an official briefing on Monday. Inbound visitor numbers are expected to surge to 95 million in the first three quarters of the year, a level representing 93.4% of the same period in 2019.
Authorities are also mulling supporting concerts, sports events and popular TV series as a means to boost tourism, officials said at the same briefing. Some local governments will also offer tourists millions of yuan worth of coupons to boost consumption.
Despite a sluggish economy and constrained consumer spending, Chinese on holiday are expected to make 1.94 billion trips on the mainland during the Golden Week — more trips than the number of citizens in the country, according to the government. That’ll be a nearly 20% jump over the same period in 2019.
Even as Cirium data showed airlines have scheduled about 17 million seats on domestic routes, up 22% from 2019, many more will be driving or using high-speed rail. The government estimates that eight out of 10 trips will be made by car.
Elton John is the focus of a new behind-the-scenes documentary chronicling his record-breaking 50-year career. Streaming later this year, Elton John: Never Too Late takes fans on an ‘uplifting full-circle journey’ through the singer-songwriter’s extraordinary career that has seen him become one of the most successful musicians of all time.
As per the official synopsis, the ‘emotionally charged’ and ‘intimate’ film follows Elton as he looks back on his life and the astonishing early days of his 50-year career. As he prepares for his final concert in North America at Los Angeles’ Dodger Stadium, Elton takes viewers back in time and recounts the extraordinary highs and heartbreaking lows of his early years and how he overcame adversity, abuse and addiction to become the icon he is today.
The film features iconic concert footage from Elton’s career and hears from the legendary musician as he speaks candidly about his extraordinary rise to success, the personal challenges he faced and how his family has changed him. It is also set to feature a brand-new original song.
Elton John: Never Too Late will debut with a limited theatrical run on November 15 before premiering December 13 on Disney+. Elton fans can join Disney+ for £4.99 a month, or save with the annual Standard plan for £79.90 before it increases on October 17.
Signing up for the annual plan before the deadline gives members 12 months for the price of 10 and locks in the cheaper rate for a year. For those looking for a bigger saving, a 12-month subscription to the Premium plan now costs £109.90 – saving £21.98 compared to paying monthly – and includes higher video quality up to 4K UHD and HDR, plus the ability to stream on four devices simultaneously.
Disney+ unveiled the trailer for Never Too Late on Monday (September 30), which sees Elton reflect on the early days of his career.
“At the time, there was an emptiness within me,” he says in the new footage. “My soul had gone dark, I’d gone dark. I wasn’t a joy to be around.”
The series also hears Elton open up about his struggles with success, his sexuality and drugs.
“I didn’t have anything apart from my success and my drugs. I felt there must be something more to life than this.”
The series is directed by R.J. Cutler – whose credits include Nashville and Belushi – and Elton’s husband David Furnish. It comes as the Rocket Man singer called time on his live career last year with a 330-date world tour that spanned five years.
The Farewell Yellow Brick Road tour saw Elton headline 2023’s Glastonbury Festival before closing the tour with four dates in Europe, with his final performance taking place in Stockholm in July. Elton John: Never Too Late joins Disney’s expanding library of music documentaries that includes The Beatles: Get Back, The Beach Boys and upcoming Bruce Springsteen film, Road Diary.
Elsewhere, Amazon’s Prime Video is the home of a raft of documentaries like I Am: Celine Dion, Federer: Twelve Final Days and Amy Winehouse: The Price of Fame, all of which can be streamed free with an Amazon Prime subscription or 30-day free trial.
Rising floodwaters caused by Hurricane Helene may have caused this Tesla to catch fire, with footage of the dramatic blaze uploaded online.
The Pinellas County Government – which encompasses an area just west of Tampa, Florida – posted a video from a Nest home camera, showing a Tesla Model X in a garage suddenly catching fire.
A loud bang can be heard before flames quickly rise up the outside of the electric vehicle (EV), filling the garage with smoke.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
The flames continue to burn with gases appearing to emanate from the battery pack.
While the blaze continues to be investigated, it’s understood it started from the salty flood water penetrating the Tesla’s battery, with the salt acting as a conductor of electricity.
Prior to the Category 4 hurricane, EV owners were urged to drive their cars to higher ground.
Tesla recommends submerged models be inspected first before being started again.
Tragically, more than 120 lives have been lost due to Hurricane Helene and approximately 600 more are missing across North and South Carolina, Georgia, Florida, Tennessee and Virginia.
The term of the current external members – Ashima Goyal, Shashanka Bhide and Jayanth Varma – was due to end on Oct. 4.(Representative image)
Ram Singh is the director of the Delhi School of Economics, with experience in teaching, research and publishing. Nagesh Kumar is the director of the Institute for Studies in Industrial Development. Saugata Bhattacharya is an economist specialising in economic and financial markets analysis and policy advocacy
India’s government said on Tuesday it had appointed Ram Singh, Saugata Bhattacharya and Nagesh Kumar as new members of the central bank’s rate-setting monetary policy committee.
The three new external members have been appointed for a four-year term with immediate effect, a statement said.
The six-member MPC, which consists of three RBI and three external members, is due to meet Oct. 7-9. In its August policy meeting, the MPC kept the repo rate unchanged at 6.50% for a ninth straight time.
The MPC is chaired by the RBI governor.
Ram Singh is the director of the Delhi School of Economics, with experience in teaching, research and publishing. Nagesh Kumar is the director of the Institute for Studies in Industrial Development.
Saugata Bhattacharya is an economist specialising in economic and financial markets analysis and policy advocacy.
The term of the current external members – Ashima Goyal, Shashanka Bhide and Jayanth Varma – was due to end on Oct. 4.
The reshuffle could change a recent split view within the panel which saw two of the six members vote for a rate cut on the argument that high inflation adjusted real rates could hurt the economy’s growth.
A restructured committee could also choose to take a different view, focusing on global conditions, where the slowdown concerns have prompted the U.S. Federal Reserve to cut interest rates last month.
Besides the external members, RBI governor Shaktikanta Das and his two deputies are due to exit their posts.
Governor Das’ second term ends on Dec. 10, and another extension would be unprecedented.
A month later, deputy governor Michael Patra, who heads the central bank’s monetary policy division, will also complete an extended term.
Another deputy governor – Rajeshwar Rao – who leads the banking regulation department is due to complete his term in early October.
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – Reuters)
In my opening keynote talk last year, I proclaimed, “Content marketing is marketing.” It felt slightly provocative at the time.
As it turns out, the entire marketing practice has evolved to embrace something familiar to those practicing content marketing: delivering value through trusted content-driven experiences.
Independent of the paid, owned, and earned media approach, most marketing organizations focus more on creating trust than grabbing attention.
To be clear, I don’t mean to suggest that classic direct marketing and advertising techniques are dead. Nothing is dead.
I just mean that modern marketing techniques require teams that have assembled their operations like a media organization rather than as a trading desk, arbitraging attention, clicks, and search results.
The old marketing career ladder doesn’t fit the new model
It’s been a weird year in marketing. I’ve been saying that for 18 months, but it’s still true. There’s the quiet recession in B2B marketing. There are challenges in the job market. And AI continues to suck the oxygen out of every discussion of possible innovations.
But as much as marketing seems to have changed, many things remain the same.
For example, many mistakenly believe that people stay in their jobs for much shorter durations than they used to.
In fact, the average job tenure has remained about five years since the early 1980s. While more tenure differences exist with age and gender, it’s a myth that young people have become drastically less loyal to working for the same company.
But how can young people be called the “job-hopping” generation if their average tenure is similar?
It would be easy to chalk it up to young people’s impatience. Gallup research finds that only half of workers ages 25 to 40 strongly agreed they would be working at their company in a year, while 60% of older workers said the same.
However, those numbers are too similar to be distinctive. After all, if 40% of one part of your workforce and 50% of another aren’t confident they’ll be there in a year, something else is at work.
We found a similar tension in CMI’s 2025 Career Outlook for Content and Marketing Professionals.
Overall, marketers are optimistic about their jobs and careers. More than three-quarters (76%) are somewhat or very satisfied in their marketing role. Even so, more than a third (35%) say they’re actively pursuing or highly interested in finding another job. That’s up 4 points from last year and 7 points from two years ago.
What gives?
The answer stems from the redefinition of “career management” in marketing and the corresponding lack of response from many businesses.
Put simply: Organizations have evolved their marketing operations, but the related career paths are dead-end labyrinths.
How it started …
In the 1990s and into the 2000s (yes, I was around then), businesses would hire bright young people fresh out of college or university and plug them into entry-level marketing positions.
The company laid out a path — a ladder — to climb for more responsibility and higher pay. The person would advance from coordinator to manager to senior manager to director to vice president, senior vice president, and perhaps even the C-suite.
The ladder reflected an employee’s ability to advance from a “skilled player” contributor to a manager of people, teams, divisions, geographies, and companies.
The employee’s marketing specialty dictated how they might move across different ladders. Product marketing, brand, sales, and communications had distinct, functional career paths.
Then, digital entered the picture. Companies started distinguishing between “digital marketing” and “other marketing.” (Some companies still do that today. Yes, it’s weird.)
But worse, companies chopped digital marketing into channel-based silos like web, email, and social. It created confused and siloed versions of career paths.
Is it any wonder content marketing grew to be yet another marketing silo without a clear career path?
Career silos have also arisen because of the flattening of organizational structures. With the rise of tech-driven marketing, many businesses removed middle management in favor of more agile, fast, and multifunctional digital teams. Practitioners focused on channels, and leaders spent time de-siloing (or de-duplicating) the channel teams.
This chaotic organization obfuscates what it means to manage your marketing career in one organization. And it changes the nature of what managing a marketing career even means.
If marketing leaders care about retaining great talent, businesses must redefine, clarify, and communicate the pathways in their organizations.
How it’s going…
In almost every business I’ve consulted with in recent years, content and marketing managers have three choices after they reach a specific level. They can:
Move into a more siloed technology-driven marketing role, leaving integrated marketing and content behind to optimize one aspect of the marketing portfolio. (Senior director of social media, anybody?)
Depart for a lateral position at another company.
Leave to build a solo practice.
Again, the 2025 Career Outlook for Content and Marketing Professionals validates that experience.
We asked marketers why they think it’s more challenging to find a marketing job than it was five years ago. Most (75%) attributed it to financial/economic pressure on companies, but the next four responses were:
More competition for jobs (69%)
Marketers not valued (55%)
Poorly defined career path/ladder (34%)
Poorly defined job responsibilities (34%)
Content and marketing professionals have lost their identity inside companies. Typically, there is no obvious next career move. Therefore, they must prioritize avenues that lead to a better (if still siloed) marketing job.
That’s why most respondents (76%) agreed they need to “master specialized/niche skills to remain relevant.”
This isn’t surprising.
Most businesses are still (almost five years later) trying to evolve in or out of remote work and other digital disruptions of the pandemic. Many, if not most, younger marketers likely have never seen a clear marketing career path.
Why we need new marketing career paths
When I was CMO of a fast-growing startup, a mentor told me hiring someone is the only truly expensive thing a company does. So, he said, “Make sure you do it carefully.”
If hiring is expensive, so is losing a great employee. Some reports place the cost at 21% of the position’s annual pay on average.
The answer to retaining great talent can’t be to tie the content and marketing practitioner to some traditional siloed digital marketing career ladder. That misses the point of modern marketing — and jeopardizes your organization’s ability to retain the talented communicators of tomorrow.
Your HR department almost certainly has an established career ladder for some traditional marketing roles. It has job descriptions for entry-level marketing specialists, marketing managers, senior email managers, social media directors, etc.
But do those roles and descriptions match what’s really going on with marketing teams in 2024?
In my experience, many don’t. I’m often asked to help organizations create new roles.
For now, I’m not suggesting the roles, titles, or even the kind of team you should build. (If you’re interested in my recommendations for content marketing-related career paths, read The 7 Core Roles of a Content Marketing Team.)
I’m working to create new career path resources that reflect the reality of modern marketing organizations, so look for that later this year. In the meantime, consider this column the beginning of the new marketing career path discussion, not the end.
Creating valuable content-driven experiences has become a foundational element of modern marketing. Businesses that differentiate to attract and retain their talent will build the career paths that support it.
I’d love to hear your thoughts about the marketing career ladder. Look for me on LinkedIn to continue the discussion.
If you’re hiring, send the details of your open position to [email protected], and we’ll add it to our Content Marketing Job Listings page.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
After THE financial crisis of 2007-09, global house prices fell by 6% in real terms. But, before long, they picked up again, and sailed past their pre-crisis peak. When covid-19 struck, economists reckoned a property crash was on the way. In fact there was a boom, with mask-wearing house-hunters fighting over desirable nests. And then from 2021 onwards, as central banks raised interest rates to defeat inflation, fears mounted of a house-price horror show. In fact, real prices fell by just 5.6%—and now they are rising fast again. Housing seems to have a remarkable ability to keep appreciating, whatever the weather. It will probably defy gravity even more insolently in the coming years.
Apple’s iPad lineup has never been so strong, and it’s responsible for some of the best tablets on the market right now. They’re an easy choice for people who already live within the Apple ecosystem. They’re fast, feature long-lasting batteries and are highly portable. The latest high-end M4 iPad Pro is a powerful tablet with a stunning display, for example, but it’s also among the most expensive tablets we’ve seen. Thankfully, there are deals to be had across the lineup, including on the diminutive iPad Mini and the capable M2 iPad Air. That M4 iPad Pro, the best iPad in Apple’s lineup, can often be picked up with a discount.
Hey, did you know? CNET Deals texts are free, easy and save you money.
We’ll be updating this list regularly to ensure it reflects the most recent prices, so be sure to check back later if you don’t see something that’s right for you today.
Read more: Best iPad for 2024: Navigating Apple’s Tablets
Best iPad deals
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
It’s a little older, but the 10.2-inch iPad from 2021 is still a solid option. It lacks USB-C support, but it’s an excellent price, which makes it a good choice for kids or just as a backup option. The 64GB model is currently discounted by $105.
Read our ninth-gen iPad review.
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
The latest model of the iPad Mini packs a lot of might into such a small device. Just a touch bigger than a mobile phone, this is great for those who want a tablet that’s truly portable. It’s $110 off at Amazon right now.
Read our iPad Mini review.
Apple/CNET
The latest version of the iPad Air comes with a fast M2 chip and a choice of 11- and 13-inch display sizes. It’s fast and sleek, and right now you can save on yours with the biggest savings available on the bigger display.
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
This iPad Air is an excellent choice for anyone who wants a fast and efficient device. It’s got power and speed aplenty, and while the screen isn’t the best on the market, it still does a good job at streaming shows and handling late-night work sessions. It isn’t the newest model and is increasingly difficult to find. Right now it’s out of stock and the newer sixth-gen model might be a better bet.
Read our iPad Air 2022 review.
Apple/CNET
Our review team noted this generation iPad Pro was the best for Apple Pencil fans, but that’s not the only thing this model has going for it. The powerful M2 chip isn’t as cutting edge as the M4 chip, but this iPad still gets the job done and then some. Plus it’s $200 less than usual, and trading in a similar device could get you up to $300 in trade-in credit.
Note: Best Buy deals vary and some locations might not have this exact deal. They may have open-box deals at varying prices that can still help you save.
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
Amazon is currently offering the latest M4 iPad Pro for $928, a sizeable savings that gets you a great tablet at a great price.
Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Advertisements and social media often suggest that vitamin supplements are important for optimal health — but are they really essential for everyone?
“Vitamins have become a multi-billion-dollar industry, with shelves full of supplements promising better health, more energy and a longer life,” Andrea Soares, a registered dietitian from Top Nutrition Coaching in Miami, Florida, told Fox News Digital.
Just over 57% of American adults took dietary supplements between 2017 and 2020, with multivitamins and minerals being the most popular, according to a recent report from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).
DAILY MULTIVITAMINS MIGHT NOT HELP YOU LIVE LONGER, STUDY FINDS
But what does this mean for you? Fox News Digital spoke to the experts to find out.
What is a vitamin?
Vitamins are nutrients that are essential for the body to function normally, according to Jennifer Messer, president of the New Hampshire Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics and a registered dietitian in New Hampshire.
Just over 57% of American adults took dietary supplements between 2017 and 2020, with multivitamins and minerals being the most popular.(iStock)
“We cannot make vitamins in our bodies, and so we must get them in our diets,” she told Fox News Digital.
(The one exception is vitamin D, which people can also get from the sun.)
Vitamins are either fat-soluble or water-soluble, according to the National Institutes of Health (NIH).
BE WELL: PREPARE A DINNER RICH IN VITAMIN D FOR GOOD HEALTH
Fat-soluble vitamins — A, D, E and K — are stored in the body’s fatty tissue, liver and muscles, so they are absorbed better when taken with fatty foods.
Water-soluble vitamins are not stored in the body, so any excess amount is usually excreted in the urine.
Fat-soluble vitamins are stored in the body’s fatty tissue, liver and muscles, so they are absorbed better when taken with fatty foods. Water-soluble vitamins are not stored in the body, so any excess amount is usually excreted in the urine.(iStock)
Thirteen vitamins are considered “essential.”
These include vitamins A, C, D, E and K, as well as the B vitamins (thiamine, riboflavin, niacin, pantothenic acid, biotin, B6, B12 and folate), according to the NIH.
“For most people, a well-balanced diet is sufficient to meet daily vitamin needs,” Soares told Fox News Digital.
“For most people, a well-balanced diet is sufficient to meet daily vitamin needs.”
Vitamin A is easily obtained from eating a balanced diet, vitamin E is abundant in common foods, and most people get enough vitamin C if they eat fruits and vegetables like oranges, strawberries and bell peppers, she said.
Some people don’t get enough vitamins from dietary sources, however.
When are vitamin supplements necessary?
Certain vitamin deficiencies can potentially cause health problems.
“In the U.S., the FDA updated nutrition labels to reflect nutrients of public health concern due to deficiencies or inadequacies in the general population,” Messer told Fox News Digital.
“An individual’s supplement requirements will vary based on medical conditions, dietary restrictions, malabsorption issues and nutrient deficiencies,” an expert said.(iStock)
Vitamin A helps maintain good eyesight, for example — and children who get an inadequate amount are at risk for blindness, according to the CDC.
As vitamin D supports bone health and immune function, people with limited sun exposure may be more prone to bone diseases like osteoporosis, research has shown.
“As of recent regulations, vitamin D is required on nutrition labels,” Messer noted.
IV THERAPY CRAZE HAS AMERICANS PUMPING VITAMINS INTO THEIR VEINS: RESULTS ARE ‘PRETTY DRAMATIC’
Vitamin B12 is essential for red blood cell production and nerve function, according to Soares.
Folate supports DNA synthesis and prevents neural tube defects (birth defects of the brain, spine or spinal cord), so it is important for women to get adequate amounts before and during early pregnancy, per the CDC.
It’s a common misconception that vitamin supplements are beneficial for everyone, an expert pointed out.(iStock)
It’s a common misconception, however, that vitamin supplements are beneficial for everyone, according to Messer.
“Technically, all vitamins are necessary — however, it is unnecessary to supplement a vitamin unless you are found to be deficient,” she said.
“An individual’s supplement requirements will vary based on medical conditions, dietary restrictions, malabsorption issues and nutrient deficiencies.”
“It is unnecessary to supplement a vitamin unless you are found to be deficient.”
Certain groups may have a greater need for vitamin supplements than others.
“While a vegan diet can fulfill many nutrient requirements, there are certain vitamins, such as vitamin B12 and vitamin D, that may need closer attention,” Messer said.
Vitamin A is easily obtained from eating a balanced diet, vitamin E is abundant in common foods, and most people get enough vitamin C if they eat fruits and vegetables like oranges, strawberries and bell peppers, an expert said.(iStock)
People who need to avoid certain foods due to allergies or intolerances may also require supplementation.
People managing certain gastrointestinal conditions like Celiac disease, Crohn’s disease or ulcerative colitis can have impaired nutrient absorption, particularly with fat-soluble vitamins, Messer noted.
IMPROVING MEMORY MAY BE AS EASY AS POPPING A MULTIVITAMIN, STUDY FINDS
Liver disease can also impair the body’s ability to store some vitamins, particularly those that are fat-soluble.
Chronic kidney disease can affect the balance of certain vitamins, especially vitamin D, Messer said.
The quality and safety of dietary supplements can vary widely, as they are not FDA-regulated.(iStock)
Athletes with a high training load may also require additional vitamins to support energy metabolism and bone health, she added.
Experts recommend consulting with a doctor before taking a supplement. A simple blood test can reveal if any nutrients are at deficient levels.
Ensuring supplement safety
Fat-soluble vitamins — A, D, E and K — can accumulate in the body and lead to toxicity if taken in excess, according to Messer.
“Water-soluble vitamins (like B and C) are generally excreted if taken in excess, but mega-dosing can still have unwanted side effects,” she told Fox News Digital.
Experts recommend talking to your doctor before starting any new supplements.
The quality and safety of dietary supplements can vary widely, as they are not FDA-regulated.
“It’s important to choose reputable brands and products due to possible variances in the amount of nutrients listed on the label, as well as potential contamination,” Messer advised.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
She recommends searching for a third-party tested seal on the supplement’s label, such as “USP Verified,” which indicates that the product “contains the ingredients listed on the label in the declared potency and amounts.”
Many people often inquire about vitamin D supplements, Messer said.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“It’s important to supplement only with the required amount of vitamin D if a deficiency is confirmed through labs,” she cautioned.
(The Endocrine Society — a global organization focused on endocrinology and metabolism — now no longer recommends routine screening or vitamin D supplementation for healthy adults under the age of 75 years old.)
People can increase vitamin D levels through exposure to sunlight.(iStock)
“It can be dangerous if vitamin D levels remain high over a prolonged period, as excessive amounts may cause an array of issues, including kidney stones,” Messer added.
It’s also important to be aware of any potential interactions between vitamins and other medications, experts say.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“Medication interactions occur when vitamins like K reduce the effectiveness of blood thinners, or calcium affects antibiotic absorption,” Soares warned.
Experts recommend talking to your doctor before starting any new supplements to discuss potential risks and safe dosage amounts.
Parineeti Chopra’s latest foodie update came in the form of a throwback post. The actress took to Instagram to share glimpses from a Maldives trip she took some time ago. She was accompanied by her husband, Raghav Chadha to the dreamy destination. The couple’s vacation included spending time by the picturesque beach, cycling across the beautiful landscape and unwinding at a spa with panoramic views. That’s not all. Parineeti also shared two food photos. One shows what looks to be rice shaped in the form of a heart. Another shows a bowl of “Tahini Nutella”. As per the description card in the photo, it is rich in antioxidants and has anti-inflammatory properties.
Parineeti captured the post, “A beautiful resort, a beautiful boy and me.” Take a look below:
Also Read:Parineeti Chopra Enjoys Lip-Smacking Indian Food In London – See Pics
While “Tahini Nutella” may sound a bit too bizarre to some, Parineeti Chopra doesn’t shy away from trying unusual food combinations. Before this, she shared a video in which she is seen savouring a fusion of flavours that may not appeal to everyone. In the reel, she takes a piece of gluten-free toast, tops it with a little avocado, dips it in a bowl full of sambar, and puts some imli chutney on top before eating it. When asked about how it tastes, the actress replied, “So good.” Click here to read the full story.
Although Parineeti Chopra may enjoy experimental delicacies, she also loves classic treats. She once posted about her “recipe for unlimited happiness”. It featured the lip-smackingly tangy raw mango which has many fans. Read the complete article here to find out more.
Also Read:‘Punjabi Girl’ Parineeti Chopra’s Latest Foodie Update Shows Her Love For Spicy Treats
President Xi Jinping said on Monday that Chinese people will score more remarkable achievements and make greater contributions to the noble cause of peace and development of humanity.
Xi, also general secretary of the Communist Party of China Central Committee and chairman of the Central Military Commission, made the remarks at a reception at the Great Hall of the People in Beijing to celebrate the 75th anniversary of the founding of the People’s Republic of China.
Taylor Swift may be a billionaire entertainer with an incredible record-breaking world tour underway, but to her three cats, she’s just “Mom.” Taylor has never hesitated to make her love of cats a significant part of her personality, and that’s just made the Swifties love her even more.
If you’ve seen glimpses of Taylor’s cats on social media and wondered how many she has (three, by the way), what their names are, and how she acquired them, you’ll want to keep reading. Read on to learn everything you’ve ever wanted to know about Ms. Swift’s fur babies, including their breeds and origin stories.
How Many Cats Does Taylor Swift Have?
Taylor Swift’s fur family includes three cats: Meredith Grey, Olivia Benson, and Benjamin Button.
Meredith Gray, named after the character of the same name in Taylor’s favorite television show, Grey’s Anatomy, is the oldest of the three. Meredith was born on November 10, 2010, and Swift adopted her on Halloween the following year.
Her second cat—Olivia Benson—was named after a character on Law & Order: Special Victims Unit, another of Swift’s favorite TV shows. Olivia was born on January 23, 2014, and welcomed with open arms by Swift and Meredith in June of that same year.
The most recent adoptee into the Swift family is Benjamin Button, who was named after the main character in the 2008 film The Curious Case of Benjamin Button. Benjamin was born on December 18, 2018, and adopted in 2019.
What Breed Are Taylor Swift’s Cats?
Meredith Grey and Olivia Benson are both Scottish Folds. These beautiful cats, sometimes also known as “Lops,” are known for their adorably round appearance. This breed is very distinctive thanks to a natural dominant gene mutation that causes their ears to fold toward the front of their heads. Not all Scottish Folds have folded ears, but both Meredith and Olivia do.
Benjamin Button is a Ragdoll. These big, fluffy cats are known for their incredibly docile and calm nature. In fact, their breed name is a nod to the cat’s tendency to go entirely limp and relax whenever picked up.
Taylor’s Cats in the Media
Like their Mom, Taylor’s cats appear to be naturals in front of the camera.
Meredith is the shyest of all Taylor’s pets, though she and Olivia appear together in Taylor’s 2019 music video for “ME!” However, it’s not just the two Scottish Folds who appear in this video. Taylor actually first met Benjamin on the set.
In the music, Brendon Urie of the band Panic! at the Disco is seen gifting the kitten to Taylor’s character. She immediately fell in love with Benjamin and reportedly asked the handle, “Can I have him?” The handler replied with, “He is available,” and the rest is history.
Olivia is a bit of an overachiever, appearing in Taylor’s “Blank Space” music video and Taylor and Ice Spice’s single “Karma.” She was even nominated for six awards, including the iHeartRadio Music Awards’ Cutest Musician’s Pet award and the Nickelodeon’s Kids’ Choice Awards’ Favorite Pet award (which she won).
Benjamin also appears as a cat design on the wristwatch in Taylor’s “You Need to Calm Down” music video. He shared the TIME magazine cover with his Mom when she was awarded the “Person of the Year 2023” award.
Does Travis Kelce Have Pets?
Whether you consider yourself a Swiftie or not, you’ve undoubtedly heard about Taylor’s whirlwind romance with Kansas City Chiefs’ tight end Travis Kelce. But how does Travis fit into Taylor’s feline-centric family? Does he have pets of his own?
Travis has two dogs: a Pomsky (Pomeranian x Siberian Husky) named Chauncey and a Goldendoodle (Golden Retriever x Poodle) named Rambo.
Final Thoughts
Taylor Swift, the billionaire, might be unrelatable to much of the population, but her as a cat mom is something we can all identify with. Taylor clearly loves her pets, and we love seeing that glimpse of normalcy peek through when she shares them with her fans on social media and in her music videos.
Featured Image Credit: rock the stock, Shutterstock
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
CLINIQUEOV ruž za usne Black Honey već nekoliko godina drži status apsolutnog favorita među ljubiteljima šminke. Ovaj kultni ruž postao je neizostavan dio make-up rutine mnogih, a njegova popularnost ne jenjava, pogotovo na TikToku, gdje ga korisnici ne prestaju hvaliti.
Iako je često teško doći do njega (jer je stalno rasprodan), postoji sjajna zamjena koju mnogi koriste – Nivea balzam za usne u boji Blackberry.
Hit je na TikToku
Ovaj Nivein balzam postao je pravi TikTok hit jer je povoljan i kvalitetan. On ne samo da hidratizira usne već daje i blagu boju, idealnu za prirodan i suptilan izgled. Balzam ima lagani finiš pa više djeluje kao prirodna boja na usnama nego kao sjajni ruž.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Nekima je bolji od originala
Jedna TikTok korisnica je čak rekla da joj je Nivein balzam draži od originalnog Black Honeyja jer nije previše sjajan i više izgleda prirodno. “Savršen je za svaki dan – daje mi prirodan izgled”, napisala je jedna djevojka, dok je druga dodala: “Volim ga jer je hidratantan, ali ne previše sjajan. Idealna nijansa za jesen!”
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Reggie Bush looked out last August from the rooftop deck of the Coliseum, the stadium where he became a star two decades earlier, flanked by attorneys on either side. The famed Trojan back was in the stadium to announce a lawsuit against the NCAA, an opening salvo in the legal fight to clear his name. But for a moment, between shots at the NCAA, Bush let himself imagine a day when his Heisman Trophy was returned and he could once again lead USC’s football team out onto the field below.
“I’ve got dreams of coming back in this stadium and running out of that tunnel,” Bush said. “I’ve got dreams of walking back in here and seeing my jersey and my banner right down there next to the rest of the Heisman Trophy winners. But I can’t rightfully do that without my Heisman Trophy.”
Those dreams had been deferred during a decade of NCAA-imposed exile, when USC was forced to disassociate entirely from Bush. Resentment festered in the meantime, as Bush and his peers questioned why the school hadn’t fought harder to defend him.
The relationship remained complicated, even after USC officially welcomed Bush back in 2020. But three years later, efforts were being taken by USC to repair it. The school had just jointly filed a petition with Bush and his attorneys to lobby the NCAA for reconsideration in its 2010 case. Jennifer Cohen, who had just taken the job as USC’s athletic director, was already signaling an eagerness to bring Bush back into the Trojan family. Support for the former Trojan star now stretched all the way up to the office of USC president Carol Folt, who personally signed off on the petition to the NCAA.
When Bush got the Heisman back in April, USC toasted the trophy’s “rightful return” and praised Bush for showing “the utmost resiliency and heart throughout this process.” That summer, with the trophy now in hand, USC and Bush’s team began discussing dates for his tunnel dream to become a reality.
On Aug. 28, in an interview with The Times, Bush said the two sides hadn’t settled on a date, but that plans for him to lead USC’s football team out of the tunnel were “definitely in the works.”
“I can’t wait for it to happen,” he said. “My wife and kids will be there as well. It will be an amazing day and an amazing opportunity, and I look forward to that day.”
“It’s not even something USC would need to ask me. It’s already a yes.”
In reality, Bush and USC had already set a date for his triumphant return, only for the running back to reverse course. The two sides agreed in early August that Bush would be honored ahead of the home opener against Utah State on Sept. 7. Preparations were already being made at the Coliseum to retire his number and immortalize his No. 5 jersey in the stadium.
Former USC running back Reggie Bush speaks at a press conference at the Coliseum in August 2023.
(Wally Skalij / Los Angeles Times)
But the same week that Bush told The Times how eager he was to lead the Trojans out of the tunnel, Bush’s team told USC that the timing wasn’t right.
Before Bush got involved with USC again, he and his legal team had two requests from the school, Levi McCathern, his attorney, told The Times.
Number one was for USC to “get behind us and try and get these records reinstated” by the NCAA.
“He felt like USC should get strongly behind that effort,” McCathern said of Bush.
Number two was the bolder ask: Bush believed USC should reimburse the running back for “the attorneys’ fees that he incurred trying to get the Heisman Trophy.”
“Can you look at how much money Reggie spent out of his pocket on attorneys? Which is a lot, because he had attorneys before me as well trying to get the Heisman Trophy back,” McCathern said. “Could you look at that and see if you couldn’t reimburse him some of the money he did, since y’all now have the trophy sitting in your [lobby] that you use with recruits and all that?”
McCathern said he was “almost embarrassed talking … about how reasonable” their requests were. The university declined anyway.
“Part of getting Reggie’s Heisman back, we got the Heisman back for USC as well. So their trophy was returned to them. Which is obviously something they can use to market,” McCathern continued. “But there still wasn’t really any interest at all from them in trying to reimburse Reggie for what he had to do to get it back. And again, without getting too deep into the entire process, obviously no one on the non-Reggie Bush side was rushing forward to try and right the wrongs that happened to Reggie.”
Still, Bush was on the sideline, smiling in USC gear, before the Trojans’ season opener in Las Vegas. But behind the scenes, USC and Bush’s attorneys had reached a stalemate.
“Reggie got tired of waiting,” McCathern said.
On Sept. 23, McCathern’s law office sent out a newsrelease announcing that Bush was suing USC, as well as the NCAA and Pac-12, “for profiting from uncompensated use of [his] name, image and likeness.”
The release was the first USC had heard of Bush’s plans to file suit.
The complaint states that USC, as well as the NCAA and Pac-12, “reaped a tremendous financial reward from using Reggie Bush’s name, image and likeness while he was playing college football on television” and that Bush is now “entitled to restitution of all profits earned by defendants” through use of his name.
How much Bush is asking for in restitution from USC and the other two defendants is unclear. McCathern said that experts told him USC made “hundreds of millions” off of his client’s name, image and likeness through various revenue streams. McCathern also told The Times he never actually broached the topic of back NIL pay with USC before the lawsuit was filed. He said that was because the school already denied the request to pay attorneys’ fees.
“The next step in that process obviously would’ve been talking about, can we get some small percentage?” McCathern said.
Now those efforts to recoup what Bush believes he’s owed have spilled into public view, leaving USC in an awkward place with one of its biggest and most visible stars. A relationship that once seemed to be on the mend may never be fully repaired.
USC declined to comment on any specifics of Bush’s lawsuit. But in a statement to The Times, USC said support for Bush would endure in spite of the ongoing litigation.
“USC loves Reggie,” a university spokesperson said. “Our fans love Reggie. He is at the core of some of the best memories in our storied tradition. Our goal throughout this entire process has been to ensure the Trojan Family can celebrate Reggie and all he has accomplished at every opportunity. That is what motivated us as we worked to have his Heisman Trophy reinstated in the spring. That is what motivated us as we returned No. 5 to the Peristyle inside the Coliseum this fall. That is what motivates us as we engage with the Big Ten and NCAA to discuss the potential of having his records reinstated. That is why we have invited him back to the Coliseum to lead the team out of the tunnel.
“It’s also why we were surprised, in the midst of an ongoing dialogue with Reggie’s team, to find out about this lawsuit through a press release. We can’t comment on the lawsuit because it’s ongoing. That said, Reggie is a Trojan for life, and we remain committed to restoring and honoring his legacy and celebrating him with our fans at every opportunity.”
Bush and his legal team now believe that legacy will someday include Bush as “the face of this step for other college athletes” who hope to recoup lost NIL pay. His defamation case against the NCAA also remains ongoing, in spite of the organization’s many efforts to throw out the case.
McCathern reiterated that the NCAA, not USC, was still the central focus of Bush’s legal ire. He added that he welcomed the chance to “talk with USC about any ways to work these things out. Or any of the other defendants.”
“I wish everybody would sit down around a table and just work things out, but unfortunately, it seems like that’s not the way things happen in our society,” McCathern said.
Bush, his attorney says, is still hopeful that he can repair the relationship with his alma mater. Albeit with certain conditions.
“I think USC oughta sit down and take a look at what they made off of Reggie,” McCathern said, “and see if they don’t think it’s fair that Reggie gets some portion of that back.”
Parineeti Chopra and Raghav Chadha celebrated their first wedding anniversary in the Maldives. Check out her new post from the holiday.
Parineeti Chopra and politician-husband Raghav Chadha travelled to the Maldives to celebrate their first wedding anniversary. On Tuesday, Parineeti shared inside pictures from their vacation featuring Raghav’s passport flex, scenic locales, and much more.
Photos from Parineeti Chopra and Raghav Chadha’s Maldives vacation.
Parineeti Chopra’s Maldives vacation album
Parineeti shared pictures from her and Raghav’s wedding anniversary trip to the Maldives with the caption, “A beautiful resort, a beautiful boy and me. Thanks joali for a wonderful 48 hours!”
The post features the actor’s selfie capturing her soaking up the sun by the beach, bicycles with their names, and a mirror selfie with Raghav. Parineeti also documented the delicious food she enjoyed at her resort and the view from her massage room.
Raghav Chadha’s passport flex
One of the pictures Parineeti shared featured her and Raghav’s passports. While the actor carried a normal passport like all Indians, the Rajya Sabha MP has a diplomatic passport. For the uninitiated, such passports are issued to people holding diplomatic status or deputed by the Government of India for official duty abroad. This allows government officials faster travel, diplomatic immunity, and visa advantages while representing the nation abroad.
Parineeti and Raghav’s first anniversary
Parineeti and Raghav spent their first wedding anniversary enjoying a peaceful vacation amid white sand beaches and the turquoise blue sea in the Maldives. Earlier, she shared another post documenting their time in the island nation. It had a photo of the couple sitting by the beach while enjoying drinks and another where they enjoyed the sunset.
Parineeti also shared a video in which she and Raghav can be seen enjoying a walk on the beach.
Last year, on September 24, Parineeti Chopra and Raghav Chadha tied the knot in Udaipur in the presence of close friends and family. The lavish ceremony took place at the Leela Palace.
Catch every big hit,…
See more
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
UPDATE: Fortnite developer Epic Games has taken Battle Royale, Creative, LEGO Fortnite, Rocket Racing and Fortnite Festival offline for server maintenance. The Fortnite server downtime has nothing to do with the recent PlayStation Network issues, which appear to have been fixed after going offline overnight. Instead, this is scheduled maintenance for all Fortnite game modes on all platforms. The game is expected to remain offline until around 11am BST. In the meantime, you can check out the update 31.30 patch notes.
ORIGINAL: Fortnite fans are looking forward to the release of update 31.30, which is only the third big update of the season so far. Available on PS5, PlayStation 4, Xbox Series X|S, Nintendo Switch, Android and PC, update 31.30 will be available to download and install on the morning of October 1. As a numbered update, the download will be accompanied by an extended period of server downtime, which means you won’t be able to play Fortnite, LEGO Fortnite, Rocket Racing and Fortnite Festival for at least a couple of hours. If you want to know when you can log back into Fortnite, check out the 31.30 server maintenance schedule below.
According to Epic Games, Fortnite Battle Royale and all of its companion game modes will be taken offline at 9am BST.
However, as Epic points out in a tweet announcing the downtime, matchmaking will be disabled at around 8.30am UK time.
“Downtime for v31.30 begins at 4 AM ET with matchmaking ending shortly beforehand,” Epic explains.
Epic hasn’t revealed exactly when downtime will come to an end, but maintenance typically lasts for 2-3 hours.
This means Fortnite and all of its game modes should be back online from around 11am BST UK time.
In terms of what fans can expect from the new update, Epic has officially confirmed plans to add a Sleep Mode to Fortnite.
“Starting in v31.30, Fortnite will go into Sleep Mode after a player is inactive for 15 minutes, letting your squad know you stepped away,” Epic continues.
“When in Sleep Mode, Voice Chat is paused & matchmaking is canceled. This timer can be adjusted under Game > Sleep Mode & Energy Saving.”
Epic Games has also announced plans to bring TMNT to Creative, while Fortnite insider Shiina claims former NBA player Shaq will also join the game this week.
There’s also speculation about a mini event, as well as rumours of additional Marvel crossovers.
A pair of New South Wales councils will soon receive new noise detection cameras in a bid to crack down on loud cars and hooning.
As part of the trial, due to begin before the end of 2024 and run until late 2025, noise cameras will roll out in the local government areas of Bayside (surrounding Botany Bay) and Wollongong to determine their effectiveness on reducing anti-social driving.
According to a NSW Government tender, the field trial of the noise camera system will take place “under controlled conditions” and is intended to evaluate whether the cameras “can be used to address noisy vehicles and anti-social driving”.
The noise camera program is a joint effort between the Environment Protection Authority (EPA), Transport for NSW, and NSW Police. Images of the cameras have yet to be released by the State Government.
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Mobile speed camera
ABC News reports the cameras utilise noise meters to detect sounds above a set decibel limit within a distance of around 15 metres. If a loud car is detected, cameras are then used to scan licence plates.
Under current Australian Design Rules (ADR), cars built before 2005 are subject to a noise limit of 90 decibels. For cars built before January 1983, the limit is 96 decibels.
There are limits for motorcycles too, as models built after March 1, 1984 are subject to a 94-decibel limit. The limit for older motorcycles is 100 decibels.
In NSW, motorists face fines of up to $600 if their vehicle is found to be 15 decibels or more above the limit – though a noise reading must be done while the vehicle is stationary.
ABC News reports it’s unclear if laws will be changed to allow the use of noise camera readings on moving vehicles when enforcing fines, or if warnings will be issued under the trial instead.
Mobile phone detection camera
While the EPA says, “the cameras will be installed in the Bayside and Wollongong council areas, at locations agreed with each council”, the location of noise cameras could move “from time-to-time”.
Crowdsourced data collected by Bayside Council reportedly reveals hooning hotspots of Bay Street, Brighton Le Sands; Clareville Avenue, Sandringham; and Russell Avenue, Dolls Point.
Noise cameras are currently in use overseas in heavily populated cities such as New York City and London.
New York trialled one camera in 2021 and has since expanded the network to seven, likely contributing to the fine a Lamborghini owner received in the city last month.
Offenders in New York are fined US$800 (A$1158) for the first offence, followed by US$1700 (A$2460) and US$2700 (A$3906) for subsequent offences.
The cameras were trialled in one London borough in 2020. During a three-month period, they reportedly contributed to 69 warnings and 163 fines and were followed by more cameras in the area.
MORE: Lamborghini owner sues after copping fine for stock exhaust
SEBI chairperson Madhabi Puri Buch (File Photo: Credits- X)
Sebi is expected to take measures regarding the Futures and Options (F&O) segment very soon
Capital markets regulator Sebi is expected to take measures regarding the Futures and Options (F&O) segment very soon, in a bid to enhance investor protection, its senior official said on Tuesday.
The statement comes a day after the Sebi board met on Monday and cleared several key proposals.
Talking about F&O, Sebi’s whole-time member Ashwani Bhatia, said, “Sebi is very soon going to do something about F&O. Study has come (recently)”.
The regulator, in its consultation paper recently, proposed seven measures to tighten the rules for index derivatives– revise the minimum contract size and require the upfront collection of option premiums intra-day monitoring of position limits, rationalisation of strike prices, removal of calendar spread benefit on expiry day and increase in near contract expiry margin.
If implemented, these measures would help in improving risk management and increase transparency in the derivatives market.
In its consultation paper, the regulator had suggested to revise the minimum contract size for index derivatives in two phases, considering market growth.
In phase 1, the minimum contract value at the time of introduction should be between Rs 15 lakh and Rs 20 lakh. After six months, phase 2 will raise the minimum value to between Rs 20 lakh and Rs 30 lakh.
The current minimum contract size of Rs 5 lakh to Rs 10 lakh was last set in 2015.
A recent study by Sebi revealed that 93% of over 1 crore individual F&O traders incurred average losses of around Rs 2 lakh per trader (inclusive of transaction costs) during the three years from FY22 to FY24.
The aggregate losses of individual traders exceeded Rs 1.8 lakh crore over the three years between FY22 and FY24.
The report highlights an increase in the loss-making individual investors in F&O compared to 89% in FY22.
Tax Breaks for Municipal Bonds
Sebi has also urged the government to introduce tax breaks for subscribers of municipal bonds, which are crucial for funding infrastructure development.
The regulator will make a case for a tax break for municipal bonds during a meeting with the finance commission, Bhatia said.
Since 1997, municipalities have raised Rs 2,700 crore through bonds for infrastructure projects.
Namit Singh Sengar
Namit writes on personal finance, economy and brands. Currently contributing to News18.com as a Senior Sub Editor in the business vertical. Prior to t…Read More
CANADA AND America’s economies are joined at the hip. Some $2bn of trade and 400,000 people cross their 9,000km of shared border every day. Canadians on the west coast do more day trips to nearby Seattle than to distant Toronto. No wonder, then, that the two economies have largely moved in lockstep in recent decades: between 2009 and 2019 America’s GDP grew by 27%; Canada’s expanded by 25%.
Apple just launched the iPhone 16 lineup, but don’t forget about the company’s cheaper, smaller model: the $429 iPhone SE.
The pint-size iPhone made a comeback in 2020 and 2022, and another new version is expected to arrive in early 2025, according to Bloomberg.
Unlike Apple’s flagship iPhone family, the iPhone SE’s launch timing is somewhat irregular. The first generation SE launched in 2016, followed by the second version in 2020 and the third in 2022. Apple also hasn’t mentioned whether it plans to release new iPhone SE models moving forward since it rarely speaks about future products. But now that Apple has moved away from the iPhone Mini, the iPhone SE has an important role to play as the more portable and more affordable iPhone in Apple’s lineup.
Read more: After 2 Weeks With the iPhone 16, This Is My Favorite Feature
There’s plenty of room for Apple to further improve its cheaper iPhone. While my colleague Patrick Holland praised the 2022 iPhone SE for its accessible price and familiar home button, he criticized it for its lack of night mode photos and dated design. Android competitors like Samsung and Google have also improved their similarly priced budget phones in recent years. The Google Pixel 8A and Samsung Galaxy A55 5G both offer features once reserved for premium devices, like high refresh rates and multiple cameras.
It’s impossible to know exactly what to expect from Apple until the company makes an announcement. Based on predictions and reports from Bloomberg, MacRumors and the plugged-in TF International Securities analyst Ming-Chi Kuo, along with other leaks and Apple’s product launch history, here’s what we’d expect from Apple’s next budget iPhone.
Apple didn’t respond to a request for comment regarding a future iPhone SE when this story was originally published.
Watch this: iPhone 16 Review: All About the Buttons
iPhone SE 4 may launch in early 2025
There has been a lot of back-and-forth about the iPhone SE 4’s launch timing in recent years. But an August report from the often-accurate Mark Gurman of Bloomberg suggests that a new iPhone SE could debut in the beginning of 2025. That suggests it may arrive in the first quarter, which would line up with Apple’s previous iPhone SE release dates. The first and third generation models, for example, both launched in March.
The report comes after reports and speculation about the iPhone SE’s existence have been uncertain over the last several years. In 2019, the analyst Kuo said Apple was working on an iPhone SE with a full-screen design similar to the iPhone XR, as MacRumors reported at the time. Apple has released two versions of the iPhone SE since then that retain the old iPhone 8-inspired design, which led to speculation about whether the model Kuo was referring to has been canceled or postponed.
Kuo’s 2023 predictions regarding the iPhone SE 4 have also been mixed. He reported last January that an iPhone SE originally planned for 2024 was canceled but followed up to say the project had been revived. He changed his prediction again in April 2023 to say that the model he previously referred to might just be an engineering prototype for an Apple in-house 5G baseband chip. His previous comments also suggested the iPhone SE 4 would include this 5G chip.
Read more: Inside the Apple Watch Series 10’s New Sleep Apnea Detection Feature
But newer reports, including one from MacRumors, indicate Apple is indeed developing a new iPhone SE that reportedly includes some dramatic upgrades.
It will likely have a new processor and Apple Intelligence
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
The iPhone SE typically has the same processor as Apple’s most recent flagship iPhone. For example, the 2022 iPhone SE has the same chip as the iPhone 13, which launched in September 2021. Since Apple’s newest mobile chip is usually the iPhone SE’s standout feature, it’s hard to imagine Apple straying from that pattern.
But that’s more important than ever now that Apple Intelligence, the company’s suite of new AI features, is dependent on the company’s latest chips. The iPhone 16 family and last year’s Pro models are the only iPhones that will be able to run these features for now. But based on Apple’s history and Bloomberg’s report, which says the iPhone SE 4 will support Apple Intelligence, it looks like that could change in the coming months.
Apple Intelligence includes new AI-powered features such as the ability to rewrite, summarize and proofread text, a new version of Siri that’s better at understanding words even when you fumble, the ability to erase objects in photos and notification and message summaries, among other features. The first wave of Apple Intelligence features will arrive in beta next month, while more features — such as the ability to generate custom emoji — will come later.
Otherwise, the next iPhone SE could have an Apple-made 5G chip, according to Kuo. Still, it’s hard to know if that prediction still applies since he later revised his estimate to say this device was likely an engineering prototype to test that 5G chip. MacRumors also reports that the iPhone SE 4 will have an Apple-made 5G modem.
An iPhone 14-like design with an OLED screen
The iPhone 14
James Martin/CNET
If the company is working on another iPhone SE, it will likely have a 6.1-inch screen similar to Apple’s modern flagship phones. The current iPhone SE, by comparison, has a 4.7-inch screen with thick borders at the top and chin, much like the iPhone 8.
In particular, the iPhone SE 4 is expected to look a lot like the iPhone 14, which Apple launched in 2022. A MacRumors article reported in September 2023 that the iPhone SE 4 will have a modified version of the iPhone 14’s chassis and reiterated that point again in November.Bloomberg’s report also suggests the iPhone SE4 will resemble Apple’s two-year-old flagship.
It’s not just the design that’s expected to get an upgrade; the display will see improvements too. Multiple reports, including those from Kuo, MacRumors, Bloomberg, The Elec and Nikkei Asia, suggest the next iPhone SE will have an OLED screen instead of LCD. That’s a big deal because OLED typically displays richer contrast and deeper blacks, and these types of screens are consistent across the rest of Apple’s iPhone lineup.
Read more: Thinking About Buying a Foldable Phone? Here’s How to Decide
The iPhone SE will likely have a larger battery
The next iPhone SE could inherit the iPhone 14’s battery as well, according to MacRumors. If the blog’s previous reports about the iPhone SE 4 following in the iPhone 14’s footsteps prove to be accurate, a larger battery would be necessary to power its larger screen. Apple doesn’t disclose the battery capacities for its phones, but it says the iPhone 14 should get five extra hours of video playback compared to the third-generation iPhone SE. Between the new chip and bigger battery that we’re expecting to find in the next iPhone SE, it sounds like Apple’s next affordable iPhone could see some pretty significant gains in battery life.
Goodbye Touch ID, hello Face ID
Fans of Apple’s Touch ID fingerprint sensor may be out of luck. MacRumors reports that the next iPhone SE will have Face ID, like other modern iPhones, instead of Apple’s fingerprint sensor. That conflicts with Kuo’s report from 2019, which indicated that the next iPhone SE would have a smaller notch area without Face ID and Touch ID embedded in the power button. But since Kuo’s report is about five years old, that information may be outdated.
It may get the iPhone 15’s camera, USB-C and Action button
Kevin Heinz/CNET
Apple’s next wallet-friendly iPhone may have a few things in common with Apple’s newer iPhones. Since Apple switched to USB-C for the iPhone 15 lineup to comply with new European rules, it seems likely that the iPhone SE 4 could ditch the Lightning connector as well. MacRumors also claims the iPhone SE 4 will have USB-C.
The more surprising note in MacRumors’ story is that the iPhone SE 4 could gain the Action button, which is a new key for programming shortcuts that’s currently exclusive to the iPhone 16 family, the iPhone 15 Pro and iPhone 15 Pro Max. If true, it would be another sign that Apple wants to make the Action button standard across the iPhone lineup, coming after it brought the Action button to the standard models this year.
MacRumors also reports that a 48-megapixel single camera could be in store for the next iPhone SE. That would signal another similarity it could share with the iPhone 15 and 16, which also have 48-megapixel main cameras. If the report is accurate, the iPhone SE will only have one rear camera, unlike Apple’s more expensive phones. The regular iPhone 15 has wide and ultra-wide cameras, while the Pro versions have wide, ultra-wide and telephoto cameras.
But Apple introduced the “Fusion” camera on this year’s regular iPhone 16 and iPhone 16 Plus, which it says enables a 2x optical quality zoom despite lacking a dedicated telephoto lens. While reports don’t specify whether the iPhone SE 4 will have this camera, it wouldn’t be surprising if Apple implemented it to compensate for the iPhone SE’s single camera setup.
If the rumors are true, the fourth-generation iPhone SE could bring Apple’s tiny, budget iPhone up to date with the rest of Apple’s lineup. Depending on the price, it could end up being a solid choice for people in need of a more modern iPhone that don’t care about the iPhone 16’s extra flourishes, like the Camera Control button.
Apple’s iPhone 16, 16 Plus Show Off Bolder Colors and Buttons
It has been added to municipal water for decades, but a federal judge in California has ordered the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to further regulate fluoride because high levels could pose “an unreasonable risk” to the intellectual development of children.
U.S. District Judge Edward Chen ruled Tuesday that the scientific evidence of fluoride’s health risks when ingested at current prescribed levels requires stricter regulation under the 2016 Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA). The act provides a legal pathway for citizens to petition the EPA to consider whether an industrial chemical presents health risks.
Chen, in his 80-page ruling, wrote there is “little dispute” over whether fluoride is hazardous and ordered the EPA to take steps to lower that risk, but didn’t say what those measures should be.
“Indeed, EPA’s own expert agrees that fluoride is hazardous at some level of exposure,” the judge said. “And ample evidence establishes that a mother’s exposure to fluoride during pregnancy is associated with IQ decrements in her offspring.”
FLUORIDE IN WATER LINKED TO LOWER INTELLIGENCE
A drop of water drips from a leaky faucet.(iStock)
“Between 1981 and 1984, fluoride’s association with adverse effects including osteosclerosis, enamel fluorosis, and psychological and behavioral problems was contested,” Chen said.
At the same time, he wrote that the court’s finding “does not conclude with certainty that fluoridated water is injurious to public health,” Chen said. “Rather, as required by the Amended TSCA, the Court finds there is an unreasonable risk of such injury, a risk sufficient to require the EPA to engage with a regulatory response.
“This order does not dictate precisely what that response must be. Amended TSCA leaves that decision in the first instance to the EPA. One thing the EPA cannot do, however, in the face of this Court’s finding, is to ignore that risk,” Chen added.
“If the Court finds anew that the chemical at issue presents an unreasonable risk, it then orders the EPA to engage in rulemaking regarding the chemical,” the judge said. “The EPA is afforded in the first instance the authority to respond; regulatory actions can range from requiring a mere warning label to banning the chemical.”
An EPA spokesperson, Jeff Landis, told The Associated Press that the agency was reviewing the decision but offered no further comment.
It’s the first time a federal judge has made a determination about the neurodevelopmental risks to children of the recommended U.S. water fluoride level, said Ashley Malin, a University of Florida researcher who has studied the effect of higher fluoride levels in pregnant women.
She called it “the most historic ruling in the U.S. fluoridation debate that we’ve ever seen.”
Currently, more than 200 million Americans, or about 75 percent of the population, drink fluoridated water.
Fluoride is added to many brands of toothpaste(iStock)
DOES FLUORIDE IN DRINKING WATER HURT YOUR BRAIN?
In 1950, federal officials endorsed water fluoridation to prevent tooth decay, and they continued to promote it even after fluoride toothpaste brands hit the market several years later. In 1945, Grand Rapids, Michigan became the first city in the world to fluoridate its water supply.
Critics have long said that washing teeth with fluoride is not comparable to the risks posed by ingesting fluoride, with the latter potentially triggering harmful neurotoxic effects.
Since 2015, federal health officials have recommended a fluoridation level of 0.7 milligrams per liter of water. For five decades before that, the recommended upper range was 1.2 “after evidence increasingly established fluoride’s connection to adverse effects, including severe enamel fluorosis, risk of bone fracture, and potential skeletal fluorosis,” the judge wrote. Skeletal fluorosis is a potentially crippling disorder which causes weaker bones, stiffness and pain.
The World Health Organization has set a safe limit for fluoride in drinking water of 1.5. Separately, the EPA has a longstanding requirement that water systems cannot have more than 4 milligrams of fluoride per liter of water.
The case was brought by Food and Water Watch, an advocacy organization which petitioned the EPA to investigate lowered IQs in children allegedly caused by fluoride. The EPA denied the group’s 2016 petition calling for the agency to ban or limit the fluoridation of drinking water.
Food & Water Watch and several co-petitioners subsequently sued the EPA to compel action citing the mounting scientific evidence of toxicity when fluoride is ingested.
“Today’s ruling represents an important acknowledgment of a large and growing body of science indicating serious human health risks associated with fluoridated drinking water,” the group said in a statement.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
A water utility foreman at a plant where fluoride is added to the drinking water in Healdsburg, California.(Michael Macor/The San Francisco Chronicle via Getty Images)
“This court looked at the science and acted accordingly. Now the EPA must respond by implementing new regulations that adequately protect all Americans – especially our most vulnerable infants and children – from this known health threat.”
Tuesday’s ruling cited a review of 72 human epidemiological studies and available literature by the U.S. National Toxicology Program which concluded that fluoride is connected to reduced IQ in children.
“Notwithstanding recognition by EPA’s expert that fluoride is hazardous, the EPA points to technicalities at various steps of the risk evaluation to conclude that fluoride does not present an unreasonable risk,” Chen said. “Primarily, the EPA argues the hazard level and the precise relationship between dosage and response at lower exposure levels are not entirely clear. These arguments are not persuasive.”
Every festival in India is celebrated with great enthusiasm, and one of the most notable is Navratri. Although Navratri occurs four times a year, Chaitra Navratri and Sharad Navratri hold special significance. This year, Sharad Navratri begins on October 3 and continues until October 12. The festival of Durga Puja takes place during Sharad Navratri, holding particular importance for the Bengali community around the world. This festival celebrates the homecoming of Goddess Durga, along with her children-Lakshmi, Saraswati, Ganesh, and Kartik. Also known as Durgotsav, it is a five-day festival starting on the sixth day of Sharad Navratri, known as Shashthi. It then proceeds to Maha Saptami, Maha Ashtami, Maha Navami, and finally Vijayadashami. On the last day (Vijaya Dashami), devotees immerse the idols of Goddess Durga and her children in water.
When Is Durga Puja 2024
This year, the Durga Puja celebration starts on October 9, 2024:
Mahashashthi – October 9, 2024
Maha Saptami – October 10, 2024
Maha Ashtami – October 11, 2024
Mahanavami – October 12, 2024
Vijayadashami or Dussehra – October 12, 2024
(Source: www.drikpanchang.com)
Durga Puja 2024: Significance of Durga Puja
Many stories surround Durga Puja, one of which is that Goddess Durga returns to her home during this time. This festival symbolizes the victory of good over evil. According to religious beliefs, Durga fought the demon Mahishasura for nine days, ultimately defeating him on the Dashami of Ashwin Shukla Paksha. In Hinduism, the nine forms of Goddess Durga are worshipped for nine days, culminating in Vijayadashami on the tenth day. During these five days, devotees decorate their homes and pandals, install idols of Goddess Durga, wear new clothes, and celebrate with joy. Food also plays an essential role during Durga Puja.
Here are some special dishes prepared during Durga Puja:
People enjoy a variety of vegetarian and non-vegetarian dishes during this festival. From biryani and fish curry to rolls and chowmein, a wide range of dishes are made. Additionally, traditional foods like khichdi, luchi, sandesh, payesh, and rasmalai are quite popular.
On the occasion of Durga Puja, a special khichdi is offered to Goddess Durga. Click here to know the recipe for khichdi.
Luchi: Luchi is a deep-fried Indian flatbread which is normally made in Bengali households during festivals- it is very similar to poori. Click here for the recipe.
Sandesh: Sandesh is a popular Bengali sweet, made with sweetened cottage cheese and flavoured with cardamom and kesar.Click here for the recipe.
Rasmalai: Rasmalai is a delectable Bengali dessert made with chhena balls and soaked in malai. A must-try at home during the festive season.Click here for the recipe.
Payesh: Payesh is a Bengali version of kheer. The rice and milk pudding is flavoured with cardamom, dry fruits and a sprinkle of rose water.Click here for the recipe.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-09-30/DPP-s-militarization-will-only-lead-to-more-danger-Chinese-mainland-1xk2YyUDGKI/img/6340b2d9b15c49969f5764c664b855c0/6340b2d9b15c49969f5764c664b855c0.png' alt='Chen Binhua, a spokesperson for the Taiwan Affairs Office of the State Council, speaks at a press conference in Beijing, China, September 11, 2024. /CFP'
The Democratic Progressive Party (DPP) authorities’ “militarization” will not bring security to the Taiwan region, but will only lead to growing dangers of conflict, a Chinese mainland spokesperson said on Monday.
Beijing firmly opposes any form of military engagement between the U.S. and China’s Taiwan region, said Chen Binhua, a spokesperson for the Taiwan Affairs Office of the State Council.
The U.S. approved $567 million in military aid for the Taiwan region on Sunday.
In the three Sino-U.S. joint communiques, the U.S. made serious commitments regarding the Taiwan question, but the U.S. actions are encouraging reckless “Taiwan independence” moves and undermining peace and stability in the Taiwan Straits, Chen said.
He urged the U.S. to sincerely adhere to the one-China principle and the three joint communiques, stop arming Taiwan, and cease sending any wrong signals to the “Taiwan independence” forces.
No matter how many weapons the DPP authorities obtain from the U.S., they cannot shake Beijing’s firm resolve to achieve national reunification, Chen added.
Flyrcado is the first positron emission tomography myocardial perfusion imaging agent of its kind designed for the detection of coronary artery disease.
A little over 9000 properties were registered in Mumbai in September, showing a fall both year-on-year and sequentially as the inauspicious shraadh period dampened buying sentiments , customers avoiding big ticket purchases.
The shraadh period this year started on September 18 and ends this week on October 3.
This is the first time since November 2023 that registrations of properties in the city have dropped below 10,000. In fact except for January this year, registrations have been well above 11,000 units. Of the total registrations residential units accounted for 80 per cent.
In August registrations were at 11,631 units while September 2023 saw registration of 10,694 units.
However when seen cumulatively for the first nine months of the year, registrations show a 12 per cent rise on year at over 1 lakh units.
Analysing the data, property consultant Knight Frank India said that over 40 per cent of the property transactions were of high value of ₹1 crore and above. This has been a trend over the past two years with demand for premium houses outstripping that of mid-income residences.
Over half of the demand was for houses in the range of 500 to 1000 square feet, though there was a distinct uptick in demand for houses sized 1000 to 2000 square feet.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
ČIZME su neizostavan modni komad svake jeseni – osim što pružaju zaštitu od kiše i hladnoće, one su ključan dio svakog stylish outfita. Ove sezone Zara je ponovno privukla pažnju jednim modelom koji je brzo postao hit među ljubiteljima mode.
Riječ je o lakiranim čizmama s niskom, takozvanom kitten potpeticom, u bordo boji, sa šiljastim vrhom. Toliko su popularne da su se gotovo potpuno rasprodale, a preostalo je svega nekoliko brojeva. To zapravo i ne čudi jer videozapisi s njima u prvom planu na TikToku broje milijunske preglede.
“Trčite u Zaru”
“Trčite u Zaru”, poručuje tiktokerica Laura, koja ih je nazvala “čizmama sezone”.
S njom se slaže tiktokerica Kaja, koja je svojim pratiteljima također poručila da “trče u Zaru”.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Tiktokerica Altyna također je pozirala u ovim čizmama, koje dolaze u najpopularnijoj boji sezone. Kombinirala ih je s bordo setom iz Zare, koji se sastojao od bluze i suknje.
“Kupila sam ih danas”
“Prekrasne su”, “Pokušavam ne kupovati u Zari, ali ove čizme su predobre”, “Krasne su, obožavam tu boju”, “Nemojte hodati, trčite”, “Danas sam ih kupila”, “Opsjednuta sam”, “Udobne su, opsjednuta sam njima”, “Vau”, “Kupit ću ih”, samo su neki od komentara na ove čizme na TikToku.
Ako su vam se svidjele i želite ih, zaista morate “trčati u Zaru” jer, kao što smo spomenuli u uvodu, na stanju je samo nekoliko brojeva te ne sumnjamo da će se ubrzo rasprodati. Možete ih vidjeti ispod.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Remember when National League pitchers batted and Clayton Kershaw seemed like an automatic out?
Your memory serves correctly: The Dodgers star left-hander batted an anemic .162 over 847 plate appearances during 13 seasons before MLB mercifully took the bat out of his — and all other pitchers — hands after the 2021 season.
Well, experts considered most adept at running the numbers calculate the likelihood of the Dodgers winning the World Series this October roughly equal to that of Kershaw getting a hit when he used to bat.
Never mind that the Dodgers (98-64) posted the best regular-season record in baseball for the third time in five seasons. Or that they won the NL West for the 11th time in 12 seasons. Or that they earned home-field advantage all the way through the World Series.
The daunting odds have little to do with the Dodgers’ patchwork starting rotation, injury to Freddie Freeman or recent history of folding early in the postseason. In a respectful nod to the delightfully unforeseen vagaries of October baseball, no team is considered even a 1-in-5 shot at being crowned World Series champion.
Yet those numbers are robust compared to much of their playoff competition. The American League East champion New York Yankees and and the NL East champion Philadelphia Phillies join the Dodgers as something of tri-favorites.
Then there is a steep drop, with the AL West champion Houston Astros and the AL Central champion Cleveland Guardians and the NL Central champion Milwaukee Brewers ranging from a high of 12.8% to a low of 2.5%, depending on the website.
The top wild-card teams are the San Diego Padres and the Baltimore Orioles, but neither is given even a 1-in-10 shot at winning it all. The chances of the other wild-card teams (Kansas City Royals and Detroit Tigers) winning are considered minuscule — although it’s worth noting that the odds of the Texas Rangers and Arizona Diamondbacks meeting in last year’s World Series were less than 1%.
So, how exactly do the experts come up with these projections? Explanations are provided on their sites (Hint: playoff scenarios are run through thousands of computerized simulations):
FanGraphs
To generate the playoff odds, we take the current standings, the remaining schedule, and each team’s projected performance. We use those inputs to simulate the remaining season 20,000 times. We aggregate these outcomes to find the probability of winning the division or a wild card spot, along with winning the World Series.
Baseball Prospectus
If you rub a crystal ball it will show you the future. If the ball is cracked you might cut yourself. Injury is more likely than insight. … Still, it is time for the annual feasting on the expectations of our projection system with the PECOTA standings. (PECOTA stands for Player Empirical Comparison and Optimization Test Algorithm, Baseball Prospectus’ proprietary system that projects player and team performance.)
Baseball-Reference
To compute these odds, we simulate the rest of the season and the postseason 1,000 times each day. The methodology relies on Baseball-Reference’s Simple Rating System, which provides a strength-of-schedule-adjusted rating of each team, expressed in runs per game better or worse than an average team.
For the purposes of the playoff odds simulation, we are calculating a value of SRS using each team’s previous 100 games, adding in 50 games of .500 ball for regression to the mean.
Realme recently launched its innovative Solid-state Camera Control Button on August 14. According to the company, the Camera Control Button is designed to revolutionise mobile photography.
“The Realme button provides an intuitive, user-friendly experience for controlling camera functions. Users can effortlessly slide the button to adjust focus or exposure, significantly enhancing shooting efficiency,” the company said
The company claims that the solid-state Camera Control Button delivers precise control, allowing users to take photos with greater ease and accuracy.
Meanwhile, the company launched the 320W SuperSonic Charge – the fastest charging technology in the world. Capable of fully charging a device within 4 minutes and 30 seconds.
Here are some key technologies Realme has focused on –
With the World’s first anti-reflective smartphone display, inspired by the structure of a moth’s eye, say goodbye to screen glare. This display reduces reflections by up to 80 per cent, giving a paper-like texture for comfortable viewing, even in bright sunlight. It also allows for clear visibility at lower brightness, helping save battery power.
Realme’s AI Motion Picture technology, powered by NEXT AI, transforms a single image into a 25-frame video, bringing your memories to life. It revives old photos by turning still moments into dynamic, living stories. For gamers, realm enhances the experience with AI Gaming Super Resolution, which uses on-device AI to deliver smooth, crystal-clear visuals while reducing the load on the chipset.
The improved 4D Game Vibration offers customizable feedback for over 100 in-game actions, from gunfire to footsteps, fully supporting popular games like Honor of Kings. With Realme Holo Audio, you can even adjust sound positioning, ensuring that incoming call alerts won’t interrupt your gaming, keeping you fully immersed.
A luxury round-the-world cruise ship beset with technical delays and docked in rainy Belfast since May is finally set to depart late Monday, prompting celebration among its passengers.
Long-delayed cruise set to leave Belfast after four months
“We are going to have one heck of a time tonight, we are going to party like there’s no tomorrow,” beaming passenger Joe Martino told AFP.
But even Monday’s departure was hit with yet another technical hiccup.
Dozens of passengers were left waiting in Belfast’s cruise terminal beyond the scheduled boarding time as a last piece of required paperwork was held up.
After Mike Petersen, head of the US-based firm Villa Vie Residences that owns the Odyssey residential cruise ship, at last announced the green light for the ship’s exit passengers cheered and hugged each other.
“The elation, the exhilaration of getting on that ship, when it takes off it will be the feeling of a lifetime,” said Martino, 61, a bearded actor from Chicago, who spent all the last four months waiting in Belfast.
Another ecstatic passenger Holly Hennessy, holding her cat called “Captain”, said: “I’ve been in Belfast for four months and two days, but hey, who’s counting!”
The Odyssey was scheduled to set sail from the Northern Irish capital on May 30 on a three-and-a-half-year cruise.
But outfitting, certification processes and engine repairs all took much longer than expected.
“Everything that could go wrong went wrong,” said Martino.
The ship had undergone repairs for engine trouble in drydock at Belfast’s Harland & Wolff, the famed shipyard where the doomed Titanic was built more than a hundred years ago.
Further delay was caused by the shipbuilder going into financial administration earlier this month.
Passengers are able to either buy or rent long-term cabins on the so-called “residential” cruise ship, with the promise of unlimited voyages around the globe.
During the long wait, passengers could spend all day on board the ship but were not allowed to sleep there, so spent the nights in hotels or rented apartments instead.
Some decided to explore Northern Ireland, while others used the opportunity to travel in Europe or join other cruises while the Odyssey remained stuck.
They then flocked back to Belfast in recent days for the expected departure, which will see the ship head first to Brest, then Bilbao, the Azores, and across the Atlantic towards the Caribbean.
The floating town, which can accommodate around 600 passengers, is due to visit all seven continents with more than 425 stops in 147 destinations planned.
Port stays will stretch from two to seven days.
pmu/sbk
This article was generated from an automated news agency feed without modifications to text.
EA Sports FC 25 is out now on PS5, PlayStation 4, Xbox Series X|S, Xbox One, Nintendo Switch and PC. Despite unfavourable reviews on Metacritic, EA FC 25 will no doubt be one of the biggest selling games of the year, especially with Black Friday and Christmas on the horizon. If you’ve been thinking about purchasing EA Sports FC 25 but are put off by the £69.99 price tag, then the good news is that you can already save money on the annual football release by taking advantage of a money saving trick available to CD Keys customers. As you can see from the link below, CD Keys customers can purchase a £70 PlayStation Store card for just £62.99.
After purchasing a top-up card from CD Keys, the retailer will send you a link with the code that can redeemed on the PlayStation Store.
Once you’ve added the credit to your PlayStation account, you can pick up the £69.99 Standard Edition of the game, having only actually spent £62.99.
The Standard Edition comes with a number of in-game bonus items, including an Ultimate Team Player Loan Item, an Ambassador Loan Item, Manager Career 5-Star items and three ICONs in Player Career.
That’s on top of a Clubs PlayStyles Slot, Player Career Personality Points and 250,000 Clubs Coins.
It’s also worth pointing out that the Standard Edition is playable on both PS5 and PS4. You can select which version you want to install when downloading from your PlayStation library.
EA Sports FC 25’s big new feature is 5v5 Rush, which is described as “a new way to play with friends in Football Ultimate Team, Clubs, and Kick-Off with small-sided gameplay”.
“In Football Ultimate Team Rush, build your dream 5-a-side squad with up to three friends, each controlling your favourite Player Item.”
Other new features include FC IQ, which is said to provide greater strategic control over teams, leading to more realistic collective movement.
Manager and Player Careers will also reportedly benefit from the ability to live out real-world storylines.
In the run up to launch, EA revealed the top 25 players based on their in-game stats. Real Madrid striker Kylian Mbappe tops the list with an overall rating of 91, followed by the Manchester City duo of Rodri and Erling Haaland, also with scores of 91.
Walkinshaw’s tuned Isuzu D-Max now has a reveal date.
The 2025 Isuzu D-Max Blade will be revealed on November 1, 2024, with local deliveries to follow “soon after”.
Walkinshaw Automotive Group says the D-Max Blade has been “reengineered specifically for local Australian conditions”.
“For as long as I can remember, customers and the media have asked about a higher-spec, off-road ready ute to rival the competition, something extremely capable, without compromise,” said Isuzu Ute Australia deputy managing director Koichiro Yoshida.
“I hope they’re ready for the answer – the D-Max Blade has been developed specifically for those Australians who like to go their own way.”
100s of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Isuzu has released a single teaser image of the D-Max Blade, but we already know what the vehicle looks like after undisguised examples were recently spied.
The Blade is the first collaboration between the Japanese brand and the Australian performance modification specialist, but far from Walkinshaw’s first attempt at making a dual-cab ute even more rugged.
The new D-Max Blade will likely sit on top of the Isuzu ute range, with a focus on off-road capability… just without any extra performance.
Despite the visual tweaks, the Blade will likely retain the D-Max’s 3.0-litre turbo-diesel four-cylinder engine, which produces 140kW of power and 450Nm of torque.
It’s long been rumoured that Isuzu would bring out a tougher-looking version of its D-Max ute, with a government approval filing from July detailing the Blade’s modifications.
The filing noted a ride height increase of 26.5mm up front and 29mm at the rear thanks to bigger wheels and different springs, along with a sailplane, high-mounted brake light, wheel-arch cladding, and a sump guard.
Axle ratings and gross vehicle mass (GVM) are unchanged, indicating the Blade will stack up against the related Mazda BT-50 Thunder as a main rival.
The Thunder brings a tougher look but remains mostly unchanged in terms of extra capability, with a steel bull bar, fender flares and a sports bar the key additions.
The finance ministry on September 30 reviewed the interest rates on small savings schemes, including public provident fund (PPF), National Savings Certificates (NSC) and Kisan Vikas Patra (KVP). However, no changes were announced for the quarter of October-December 2024.
“The rates of interest on various small savings schemes for the third quarter of FY 2024-25, starting from October 1, 2024, and ending on December 31, 2024, shall remain unchanged from those notified for the second quarter (July 1, 2024, to September 30, 2024) of FY 2024-25,” said a finance ministry notification.
As per the notification, deposits under the Sukanya Samriddhi scheme will attract an interest rate of 8.2 per cent, while the rate on a three-year term deposit remains at 7.1 per cent.
The interest rates for popular Public Provident Fund (PPF) and post office savings deposits schemes too have been retained at 7.1 per cent and 4 per cent, respectively.
The interest rate on the Kisan Vikas Patra will be 7.5 per cent, and the investments will mature in 115 months.
The interest rate on the National Savings Certificate (NSC) will remain at 7.7 per cent for the July-September 2024 period.
Like the current quarter, the Monthly Income Scheme will earn 7.4 per cent for investors.
The interest rates have been left unchanged for the last three quarters. The government had last made changes in some schemes for the fourth quarter of the last fiscal.
Small savings schemes in India are designed to provide individuals with safe and attractive options for saving money. They typically offer better interest rates compared to regular savings accounts and often come with tax benefits.
Each of these schemes has specific features, eligibility criteria, and tax implications. Depending on your financial goals, risk tolerance, and tax planning needs, you can choose the one that suits you best.
Small Savings Interest Rates October 2024
Latest Interest Rates On Small Savings Schemes:
The interest rates for the current quarter October-December 2024 are as follows:
Savings Deposit: 4 per cent
1-Year Post Office Time Deposits: 6.9 per cent
2-Year Post Office Time Deposits: 7.0 per cent
3-Year Post Office Time Deposits: 7.1 per cent
5-Year Post Office Time Deposits: 7.5 per cent
5-Year Recurring Deposits: 6.7 per cent
National Saving Certificates (NSC): 7.7 per cent
Kisan Vikas Patra: 7.5 per cent (will mature in 115 months)
Public Provident Fund: 7.1 per cent
Sukanya Samriddhi Account: 8.2 per cent
Senior Citizens Savings Scheme: 8.2 per cent
Monthly Income Account: 7.4 per cent.
The government, in June, had decided to maintain the current interest rates on all small savings schemes for the July to September period. For the October to December 2024 quarter, the decision is likely to come this month.
During this update, the Centre increased the interest rates for certain small savings schemes, including the Sukanya Samriddhi Scheme and the 3-year Time Deposit, by up to 20 basis points for Q4 FY24.
According to the June notification, deposits under the Sukanya Samriddhi scheme earn an interest rate of 8.2%, while the three-year term deposit rate remains at 7.1%.
The government sets the interest rates for small savings schemes, which are primarily managed by post offices and banks, every quarter.
In the previous announcement, the government also kept the interest rates on small savings steady for the April-June quarter.
The PPF rate has remained at 7.1% since it was reduced from 7.9% in the April-June 2020 period. Before that, it was lowered in the July-September 2019 quarter.
The rate was last increased in the October-December 2018 quarter, rising from 7.6% to 8%.
Layer-1 blockchain Sui (SUI) is all geared up to unlock 64 million tokens on October 1, which is 2.40% of the total circulating supply. SUI is witnessing heightened investor interest as the crypto community eagerly awaits the token release.
SUI To Not Witness Massive Drawdown
While token unlocks usually drive high volatility and sometimes price decline, but SUI’s price might not see a massive drawdown. Let us find out why.
Notably, SUI’s price has increased by 115% in the last 30 days, mostly due to Grayscale’s decision to launch the SUI Trust. Moreover, the project’s TVL has reached a new all-time high, suggesting boosted confidence in the altcoin’s potential.
On Tuesday, October 1, the project will unlock 64.19 million tokens, valued at over $100 million. Often, this supply shock accompanies high volatility. However, on the daily chart, the Bull Bear Power (BBP), which measures the strength of buyers and sellers, reveals that the bulls are in control.
Beyond $1.73?
Buying pressure is the most dominant, implying that SUI’s price could bounce higher than $1.73. Furthermore, Sui’s volume has also increased to $862.48 million.
Generally, increasing buying volume pushes a crypto price higher. But for that to continue, the volume must climb. If, however, the volume declines as the price rises, then the uptrend might become weak, which could be followed by a potential reversal.
Interestingly, In SUI’s case, the price has increased by 5% in the last 24 hours and the volume rose by 122% within the same period. Therefore, the token might witness a continued rally.
The altcoin continues to show remarkable strength. However, traders need to watch out for the $1.90 region, which is historically a crucial level for SUI’s price. For instance, when SUI’s price attempted to hit $2 in February, it experienced a push bask as soon as it reached $1.90. Currently, the altcoin is approaching the same zone. But with buying pressure present, it is likely to breach the region.
Additionally, the 20-day Exponential Moving Average (EMA) remains above the 50 EMA which suggests that the bullish setup is still in place, and SUI’s price can continue to appreciate.
If buying pressure helps SUI transcend the $1.90 resistance, the token may ascend to $2.10. However, a wave of profit-taking where traders sell the stock after a price rise could drive its value down to $1.45, overturning the bullish prediction.